Home

COMSPHERE 6800 SERIES NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1. Customizing Row and Column Labels The default Summary row and column labels relate respectively to the priority level of alerts and the device types The system default values for the row labels are assigned with Row 1 associated with MAJOR priority level Row 2 with MINOR priority level and Row 3 with WARNING priority level The column labels depend on the order in which the application packages are installed on the system If both the multiplexer and modem application packages are installed and your system is configured for ANALYSIS NMS support the default assignments are the same as those listed in the Summary window shown in Figure 6 18 If you do not have one or more of these application packages the columns and their associated rows would be deleted and the column labels would shift to the left There would be blank columns and rows displayed beginning from the left side of the Summary window You can customize the row and column labels in the Summary window to correspond with your customization of the categories Row and Column labels in the Summary window are changed via the Edit Row Column Labels edrcl command 6 38 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks System Default Categories Your NMS system is installed with system supplied alert selection parameters so you can immediately use the Summary window The default values for each category are listed in Table 6 5 In this
2. First 20 characters of Device Address See Table H 5 when present not used when not present See Table H 5 Key to Inventory States a active limited access r repair S stock o on order i removed The 6800 device information used for Equipment ID Equipment Alias and Endpoint Names message elements depends on the device mapping option specified in the NMS command Export File Configuration efc Table H 5 specifies for both device name and device address mappings the 6800 information used for the NMP message elements listed Table H 5 Mapping for Equipment ID Alias and Endpoint Names Device Equipment Equipment Endpoint Mapping ID Alias Names Address Device Address Device Name if Device Device Address Address is present Device Name when Device NULL otherwise Address not present Name Device Name First 20 characters of Device Device Name Address when present NULL when not present January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator Device types will be mapped into the Equipment Types of the AMI FI data as shown in Table H 6 Table H 6 Mapping for Device Type and Equipment Type Device Type Equipment Type 56 mux MUX 56mux ab DIAL ab acm COMM acm acu DIAL acu adc MOD adc apl MOD apl bridge COMM bridge brter C
3. 2 15 Shutting Down a Full Feature Workstation 000000004 2 17 Shutting Down a Basic Feature Workstation 0004 2 17 Windows Within the NMS 00 eee cee eee ee 2 22 Mouse Operations 2 0 0 cee cece cette eee 2 22 Terminology for Mouse Use 2 23 Basic Feature Workstation Windows esee 2 24 Full Feature Workstation Windows 0 00 0 e eee eese 2 25 Full Feature Workstation Window Icons and Command Buttons 2 25 SYMbOIS cer EE e eee Oe Re EES TORS el ENS 2 26 Button Window 0 0c eee 2 27 Workspace Menu 0 cece eee e 2 27 Help Features i So oS ath Ide ee he UN eiua IT 2 28 Accessing Help in Windows 0 0 00 cece ee eee eee teens 2 28 Accessing Help in Forms 0 0 0 cece eee eee ences 2 29 Accessing Help in Fields 0 0 cee cece eee eee nee 2 29 Using Pop up Menus in Mouse Supported Tasks 2 30 Using Pop up Menus in the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking Tasks 0 cece eect eee 2 30 The 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 2 31 NMS Task Descriptions n men iaie 0 00 aa a IIIA 2 32 Opening Task Windows 0 00 cece eee eee 2 33 NMS Menu Tree Hierarchy enin a a e e cece eee 2 33 User Interface on a Full Feature Workstation 0000 2 33 Key Descriptions for Menu Displays sese 2 34 Key
4. 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Overview This chapter provides information for the following areas e Concepts of Configuration Management concerning device identification addressing and standardized naming conventions and the concept of database views represented via profiles e Configuring ports for external systems configurations e Configuring of the NMS ports e Configuring multiplexers modems and other system devices e Establishing the NMS poll list e Activating your NMS system Beginning Point for NMS Configuration Activities Configuration activities begin after both NMS hardware and software are installed the System Administrator has logged into the NMS and the system time date are set Installation is documented in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide the login and set time activities are also discussed in Chapter 2 of this guide Your interface to the NMS during configuration is via NMS system commands System commands for configuration are accessed from System Management under the Manager task Refer to Chapter 2 for information on accessing or using the NMS commands If you need help identifying the correct task or the path for a command refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Command Quick Reference Guide for a menu hierarchy of NMS commands The commands to be used during N
5. The Password prompt is displayed At the Password prompt TYPE the password set up by the System Administrator PRESS Enter 3 To select Stop the System from the 6800 Series NMS Menu TYPE 2 PRESS Enter The following message appears followed by the Start up Menu The following processes are running They will be shut down y n n To stop the system TYPE y The following message appears Shutting down the AT amp T Paradyne NMS Please wait The AT amp T Paradyne NMS has been shutdown Press RETURN to continue 4 To continue PRESS Enter 5 To select Shutdown UNIX from the 6800 Series NMS Menu TYPE 9 PRESS Enter 6 The following final message appears Unix will now be shutdown y n To continue TYPE y The system displays the following message Safe to Power off Press any key to reboot 7 To turn the Altos System computer off set the power switch on the rear of the machine to the Off position To reboot the computer set the power switch to the On position The BOOT UP sequence automatically begins 2 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Shutting Down a Full Feature Workstation To terminate a session on a full feature workstation perform the following steps NOTE This procedure is the only one recommended for shutting down a full feature workstation Using a procedure other than the one described here may result in system errors 1 Select Q
6. Connectivity Map Always available Always available if a single facility Never available Network Control Available only if the external system field of the device profile defines an external system name or if the device type field has the value apl ddd dds mux ntwk 56mux swtch Invokes a Map Manager submenu Available if object list is at the lowest level of sites selectable Not available if aggregate site is selected Network Profile Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Object List Available only if a device whose parent device field in their device profile matches the device identification of the selected device Always available Available only if the selected site contains one or more devices Queue Results Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Routines Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Scheduled Items Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Connectivity Map Windows Connectivity Maps Figure 6 5 are topographical representations of device specific connections These maps are accessed by selecting one of the following A device name from an Object List or device icon and then
7. Time s Enter the time s the command is to execute for each day specified For time s format refer to the Time s field explanation for delayed command execution Last Date Enter the stop date for execution of the command If you leave this field blank the command executes indefinitely on a monthly basis For date entry parameters refer to the Date s field explanation for delayed command execution The today value is not valid for the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks Refer to Chapter 1 Introduction of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for additional information on the Schedule execution field 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 69 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Listing Displaying and Deleting Scheduled Items When you schedule an item a command or routine for execution the system automatically assigns an index number to the item Once an item is scheduled you can use the following commands e Delete Scheduled Items disi command e Display Scheduled Items dssi command e List Scheduled Items lssi command These commands are available in the Manager Map Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks These commands only affect your own scheduled items except for the System Administrator The System Administrator can also delete display the scheduled items of all users Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Mana
8. CIrFld F3 Clear Field Clears the information from the selected field and positions the cursor at the first character position of the field PrevFld F4 Moves the cursor to the previous input field MainMenu F5 Cancels the current command and returns you to the Manager main menu FillForm F6 Fills the input fields with the common values from the previous input form This key is useful if you are performing several executions of the same command and not all fields need to be changed Defaults F7 Fills the input fields with system provided default values Fields that have no default values remain unaffected Cancel F8 Cancels the current command and returns you to the previous menu Key Descriptions for Results Forms The function keys available when using results forms are described as follows Help F1 Displays a pop up Help screen explaining the function keys and how to invoke the Help feature PrevMenu F4 Previous Menu Displays the previously displayed menu MainMenu F5 Main Menu Displays the main menu of the task 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 35 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System PrevForm F6 Previous Form Displays the input form of the command last executed If the task window is newly opened no commands have been executed yet pressing Cancel F8 cancels the current command and returns you to the previous menu Manager Task User Interface Thi
9. On Connectivity Maps as devices and connections To generate Maps Object Lists and Connectivity Maps to support network devices you must populate the following fields in the device facility and site profile database Device Profiles The Site name field must contain the appropriate site name assigned to each device to locate it at the proper site on the Map The site name should have an associated site profile Facility Profile All fields specified in the Facility Profiles section of this chapter should be defined to create the Connectivity Maps appropriately Site Profile You must have a site profile for every unique site name specified in device profiles 5 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing For information required for appropriate device facilities and site placement on a map refer to the description of profiles in Chapter 3 and the description of the Map task in Chapter 6 Geographic Map The Geographic Map provides a world map graphic containing site cluster and link icons whose placement reflect the actual equipment locations within your network You can select these icons to display its related information or perform database maintenance or monitoring functions Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on the Geographic Map Connectivity Map A Connectivity Map displays a selected device and devices connected to it You can use the Connectivity Map to display connections between an
10. D 5 DATAPHONE II Mode COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Modem Addressing 0 0 eee eee eee D 6 DATAPHONE II Mode COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs Addressing Loves ee hie chads dds ood Rer Re ae es D 7 DATAPHONE II Mode SRCU Addressing D 8 DATAPHONE II Extended Polling and Addressing D 9 Extended Addressing 0 0 0 cee cece eee eee D 9 Advanced Diagnostic Protocol Mode ADp Addressing D 11 ADp Mode COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Modem Addressing D 11 ADp Mode COMSPHERE 3600 DSUs Addressing D 12 ADp Mode COMSPHERE 3800 3900 Series Modem Addressing D 13 ADp Mode SRCU Addressing 0 00002 eee eee D 14 Mode Conversions and Addressing 0 00 00 eee eens D 15 Address Validation 0 0 0 cece eect eee tenes D 16 Addressing ANALYSIS Devices seeeeee eee D 17 Addressing Conventions for Network Modems D 18 Addressing ANALYSIS Data Concentrators 0000 D 18 Addressing Multidrop Auto Call Units MACU D 19 Series 700 Multiplexer Addressing 0 0 eee e eee eee D 20 719 72x 731 740 741 742 745 and 740 56K Multiplexer Addressing bees es eet ORT BUM OS D 20 Addressing Bytex Devices 0 00 eee eect eee D 21 Addressing SNMP and Brouter Devices 000000000 ee eee D 21 This appendix explains device addressing and identifies the chie
11. Microsoft Windows controls the windowing environment on the basic feature workstation On this workstation you can only open one window at a time for NMS applications You can open additional windows concurrently for non 6800 Series applications The mouse can be used on the basic feature workstation when setting up the Microsoft Windows software and when executing functions that are Microsoft Windows related e g using the window icons explained in this section When you access the NMS applications via the Microsoft Windows environment all functions are controlled via your keyboard The Microsoft Windows package provides icons for opening up the Microsoft Windows Control menu and iconifying maximizing minimizing open windows and opening iconified windows These icons are labeled in Figure 2 18 and briefly described following the illustration UP DOWN BAR ICON ARROW ICONS lal c MG ARROW ICON 491 13171 Figure 2 18 Microsoft Windows 2 1 Window Frame with Icons Bar Icon Clicking on this bar opens the Microsoft Windows control menu Down Arrow Icon The Down Arrow icon minimizes or iconifies the window currently open on your screen An iconified window is an open window that is visually collapsed into an icon on your display screen to conserve viewing space Clicking on this icon once when a window has been iconified brings up the Microsoft Windows Control menu Double clicking clicking on the left mouse bu
12. 1 n a n a n a n a 256 2 65 2 3 1 328 1 1 328 1 2 1 328 1 65 1 328 1 65 2 1 328 1 65 3 1 328 1 1 328 1 2 1 328 1 2 65 1 328 1 2 65 2 1 328 1 2 65 3 1 256 1 256 2 1 256 2 65 1 256 2 65 2 1 256 2 65 3 1 256 1 256 2 1 256 65 1 256 65 2 1 256 65 3 491 11936b Figure D 9 Comparison Addressing of Types Address Validation When you enter only the address in an input form NMS validates the address using the following rules 1 2 No alphabetic characters are permitted in the link level address The maximum character length of the address is 63 characters The address must begin with a control channel identification followed by a slash Control channels must be from 1 through 8 numeric characters The first level of the address after the control channel must be in the range of 1 to 256 for ADp and 11 328 for DPI For DPII the last digit cannot be a 0 or 9 The second level and all succeeding levels of the address must be in the range of 1 to 256 for COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series modems in ADp mode and 1 to 256 for 3800 3900 Series modems from 1 80 for all DATAPHONE II devices and from 1 256 for 3600 Series DSUs January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing The following sections explain addressing in more detail Addressing Analysis Devices Although the NMS does not manage Model 1 devices directly it can collect information about these devices from the ANALYSIS NMS These network devices including ADCs
13. Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 592 Guyana 59 06 W 3 57 N 22 Georgetown 58 10 W 6 46 N 509 Haiti 72 38 W 19 03 N 93 Cap Haiten 72 47 W 19 47N 92 Gonaive 72 42 W 19 29 N 91 Port au Prince 72 20 W 18 33 N 504 Honduras 87 06 W 14 38 N 852 Hong Kong 114 13 E 22 16 N 23 Kowloon 114 10 E 22 19 N 36 Hungary 19 31 E 47 02 N 354 Iceland 18 00 W 64 52 N 46 Akureyri 18 04 W 65 41 N 41 Hafnarfjorour 21 58 W 64 04 N 91 India 79 12 E 21 10 N 22 Bombay 73 00 E 18 56 N 11 New Delhi 77 13 E 28 37 N 62 Indonesia 115 00 E 0 00 21 Jakarta 106 45 E 6 08 S 98 iran 54 22 E 31 55 N 31 Esfahan 51 41 E 32 41 N 51 Mashad 59 34 E 36 16 N 21 Teheran 51 26 E 35 40 N 964 Iraq 44 03 E 32 37 N 41 Baghdad 44 26 E 33 20 N 353 Ireland 7 56W 53 25 N 31 Dublin 6 15 W 53 20 N 391 Galway 9 03 W 53 16 N 972 Israel 35 00 E 30 00 N 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 F 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table F 1 6 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 4 Haifa 34 59 E 32 49 N 2 Jerusalem 35 13 E 31 47 N 3 Tel Aviv 34 46 E 32 05 N 39 Italy 12 39 E 42 34 N 55 Florence 11 15 E 43 47 N 81 Naples 14 15 E 40 50 N 6 Rome 12 30 E 41 53 N 41 Venice 12 20E 45 26 N 225 Ivory Coast 5 00 W 7 42 N 81 Japan 138 00 E 36 03 N 82 Hiroshima 132 27 E 34 23 N 6 Osaka 135 30 E 34 40
14. January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Routinable Commands Most NMS commands accessed from the Manager task can be placed in a routine Table 2 1 lists those commands that cannot be placed in a routine Core Commands Table 2 1 Non Routinable Commands in NMS Multiplexer Commands Communication Products Commands Create Routine crr Change Node Passwords chnp Call Fault Criteria cfc Create User Profile crup Edit Routine edr Change Address cha Edit User Profile edup Change Protocol Mode chpm The Edit User Profile edup command is only routinable if the password modification option is not used NOTE Trouble Tracking task commands and Trouble Inventory Reports task commands cannot be placed in a routine Manually Executing a Routine You execute a routine by entering the routine name on a Manager task s enter selection field and pressing Enter The following form is displayed Figure 2 36 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 55 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System E Hanager oO ROUTINE HANE Page 1 Commands cmd1 cmd2 cmd3 cmd4 cmd5 cmd6 Comments as specified by user during routine creation Edit before execut ing e Help Go ClrFld Prev id Hainftlenu Fil lForm Defaults Cancel L zl 493 14267 Figure 2 36 Routine Input Form Page 1 This input form contains the following f
15. NMS will process up to 30 000 call records per day If the call rate exceeds 30 000 the system stops storing call detail for that day Call summary information continues to be stored regardless of the call rate When the call rate is exceeded NMS generates a DCRE system alert which can be displayed on the Map Monitor or Summary Also mail is sent to the System Administrator explaining what happened and the actions taken The System Administrator can turn off call detail storage specify the number of devices for which call detail should be stored or turn off call statistics retrieval altogether If the call rate reaches 80 of capacity 24 000 call records during daily call detail processing a mail message is sent to the System Administrator warning of this condition Call Buffer in the Device Local 3800 Series devices store information about each call in an internal buffer If a device is experiencing a very high call rate it is possible that the call buffer in the device can overflow before NMS retrieves the call information If this happens information about subsequent calls to and from that device for that day will not be stored The NMS call retrieval process can recognize when a device s call buffer has overflowed When this happens a CBO alert is generated The alert text indicates the link level address of the local modem whose call buffer has overflowed However no summary or detail records can be stored or retrieved for th
16. Refer to the Placement of Named Sites on the Map section later in this chapter for additional information Cluster icons are labeled if possible with the common prefix in the names of the sites of the cluster For example sites labeled nyc nyc2 and nyc3 when clustered would be labeled with their common substring nyc If there are no common prefixes shared by the sites in the cluster the cluster remains unnamed when displayed on the map Alert state information is displayed for a cluster icon that contains both reporting and non reporting sites Non reporting sites are also known as unmanaged sites NMS displays alert state information in the color assigned by the user the normal state system default color for this cluster icon is green A cluster icon that contains only non reporting sites does not display alert state information and displays in the color assigned by the user the system default color for unmanaged sites is white The normal state color assignment for cluster icons is green When alerts are passed to the Geographic Map the cluster icon containing the site s with the device s reporting alerts changes color in the same manner as described for site icons for unacknowledged and acknowledged alerts Link icons display on the map as solid lines connecting site or cluster icons Both simple links and aggregate links exist within the network although they are not distinguished by different icons on the Geographic
17. net atm would translate to all devices with network names beginning with net atm ana would translate to all device names beginning with ana The asterisk by itself cannot be used You can use the keyword all to indicate all devices All device fields device address network name circuit name device name serial number using the asterisk must meet at least one of the following criteria e Contain at least one indicating a device address Begin with cir net or ser indicating the corresponding group of devices E 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Naming Conventions Question Mark If not it is assumed that the string containing the asterisk represents a device name and the expansion should be done accordingly For example nyc translates to all device names that end with nyc 2 translates to all devices on control channel 2 net translates to all devices with network names in their device profiles Multiple asterisks cannot be used in a string The question mark is analogous to the except that effective usage of is limited to one field and the question mark must be placed between two level separators Level separators are the slash dash and dot When you place the question mark between two slashes NMS finds any address that matches the given string with the question mark replaced by any string that does not contain a slash When you place the question mark between any combi
18. Command Access Levels Table B 1 12 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Internal Test it Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator List Device Group Isdg Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator List Device Profile Isdp All Levles Yes Yes Manager Map Monitor List Directory Isd All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt Isdir List Facility Profile Isfp All Levels Yes Yes Manager Map Monitor List Queue Results Isqr All Levels Yes Yes Manager No Yes Trouble No Yes Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking List Routine Isr All Levels Yes Yes Manager List Scheduled Items Issi All Levels Yes Yes Manager No Trouble No Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking List Trouble Tickets Istt All Levels No Yes Trouble Tracking Logical Link Summary Ils All Levels Yes Yes Manager Loopback Test lo Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt Ipbk Administrator Make Busy mkb Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt mb Administrator Make Channel mkcc Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Connection Administrator Make Channel Group mkcgc Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Connection Administrator Make Logical Link mkllc Manager Yes Yes Manager Connection Administrator Indicates what is shown on the screen 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network
19. ETE io ClrFld fPrevflenu Maintenu Cancel zl 493 14275 Figure 6 9 Command Menu for a Selected Object 6 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks When you select the Network Control item a Map Manager window opens This window is labeled Map Manager device name This Map Manager window initially displays the Network Control submenu If the selected object is a device subsequent submenus display only those NMS tests commands for which you have command access and that apply to the device selected based on the device type and product type Figures 6 10 and 6 11 illustrate context sensitive device command menus Map iManager Device Diagnostics and Fault Isolation I Diagnostics 2 DDD Diagnostics 3 OSU Diagnostics 4 Multiplexer Diagnostics enter selection EN ClreFld Preuflenu M Hointenu li PreuFonm EUM Cancel zi 493 14276 Figure 6 10 Network Control Submenu 1 for a Selected Object 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 25 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Nap Manager END TO END TEST Pags 1 Control Devicets Tributary Devices Humber of blocks Part number E Destination for results cnt Schedule execution now HERE 493 14277 Figure 6 11 Network Control Submenu 2 for a Selected Object Nointenu FillForm Defaults Cancel 6 26 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summ
20. Once a trouble ticket is opened you can specify an escalation date so that if the trouble ticket is not closed by a specified date mail is automatically sent to the person assigned to resolve the trouble ticket Trouble ticketing can also log the actions that are taken to resolve each trouble ticket which provides you with a history of the trouble ticket from the time it was opened to the time you close 1t Trouble management uses the INFORMIX database system You therefore have the ability to completely customize trouble tickets to fit your needs if you have the optional 4GL INFORMIX software package For more information on customizing trouble tickets refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Reports and Trouble Tracking Customization Guide The following paragraphs provide information for opening editing listing displaying and deleting trouble tickets The queue management information in the following sections only applies to Trouble Tracking Accessing the Trouble Tickets Task and Commands To access the Trouble Tickets task select Trouble Tracking from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu The Trouble Tracking menu appears as shown in Figure 7 1 From this menu you can request commands to delete display edit list and open trouble tickets You can also perform results queue and scheduling queue management tasks from this menu When you select an option from this menu Trouble Tracking displays input forms for enteri
21. System Alerts Alert Group Alert Type Priority Alert s Textual Display System Alert Groups sys database dbc 1 database table cleaned up due to overflow dbo 1 database table overflow eminent Sys muxport pollpf 1 Multiplexer polling port is down evtpf 1 Multiplexer event port is down Sys process pd 2 server machine is down pc 2 Connection lost to machine Sys callstat dcre 3 Daily call rate exceeded call detail storage stopped cbo 3 Call buffer overflow for link level address no call info stored sys profile dpmissing 2 Device profile for ACCULINK node n missing or incorrect sys com atr ATR not sent lt device name gt atr lt atr phone number gt 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 25 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks OVerVieW Sie anh EEE E Sadie oh RES a eee UOS VP OD PI 6 2 Ehe Map Task acm taut dee BL eds ue leiden ed 6 2 Creating the Map 0 2 cee a e a ar 6 3 Accessing the Map Task 0 0 e cece eee eee ene ee 6 3 Geographic Map Window 0 c cece eee eee nee 6 3 De vice Icons cab epe das ee Sats Ca ee Se eS 6 4 Site Icons ntieed ey sau hehe un keep direi be oes PO 6 4 CT ster Icons o ee as eee Ee E deep FE 6 5 Link ICONS 5 oeste iet ote A PEN dp P Med 6 5 Site Placement on the Geographic Map 000 6 5 Default Site Location on the Map esses eese 6 6 Selecting Deselecting Objects 0 0 eee eee eee 6 7
22. The C prompt appears Power down your basic feature workstation For Windows 3 0 users click on Program Manager with the left mouse button Move the down arrow key to Close and PRESS Enter or click on the Close option with the left mouse button The following Exit Windows message box Figure 2 17 appears PRESS Enter or click on OK with the left mouse button The CA gt prompt appears Power down your basic feature workstation 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System This will end your Windows session X Save Changes Cancel 491 13529 Figure 2 17 Exit Windows Message Box Windows Within the NMS The 6800 Series NMS windows are screens used to interact with different tasks Window operations differ between the basic feature and full feature workstations Window operations in both the basic feature and full feature workstations require a mouse For the basic feature workstation you can only use the mouse for window operations not NMS task operations The following sections describe mouse operations and window environments for both the basic feature and full feature workstations Mouse Operations On the full feature workstation use the mouse while in the Manager Map Monitor and Performance Reports tasks and for all window control operations e g resizing closing windows iconifying windows and selecting options from the Workspace
23. Trouble TICKETING 5 55 e e ee prex Rte e Sa serere ed 7 2 Accessing the Trouble Tickets Task and Commands 7 2 Delete Trouble Tickets llle 7 3 Display Trouble Tickets 0 0 eee cece eee 7 3 Edit Trouble Tickets 7 4 List Trouble Tickets eoo vp lee ye ee egRRITPR Cae URS 7 4 Open Trouble Ticket s ae eea e ccc eee 7 4 Results Queue Management s esee 7 5 Scheduling Queue Management 00 0 0 cece ee eee 7 6 Trouble Ticket Escalation 0 0c cece cece eee eee 7 6 Customizing Trouble Tickets 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 7 6 Trouble Tracking Reports 0 0 0 cece eect A 7 7 Automatic Trouble Reporting 0 cece eee eee eens 7 7 ATR Process within NMS 0 0 00 cece eee eee 7 7 ATR Capacity eor alate fora eae iad epe e oh ER 7 8 ATR Administration sessie orase eer harr er TA I 7 8 Initialize ATR Ports lleeeleeeeeeee IR 7 8 Authorize ATRS eeaeee So pled bee AE sedis erie EEEE 7 8 Automated Action Filters 2 0 esee 7 9 ATR States MC E CEP 7 9 ATR Phone Directory 0 0 eee cee 7 9 ATR Reports 5 ete DPEYW OA WIE ENG va eMe HER 7 11 Generating Automatic Trouble Tickets 000 000 0000005 7 13 Editing Automatically Generated Trouble Tickets 7 13 Overview Use the commands in the Trouble Tracking task to report and manage network problems You can manually create trouble tickets or re
24. You can edit all fields on the form except the Ticket field NMS automatically populates this field which cannot be changed Continue editing all the forms in the same manner Once you complete editing all forms for one ticket press F2 to display the results of your edit Pressing F2 again displays the next ticket selected for editing To view each page of the results use the PgUp and PgDn keys List Trouble Tickets Use the List Trouble Tickets function to display an abbreviated listing of the trouble tickets in the database that meet the criteria entered on the input forms If a field is left blank on the input forms the field is disregarded during the search When a trouble ticket that matches the selection criteria is found the data is extracted and listed on a two line display You can list trouble tickets using the List Trouble Tickets stt command or you can access the List Trouble Tickets function from the Trouble Tracking menu Once you complete the selection criteria press F2 to display the results form For more than one page press the PgDn key to view the next page Open Trouble Ticket Use the Open Trouble Ticket function to manually create a new trouble ticket You can open a new trouble ticket using the Open Trouble Ticket optt command or you can access the Open Trouble Ticket function from the Trouble Tracking menu Once you complete all the input forms press F2 to display the results forms The fields displayed
25. click on Connect with the left mouse button or PRESS Alt C 5 Select the port Port 1 or Port 2 used on the PC for the physical connection to the NMS host computer Click on the selected port with the left mouse button or PRESS Enter The System Options menu appears Figure 2 7 2 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Connect a System options ANALYSIS 6510 O 6800 Series System Controller OQial Backup Unit O Other aM M MM EE 491 13558 Figure 2 7 System Options Menu 6 To connect the appropriate system highlight the 6800 Series option using the mouse or down arrow key Then click on the 6800 Series option with the left mouse button and then click on Connect or PRESS Enter The Port n 6800 Series screen appears Figure 2 8 where n 1 or 2 Session Edit Print Configure 491 13167 Figure 2 8 Port 1 6800 Series Screen Window Frame 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 7 To choose the method of terminal emulation that allows the PC to communicate with the system console on the host computer PRESS Enter The Terminal Type menu appears as follows Terminal type NOTE The Network Management System NMW workstation terminal type is a software package that runs on the PC with Microsoft Windows 3 0 and provides terminal emulatio
26. depending on the task from which the command is accessed Manager Trouble Tracking or Trouble Inventory Reports tasks From the Performance Reports task or from the Map Monitor task all reports results are sent to the Manager task queue You can list display and delete queue results using the queue results commands in each task Scheduling Execution of Commands and Routines Scheduling refers to the capability to specify a command execution at a given time and or a repeated time Scheduling execution directs the system to execute commands automatically at selected times or at regular intervals Refer to the command reference manuals to verify scheduling ability of specific commands NOTE You will lose scheduled items in the Trouble Tracking and Trouble Inventory Reports tasks if those items are scheduled to execute at a time when the system is not running for example during database backup or restore You specify the type of execution in the Schedule execution field All NMS commands display the schedule execution field on the last form of a series of input forms however for some commands an entry in this field is protected and cannot be changed by the user Valid options are now delayed weekly and monthly now Causes the command to be executed immediately If you enter crt in the Destination for results field you must enter now in the Schedule execution field 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 67 COMSPHE
27. system 1 5820 02 19 07 51 15 eutpf system ultiplexer event port is down system 1 6020 02 19 17 46 32 pollpf system ultiplexer polling part is down apl 3 OONFS D2 18 07 38 32 nr 2 11 71 UNACEMOWLEOGED iagnastic failure 3 MIM 0 HAN j Feb 19 09 33 1991 Fause 491 13178 Figure 2 29 Monitor Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation The text information which appears above the functions keys in this window is the same as that described in the Manager Task User Interface section for the basic feature workstation Refer to that section for more information Also the monitor scrolls as new alerts are reported The functions at the bottom of the window are mapped to functions keys and are described as follows Help F1 Displays a pop up Help screen explaining the function keys Help feature and Task LogOff and Refresh buttons as well as the New Mail indicator Pause F2 or Continue F2 Toggles the reporting of alerts pause continue In the pause state the alerts are not reported to the window for up to one minute If you do not toggle the reporting back on continue the system automatically resumes alert reporting to the window Because the Monitor scrolls as new alerts are reported this feature can be used to temporarily freeze the display to facilitate readability 2 46 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Refresh F6 Redraws the current screen display Quit F7 Close
28. 0 00 00 0 00 2 33 User Interface on a Full Feature Workstation 2 33 User Interface on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 39 NMS Commands pse sinnsir nE wee cide e SER eds 2 50 Routines aaan bua v CE Pb UC a Cem SR RH Ue 2 53 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3 Configuration OVerVIeW eke Pa be UL oa a na 3 2 Concepts of Configuration Management 3 3 NMS Port Configuration lseeseeeeee eee 3 10 External Systems Configuration 0 000000 3 10 Multiplexer Configuration 00 0 0 eee ee eee 3 15 Modem Data Service Unit DSU and Service Restoration Control Unit SRCU with Associated Analog Bridge AB and Dial Backup Unit DBU Configuration 0 0 cee ee eee 3 15 Establishing the NMS Poll List essen 3 15 Activating the NMS 0 0 eee eee eee 3 17 4 System Administration OVERVIEW eset ais gue Di a DU EM le Reip 4 1 Managing the NMS User Database 0 4 1 NMS Configuration Information 00 4 3 NMS Workstation Configuration 000000 4 3 Backup and Restoring the System Database 4 4 5 Filter Administration and Alert Processing QVEEVICW ice amu eu BA e enm ee ede MOTE eRe Re 5 1 Filter Administration lee 5 2 Alert Processing oreca suk e tgs eL P ELE ea ses
29. 03 PM 54 02 RS 64 00 FA 82 04 PM 82 05 PM 92 18 CL fd MM 82 06 PM 92 19 CL frs HW 82 07 PM 92 20 CL ht HT 83 00 FA 92 21 CL mb DF 83 01 FA 92 26 CL md MD 84 00 CG 92 27 CL message MM 84 01 CG 92 28 CL mm MM 85 00 PF 92 29 CL na NA 85 01 PF 93 00 HW nr FA 85 02 PF 93 01 HW pci RS 85 03 PF 94 00 CL pf NR 85 04 PF 94 02 CL pl ok FA 85 05 PF 94 30 HW pollpf PF 86 00 DS am AM pd MM 86 01 DS aplc HW rps PM 86 02 DS aplo HW rs RS 86 03 DS as FA sl DF 86 04 DS bf1 DF Sr SR 86 05 DS bf2 DF tdm PF 86 06 DS bf3 DF th FA 86 07 DS bf4 DF time DF 87 00 CL bf5 DF tm TM 87 01 CL bf6 DF trnc RS 88 00 CL bf7 DF dcre EL 88 01 CL bf8 DF cbo EL 90 00 HW busy FA 87 02 CL 90 01 HW ccn RS 87 04 CL 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 G 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table G 2 4 of 4 UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic 91 00 HW cm CM 91 01 HW da DA 92 00 CL dbc MM 92 01 CL dbo MM 92 02 CL dbu DC 92 03 CL dc DC 92 04 CL dd DC 92 05 CL ddd CM 92 06 CL df dom DF 92 07 CL df DF 92 08 CL dl DL 92 09 CL dm DM 92 10 CL ds DA 92 11 CL dsab MM 92 12 CL dttf FA 92 13 CL el EL 92 16 CL evtpf PF 92 17 CL fa FA Table G 3 lists 6800 alert type mappings for both Basic UAI and Enhanced UAI as they relate to alerts received from the Bytex Unity Management System UMS Items under the
30. 1 Access module alarm Modems df Device failure df dbm Modem dial backup childboard failure ht Hold time md Modem failure na No answer rs Reset APL power cycle und Undefined apl facility dl 1 Dial line lost fa Facility alarm nr Diagnostic failure th Parameter threshold exceeded apl message cm 3 Calling switch ccn Configuration change Sec Access security alarm trnc Subtree truncation apl service as 3 Abnormal operating speed da Device action retrain auto retry dm Device control mode remote mode dsab Modem disabled dttf Dial tone test failure fd Firmware download in progress mb Make busy mm Maintenance mode pci Primary channel interrupt tm Test mode sl Service line apl terminal el 1 External lead alarm pf Port failure DTE alarm or problem sr Streaming terminal DBU dbu backup cm 3 Calling mode COMSPHERE Dial dbu Dial backup mode Backup Units ddd DDD link mode aplc APL continuity dbu device df 1 Device failure nr Diagnostic failure dbu message ccn 3 Configuration change dbu service dsab 3 Device disabled tm Test mode 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 5 2 3 of 5 Communication Products Alerts ee on Alert Group Alert Type Priority Alert s Textual Display DDD ddd backup dc 2 Dial connect dial mode dial standby COMSPHERE dm Dial mode Data on dial line DATAPHONE II and ds Dial standby Data on private line Parad
31. 1 on 0 5 2 on 0 5 3 on 3 4 on 0 5 5 on 0 5 B on 0 5 7 on 1 8 off 0 5 el asynch reporting n a al on a on a3 on 0 at on a5 on ab off Hainftenu MP Cancel ELTE a NE E 493 14349 Figure 2 35 Sample Results Form Routines A routine is a user defined set of commands which execute sequentially when the name of the routine is called Up to 25 commands can be placed in a single routine Routines are very useful tools for executing several of the same commands on individual devices groups of devices or device types They also provide an effective means of resolving and acknowledging alerts or monitoring alert status see Alert Driven Routines for more information on routines and alert driven routine relationships Routines can be used to set options or other parameters on similar devices NMS classifies routines as either personal routines or system routines Personal Routines You create a personal routine using the Create Routine crr command When creating a routine you are requested to do the following e Assign a unique name to the routine Specify the set of commands to be included in the routine Assign the input parameters for each command e Add any comments or information concerning the routine 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 53 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System When creating a routine an input form requires you to list the commands that com
32. 5 7 Communications Products List of Alerts 005 5 17 Multiplexer List of Alerts 0 00 0 00 2 eee eee 5 23 Bytex AJertS ocio tesst t abet ENSE e EU ee NER pg 5 25 System Alerts uoce exe mper dU RR eds 5 25 6 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks OVGIVICW cnc setae Ou pina eee Elan EUER ter 6 2 The Map T ask ic tete eroe d 6 2 Monitoring the Network Using the Monitor Task 6 32 Monitoring the Network Using the Summary Task 6 37 7 Trouble Tracking OVEIVIEW CoccsexLU GO CRUS ERA USE EUN E 7 1 Trouble Ticketing 0 eee eee eee ene 7 1 Accessing the Trouble Tickets Task and Commands 7 2 Trouble Ticket Escalation esee ee ee eee eee ee 7 6 Customizing Trouble Tickets eese 7 6 Trouble Tracking Reports 20 0 eee e eee eects 7 7 Automatic Trouble Reporting 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee 7 7 Generating Automatic Trouble Tickets 7 13 Editing Automatically Generated Trouble Tickets 7 13 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Table of Contents 8 Reports 9 Utilities Appendix Glossary OVELVIEW siete eel RUPEE MURS es 8 2 Trouble Inventory Reports 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 8 2 Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics Reports 8 5 Multiplexer Performance Reports 0 0 c eee ee eee 8 11 Overview colos cete ons Wao Rin E oot Mae eaten sles
33. 55 56 E 25 48 N 44 United Kingdom 1 05 W 52 38 N 232 Bellfast N Ireland 5 50 W 54 40 N 222 Cardiff Wales 3 13 W 51 30 N 31 Edinburgh Scotland 3 13 W 55 57 N 41 Glasgow Scotland 4 15 W 55 53 N 51 Liverpool England 2 55 W 53 25 N 1 London England 0 10 W 51 30 N F 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 International Dial Codes Table F 1 11 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 598 Uruguay 56 31 W 33 228 2 Montevideo 56 10 W 34 55 S 42 Punta del Este 54 58 W 34 59 S 58 Venezuela 66 01 W 8 38 N 2 Caracas 66 56 W 10 35 N 61 Maracaibo 71 37 W 10 44 N 967 Yemen Arab Republic 44 30 E 14 33 N 38 Yugoslavia 19 05 E 43 34 N 11 Belgrade 20 30E 44 50 N 50 Dubrovnik 18 07 E 42 40 N 41 Zagreb 15 58E 45 48 N 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 F 11 Overview Uniform Alarm Interface OVerView Sterna cua s WEE S SU 9h EUN E ERI US G 1 Configuring the Uniform Alarm Interface Feature G 1 Transmission of Alert Information 0 00000 cece eee eens G 3 Alarm Text Message and Clear Text Message 00005 G 3 Basic UAI and Enhanced UAI 0 00 00 ccc tenes G 5 Uniform Alarm Filters 2 xeieewer ou Gee Sd OEE EY yia G 6 Port Config fatiOn d 2 5 2 ue ber rg eR Ye De ee G 6 UAI Authorization in Device Profiles 0 0000 c cece ene G 6 Network Monitor UAI Indicator 0 0 00 000 0 ccc eee
34. ASCII Interface facility If a control channel interface is also connected the NMS can poll the SCRC and its devices for alerts NMS Supported Multiplexers NMS fully supports the following multiplexer products with alert management diagnostic test capabilities and configuration and control ACCULINK 731 740 741 742 Multiplexer The 731 740 741 742 multiplexer is a time division multiplexer that can combine up to 4 channels for the 731 multiplexer 128 channels for the 740 multiplexer 40 channels for the 741 multiplexer and 32 channels for the 742 multiplexer The type of channels are as follows e Evoice e Voice e Synchronous Data e Asynchronous Data The 731 740 74 1 742 is capable of multiplexing any combination of these channel types These channels are multiplexed into a single digital stream for transmission over a T1 or a fractional T1 digital facility also referred to as an aggregate link The 740 can accommodate an optional redundant aggregate link to serve as a backup should the active link fail 74x 56K ACCULINK Multiplexer The 740 56K 741 56K multiplexer is a time division multiplexer supporting up to 40 channels multiplexed into a single 56 kbps or 64 kbps aggregate link The NMS supports only the 56K aggregate link The 64K aggregate link option must be configured via the External Systems cut through Voice synchronous and asynchronous channels are supported Optionally you can use a 56K interface on a 740 ch
35. Arabia 46 46 E 24 39 N 2 Jeddah 39 10 E 21 30 N 4 Medina 39 35 E 24 30 N 1 Riyadh 46 46 E 24 39 N 221 Senegal 14 80W 15 20 N 65 Singapore 103 47 E 1 23 N 27 South Africa 23 47 E 29 04 S 21 Cape Town 18 28 E 33 56 S 11 Johannesburg 28 02 E 26 10 S 12 Pretoria 28 12 E 25458 34 Spain 3 36 W 39 36 N 3 Barcelona 2 10E 41 25N 28 Las Palmas Canary Is 15 27 W 28 08 N 1 Madrid 3 43 W 40 25 N 54 Seville 5 59 W 37 24 N 6 Valencia 0 24 W 39 29 N 94 Sri Lanka 80 40 E 7 17 N 1 Colombo 79 52 E 6 55 N 597 Suriname 55 27 W 4 15 N 46 Sweden 17 10 E 61 19 N 31 Goteborg 12 00 E 57 45 N 8 Stockholm 18 05 E 59 20 N 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 F 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table F 1 10 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Saty sc o da Location Longitude Latitude 41 Switzerland 8 12 E 46 44 N 31 Berne 7 26 E 46 57 N 22 Geneva 6 09 E 46 13 N 41 Lucerne 8 17 E 47 03 N 1 Zurich 8 33 E 47 23 N 886 Taiwan 120 40 E 24 09 N Tainan 120 14 E 23 01 N Taipei 121 32 E 22 05 N 66 Thailand 101 09 E 17 34 N 2 Bangkok 100 30 E 13 44 N 216 Tunisia 10 25 E 33 24 N 62 Bizerte 9 52 E 37 18 N 61 Tunis 10 13 E 36 50 N 90 Turkey 30 17 E 38 28 N 41 Ankara 32 50 E 39 55 N 1 Istanbul 28 57 E 41 02 N 51 Izmir 27 10 E 38 25 N 971 United Arab Emirates 54 02 E 23 07 N Abu Dhabi 54 25 E 24 28 N 6 Ajman 55 26 E 25 23 N 4 Dubai 55 17 24 14 N 70 Fujairah 56 20 E 25 10 N 77 Ras Al Khaiman
36. B 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Command Access Levels Table B 1 6 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Delete Facility Profile difp Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Delete Logical Link dill Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Delete Queue Results dlar All Levels Yes Yes Manager No No Trouble No No Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking Delete Routine dlr All Levels Yes Yes Manager Delete Scheduled Items dlsi All Levels Yes Yes Manager No Yes Trouble No Yes Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking Delete Site Profile disp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Delete Trouble Tickets ditt Manager No No Trouble Administrator Tracking Delete User Profile dlup Administrator Yes Yes Manager Delete Vendor Profile dlvp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Detailed Alert Report dar All Levels No Yes Trouble Inventory Reports Detailed Trouble Ticket dttr All Levels No Yes Trouble Report Inventory Reports Device Health And dhs All Levels Yes Yes Manager Status Device Inventory Report dir All Levels No Yes Trouble Inventory Reports Device Report Summary drs All Levels No Yes Trouble Inventory Reports Device Test det Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt mt Administrator Dialing Command dial Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Mana
37. BROUILLAGE RADIO LECTRIQUE DICT PAR LE MINIST RE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA C January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Table of Contents Objectives and Reader Assumptions 00 vii JADSITACE crus cit Soe aaron eee coe aa ee ee rll Pes Oe vii Related Documents 0 0 0 c cee eee eee eee viii 1 Introduction Product OVerview v2 2 6 ces es Caw oh bd ee Sas MOREE eer peers 1 2 System Capacity 24 sc kde Aa oa ose beige EE 1 13 6800 Series Nms Hardware 0 00 00 e eee eee eee 1 14 6800 Series NMS Hardware Description 1 15 NMS Software mosse ahead IN inn Ue Ue EU e 1 22 Description of Devices Supported by NMS 1 23 Miprationy uu ne eee Rex ex Rex eee ee ed E 1 27 2 Getting Started OVERVIEW Jer exe eeenbeqes ge eb oh tens P EE 2 2 Starting Up the 6800 Series NMS sslsseeseeees es 2 3 6800 Series NMS Start up from the System Console 2 3 Stopping the 6800 Series NMS Software Application 2 14 Powering Down the 6800 Series NMS Host Computer 2 15 Shutting Down a Full Feature Workstation 2 17 Shutting Down a Basic Feature Workstation 2 17 Windows Within the NMS 0 0 e eee eee eee ee 2 22 Help Fatis sesei enot en Eel Ege Bu gp pepe anol ae DR 2 28 The 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu 0000 2 31 NMS Menu Tree Hierarchy
38. Connectivity Maps are also selectable Refer to the discussions on the Connectivity Maps later in this chapter for additional information The Network Control selection provides a Map Manager window to the Network Control function of the Manager task Selection of Network Control from a site or facility command menu causes a Map Manager window to open which displays the Network Control submenu However only those commands applicable to the device and for which you have permission are available You use the Network Profile selection to access the Create Delete Display and Edit Profile commands for a site facility or device based on a selected site facility link or device icon For example if you select a site icon the site Command menu appears From this menu you select Network Profiles which causes a Map Manager window to open and display the Site Profiles submenu You use the Object List selection to open an Object List on a selected site cluster or link icon on the Geographic Map Depending on the type of icon selected you can open Object Lists to display a list of individual devices contained in a site list of sites grouped into a cluster or a list of facilities associated with a link The text items in any Object List are selectable Thus you can select a specific device or facility then open a Connectivity Map window open a Network Profile submenu or access Network Control For more information on Object Lists refer to the Ob
39. Cut through Sessions 6 6 Cut through Sessions User Alert Log Printer 1 Number of Routines User personal 30 per red 30 per ud 30 per n System External System Definitions 49 49 49 Printer and cut through Session capacities are those supported by the 6800 Series software If you have the base system configuration you may not have the physical ports to support the printer external system capacities 5 Capacity numbers queue results apply to each of the following NMS tasks Manager Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking 6800 Series Nms Hardware The 6800 Series NMS consists of both standard and optional hardware components The following sections describe these components Base 6800 Series NMS Hardware Components The host computer for the base 6800 Series NMS is the Altos System 5000 The Altos System 5000 serves as both the processor that runs the 6800 Series NMS software as well as a full feature workstation Altos System 5000 is based on the Inteli 80486 central processing unit and operates at a clock speed of 33 MHz It comes configured with 32 Mb of memory on a memory card two 520 Mb SCSI hard disk drives a 1 44 Mb 3 5 inch floppy drive and an SCSI streaming tape unit For a detailed description of Altos System 5000 refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide 1 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction High Capacity 6
40. Descriptions for Input Forms slsesleseeeeeeeee 2 34 Key Descriptions for Results Forms 0 00000 eee eee 2 35 Manager Task User Interface 0 0c eese 2 36 Map Monitor and Summary Task User Interfaces suus 2 36 External Systems Task User Interface esses 2 37 Performance Reports User Interface eese 2 37 Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking Tasks User Interface 2 37 Utilities Task User Interface 2 39 User Interface on a Basic Feature Workstation 00005 2 40 Asynchronous Terminal Support lseleeeeeeeeeee 2 40 COM OR ess ceo ee er err E e LET P EE IE ic ga de 2 40 Function Keys eruere pedet ee esa EUER 2 40 Terminal Type caserio ha Rev Reb reed RR cok TEE 2 41 Manager Task User Interface 0 0 2 44 Monitor Task User Interface 00 cee eee eee 2 45 External Systems Task User Interface 0 0000000000 2 47 Performance Reports Task User Interface 0000 2 48 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Trouble Inventory Reports Task and Trouble Tracking Task User Interfaces onea eO EID eene i hs Pek eC A Ra pes 2 48 Utilities Task User Interface 00 eee eee eee 2 50 NMS Commands 4 0 5 35 5 eeevide ds ee RR EUER RETE E 2 50 Command Abbreviation Conventions 0 00 ce essen 2 50 Command Forms 24 lui qu Cee m
41. ESC 19 Send ESC 20 Send ESC 2 1 Send ESC 2 3 Send ESC 24 Send ESC Send ESC Send ESC Send ESC C Send ESC 2 Send DEL type Ctrl Backspace A B D PROCOMM PLUS for Windows will display a triangular shape Grey Home Grey End Grey PgUp Grey PgDn Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn eB Send ESC 1 Send ESC 4 Send ESC 5 PC WIN Send ESC 6 PC WIN Send ESC 5 PC Send ESC 6 PC Note that the unshifted PageUp PageDown keys cannot be mapped with the PROCOMM PLUS product since they are used to initiate file transfer To get access to the PageUp PageDown functionality you must type Ctrl PageUp or Ctrl PageDown 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 43 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Specifying Terminal Type Once you have configured the emulation package and mapped the function keys appropriately you can perform the remote connection When remote terminal connects to the NMS the following prompt is displayed Terminal type To set the terminal type for PROCOMM PLUS enter pe ansi For PROCOMM PLUS for Windows enter pe wansi If you do not know your terminal type press Enter The system automatically lists the recommended terminal types Manager Task User Interface On a basic feature workstation the Manager task window appears as shown in Figure 2 28 HRHRGER System llanagement Hetuork Control Rout ines Queue Results Scheduled Items enter se
42. G 6 The 6800 Series NMS Uniform Alarm Interface UAD feature allows transfer of alert information to a StarKeeper SK Network Management System or to an ACCUMASTER Integrator AMT With the UAI feature you can specify on a per device basis whether or not alert information should be sent In addition the NMS Uniform Alarm filters can be set to allow only certain alert types to be sent The 6800 Series NMS supports both basic and enhanced versions of UAI Basic UAI is used when transferring alert information to AMI versions prior to 2 0 or to SK versions prior to 3 0 Enhanced UAI is used when transferring alert information to AMI versions 2 0 or later or SK versions 3 0 or later Configuring the Uniform Alarm Interface Feature The following NMS configuration procedures are required to make the NMS Uniform Alarm Interface feature operational The receiving system must also be configured to support a uniform alarm interface connection 1 Specify the following UAI connection information for NMS by executing the NMS Edit Uniform Alarm Interface eduai command Include the following The login and password that will be used by the remote system to login to the NMS to receive alert information e The connection parameters e The alert message to be sent The UAI login password and connection information must be coordinated with the System Administrator of the receiving network management system For more information about this
43. M B LBIRI 15000 Gl 9 Automatic Trouble Report Interface 8 3 P Host A 0 a O 2 TIHlu UAVAMI Alarms ot 8 X PARALLEL SERIAL AMI File Export UUCP 839A Dial Backup System Print System Controller eae en DCX Multiplexer System Printer Service Restoration Control Unit Modem l VT100 Emulation Full Feature Control Workstations Channels Tole E Network Printer i i NETWORK Service Restoration AUB UNIT TM Control Unit MEN mum or VT100 Emulation giis AT amp T Mail 24 Full Feature ail Workstations Monitor i Keyboard Maximum of Basic Feature 15 Network Workstations P Mouse Printers Full Feature Network Workstation Printer i Maximum of n E 18 Basic Feature 839A Dial Backu E P p g y ALTOS s Workstations System Controller E SYSTEM V NS 5000 n DCX Multiplexer 0 UIP 0 T Basic Feature a PARALLEL SERIAL SERIAL 839A Dial Backup System Controller HUB DCX Multiplexer L Monitor pal Service Restoration Keyboard Control Unit SM y ouse VT100 Emulation Full Feature Workstations E FF ALTOS E SYSTEM y R 5000 G s UIP A 1 PARALLEL SERIAL SERIAL 494 14444 Figure 1 3 High Capacity 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports with Two UIPs Configured 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NMS Software The 6800 Series NMS software includes the base software supplied with a 6800 Series system and op
44. Nee Wels PR lee 2 51 np t HOLM ae e Aiken doth A E e AS A aa 2 51 R sults Forms 4 sys ape sess der nE ET EP EEES E EDA 2 53 Routines mirarea aa ear ux oa r EE E EUN UR SE 2 53 Personal Routines 2 00 cece cece een neces 2 53 Specification of Routine Input Parameters 00 2 54 System Routines e res ssc Gey easy aene E Ru Xa ded 2 54 Routinable Commands esses een 2 55 Manually Executing a Routine 0 0 eee eee eee 2 55 Editing Deleting Listing or Displaying Routines 2 58 Sample Procedure for Creating a Routine 00 0 000 2 59 Creating the Model Template 0 0 00 ce eee eee 2 59 Considerations for Creating Routines as Options Templates 2 60 Alert Driven Ro tines s 4o desu sos de ose dee I RR ta eer rs lod ace 2 61 Object Identification for ADRs seseeeeee eese 2 61 Creating ADR Criteria leeeee ee 2 64 ADR Criteria acs nisi itat Eni ie RENE Ee Toe ewe E 2 64 ADR Notification and Results 000 0 cee cece ee eee 2 64 User Mail secet nes wa epithet ome Ore 6 cates oe ad ees 2 65 MADR Filters eos tec dat tl oa e err d Cake ce Le RIRs 2 65 Destination for Results for Commands and Routines 4 2 66 Scheduling Execution of Commands and Routines 2 67 Listing Displaying and Deleting Scheduled Items 2 10 Overview This chapter provides the information and procedur
45. Object List window Object Lists are textual lists the specific devices sites or facilities within your network The Geographic Map Connectivity Map and Object List windows provide both graphic and text tools to monitor and manage your network As alerts are reported to the NMS from your network elements the icons in the Geographic Map the Connectivity Maps and the textual items in the Object Lists change from their normal display color to the color associated with alert priorities within your NMS Refer to Chapter 2 for information on setting up color codes for alert display Using the Connectivity Map and Object List windows you can isolate network problems to the device level Then using the Map options you can take action to restore your network to its normal operating state The Map task provides selections for the following activities View facility and device alerts and clear events Alert Management option Access specific Connectivity Maps and Object Lists associated with network elements Connectivity Map and Object List options Access device facility and site profiles associated with selected network elements Network Profile option Access display options that enable you to control the display of the Geographic Map Access NMS network control commands for managed devices Cut through to external systems Access routines queue results and scheduled items 6 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monito
46. Processor USP The USP architecture provides unparalleled processing power for superior online performance network control and future product enhancements COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The COMSPHERE 3900 Series modem is a standalone or carrier mounted device which operates on either 2 wire PSTN or APL facilities in either synchronous or asynchronous mode These modems are available for both point to point and multipoint configurations 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System DATAPHONE II Analog Private Line APL Modems These modems are capable of full duplex synchronous data transmission over analog private line channels at speeds up to 19 2 kbps APL modems can be used as control or tributary modems in a point to point multipoint or secondary diagnostic channel using the low end of the analog private line s bandwidth Through this secondary channel the 6800 Series NMS is able to manage and monitor the modems NMS Supported Direct Distance Dialing DDD Modems NMS supports the following DDD modems COMSPHERE 3800 Series Direct Distance Dialing DDD or Software defined Modems The COMSPHERE 3800 Series DDD software defined modem is a standalone or carrier mounted device There are three models available Two models support dial 2 wire leased or 4 wire leased communications and also support automatic backup of the leased line One model supports dial or 2 wire leased co
47. Remote modems cannot be addressed only local modems can be addressed Figure D 2 shows a typical DDD address 1 21 5 C local modem slot 5 B SDU address A control channel 490 11938 Figure D 2 Typical DDD Address 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System A This segment is the control channel on which the device is located The control channel identification can be a number from 1 to 8 The control channel identification can be a number from 1 to 8 for the 6800 Series NMS The highest numbered control channel cannot be used when the 6800 Series NMS is connected to an ANALYSIS NMS B This segment represents the SDU s address The address is manually set using a dial on the back of the SDU The 1 following the SDU address is a DATAPHONE II addressing convention C This segment is the slot number that is occupied by the control modem This segment can be a number from 1 to 8 DATAPHONE II Mode COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Modem Addressing The 3400 4400 Series modems require unique addresses so that they can be recognized by the network diagnostic system for command and test execution Device addressing is also used by the 6800 Series NMS to access the device Operating in DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode with this addressing scheme the 3400 4400 Series modems are diagnostically compatible with DATAPHONE II devices A typical 3400 4400 Series modem address is sh
48. Reports access data provided in the device site vendor and facility profiles as well as the alerts and trouble ticket databases This chapter describes the following types of reports e Trouble Inventory Reports accessed from the Trouble Inventory Reports task From this selection you can generate reports on information stored in the historical database inventory trouble tickets and items in the results and scheduling queue for this task See to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for descriptions of the commands used to generate these reports and examples of the reports generated e Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics Reports accessed from the Performance Reports or Manager tasks Trending and Call statistics reports access device specific data kept in the NMS database and or at the devices over repeated and lengthy intervals See the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual for descriptions of the commands used to generate these commands and examples of the reports generated e Multiplexer Performance Reports accessed from the Performance Reports or Manager tasks These reports access multiplexer performance statistics stored at individual multiplexer nodes See the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Command Reference Manual for descriptions of the commands used to generate these reports and
49. SNMP Manager Administration Guide 6800 A2 GE27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Reports and Trouble Tracking Customization Guide 6800 A2 GN22 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide Contact your sales representative for additional product documentation viii January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Product OVerview imi hebwnpAMPXCSSEP La ue e hee da Cheeses 6800 Series NMS Features List ele Modular System Design 0 0 0 cee eee eee User Configurable Ports Integrated Device Support Database Management and Network Control eR e mev uk eRERPTMOREEN REP INFORMIX Relational Database System Menu and Command Oriented Multi Window User Interface with Help Features i vevoceei e WR ie be RESET UR RES User Access Security with Customization Capabilities Logical Network Partitioning with Customization Capabilities Alert Filters with Customization Capabilities Lieu Map Dynamic Graphic and Textual Representations of the Network Monitor Real Time Textual Notification of Alerts Summary Real Time Alert Matrix by Category Audible and Visual Alert Arrival Indicator Feature Multiplexer Support re eina isian a eee ee Modem DSU SRCU Support 00 eee eee ee eee External Systems Access leen 3270 Terminal Emulation Providing Access t
50. Set Default View selection discussed in the previous section If you have not set a default view the system automatically displays the system default view network view for this option Zoom To Network View This selection displays a Geographic Map containing only those geographic areas of the world that span your physical network i e where your devices are actually installed Zoom To Previous View This selection redisplays the display of your previous map view 6 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Selecting an Object Alert Management When you select an object site facility or device on the Geographic Map window a menu appears based on the object selected The three command menus are shown in Figure 6 4 Site Facility Device Alert Management gt Alert Management gt Alert Management gt Connectivity Map Connectivity Map Hetwork Control Hetwork Control Network Control Network Profiles Network Profiles Hetwork Profiles Object List Object List Object List Queue Results Queue Results Queue Results Rout ines Routines Routines Scheduled Items Scheduled Items Scheduled Items 491 13876 Figure 6 4 Site Facility and Device Commands Menus These selections are defined as follows NOTE If you select the Network Control Network Profiles Queue Results Routines or Scheduled Items selections the submenus displayed allow you to traverse the Map Manager menu structu
51. System NOTE The UIP selection only appears if the User Interface Processor is configured Multiplexer Utilities only appear if the multiplexer application is configured The options on this menu are described in the following sections UNIX Access Selecting Unix from the Utilities task enables you to directly access the UNIX operating system This access is available provided you have permission under your user profile to do so You are placed in a restricted shell After selecting Unix a window opens and the prompt appears indicating that you are now communicating with the UNIX operating system To exit UNIX from a basic feature workstation TYPE quit at the prompt To exit UNIX from a full feature workstation select Close from the Window Manager menu or TYPE quit at the prompt INFORMIX Access Selecting Informix from the Utilities task menu enables you to access the optional INFORMIX SQL Structured Query Language and or INFORMIX 4GL Fourth Generation Language software packages This access is available provided that these software packages are installed on your system and you have permission under your user profile to do so If both SQL and 4GL are installed the submenu is displayed asking you to choose which package you want to access The INFORMIX relational database software can be used to customize the Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks For more information refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Ne
52. TON ore IBEEP EET Automatic Automatic N Trouble Trouble NEW a E Report Ticket ALERT ss NEW ril L ALERT ON N OFF ACKNOWLEDGMENT 7 OFF ACKNOWLEDGMENT 491 13115 01 Figure 5 1 Alert Filter Processing Flow 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Filter Types Processing Filter Display Filter Audible Filter Paradyne NMS presents filter information for a particular device type with two options 1 With the first option NMS presents the alert group identification filter type and default filter value for each alert group 2 With the second option NMS presents exceptions to the default filter value based on the specific devices identified as exceptions for each alert group Each exception entry consists of a device ID and a filter value for that device Valid device IDs are as follows e Single Device Address e Single Device Name e Single Device Serial Number e Circuit Name e Network Name The NMS alert filters are further described as follows As described in the previous section all alerts pass through the processing filter when coming into the NMS You can change processing filter values using the Edit Processing Filter edpf command discussed in the next section This filter either t
53. The convention for alert group names enables you to identify the device type and a general keyword description of the kind of alert being reported such as apl facility for modems and mux chnll for multiplexers Alert Management Tools NMS provides the following tools for alert monitoring and management e Color Coding and Priorities To display and set the priority level and colors of the alert e Map Task To display network objects connectivity and health and status e Monitor Task To display current active alerts e Summary Task To display categorized totals of active alerts You also have available an event log printer and alert log printer for use in monitoring the network A brief description of these tools is provided in this section References for additional information are noted where appropriate Color Coding and Priorities The Map Monitor and Summary tasks use color codes when displaying alerts to indicate the priority level of the alert As alerts are reported to the NMS the color associated with normal operations changes to a pre assigned color to indicate the priority of the reported alert This color coding affects icons on the Geographic Map and the Connectivity Maps the text displayed in the Map Object Lists and in the Monitor task windows and affects the cells colors in the Summary display Color coding applies to all device types in the network NOTE On a basic feature workstation the color gr
54. The Automatic Backup and Restore feature provides the user with the ability to backup and or restore automatically all the INFORMIX database files and other NMS files and directories on a scheduled frequency date day of the week and or time of day Once the user sets up the schedule all files that are needed to restart a fully functioning NMS will be transferred from a specified NMS host to a separate destination NMS host processor Restoring all the backed up files will occur according to the user s established schedule with a minimum of intervention This feature uses two NMS commands mab Manage Automatic Backup and mar Manage Automatic Restore to specify the frequency day date and time of the backup or restore The NMS will be backed up while the NMS is active During the automatic restore the NMS is stopped the database files and directories are restored and the NMS is then started again This process is transparent to the user The automatic backup restore procedures will operate over a network using the TCP IP protocol where the processors on the network are identified in etc hosts The mab and mar commands may be invoked on any processor in the network to schedule backup restore operations between pairs of processors on the network to a maximum of three pairs Each destination for a backup must be unique across the network as that processor can only store a single copy of NMS database files and directories Each origination proces
55. There is a box located by each arrow on both the vertical and horizontal scroll bars Clicking left mouse button on the horizontal or vertical scroll bar boxes causes the map view displayed in the window to shift to its furthest extent in the direction of the arrow as appropriate Clicking on the arrows Clicking left mouse button on an arrow in either the vertical or horizontal scroll bars causes the map view to shift one full screen in the appropriate direction of the arrow used Dragging on the bar The term dragging refers to holding down the left mouse button and moving the mouse without lifting the mouse If you point the mouse on the bar within a scroll bar and drag the mouse you see the shaded bar moving with your mouse pointer The position of the bar within the scroll bar is related to the positioning of the map view in your window Moving the shaded bar to the right or to the left up or down for the vertical scroll bar the map view shifts when you release the mouse button accordingly You can repeat this process until you have shifted the map view as needed Using the Commands button icon you can display the Commands Menu for the Map task This menu is detailed in the following section 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Manager Task Activities from the Map All Manager task features and functionality are available from the Geographic Map That is you have availab
56. Time Slot Summary tss All Levels Yes Yes Manager Training Time tt All Levels Yes Yes Manager Transmit Test Pattern ttp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Trending Reports tr All Levels Yes Yes Manager TSI Module Test tsimt Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator Time Slot Performance tspr All Levels Yes Yes Manager Report Unix No No access level No No Manager abbreviation assigned UIP No No access level No No Manager abbreviation assigned Indicates what is shown on the screen 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Tech Manager Administrator Table B 1 15 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Voice Channel Tone Test vctt Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Indicates what is shown on the screen B 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Icons Connectivity Map Icons secies eesriie ein is eme oea eee eee C 1 Maps 1COMS aree eden dee Re iets A A aides Abe E es od aue C 3 Window Icons sci Sue e E LLL en C 3 Connectivity Map Icons The following is a list of the icons used on the Connectivity Map Certain aspects of these icons may vary slightly from the ones displayed on your workstation ab Analog Bridge acu Auto Call Unit adc ANALYSIS Data Concentrator apl Analog Private Line APL Modem bridge Central Office Br
57. Window Icons Unique to the Geographic Map 0 6 7 Manager Task Activities from the Map 000000000 6 8 Accessing the Manager Task sese 6 8 Geographic Map Commands Menu esee eee ee 6 8 Selecting the Command Button 000 000 6 9 Selecting an Object 6 13 Object List Windows seese neras es nnet eie opea ee 6 16 Connectivity Map Windows 0 0 cece eee eee eee 6 17 Adjacent Device Placement on the Connectivity Map 6 19 Stopping Conditions Affecting Connectivity Map Displays 6 20 Connectivity Map Icon Alert State Information 6 21 Textual Information on Connectivity Maps 4 6 21 Connectivity Help Window esses 6 21 Network Test and Command Access sss esee 6 21 Network Test Access lees n 6 22 Network Test Access from a Selected Object 6 24 Network Profile Access cad ecient eee E ew ee asus rp 6 28 Routine Scheduled Item Queue Results Access 0000 00 6 30 Terminating the Map Task 00 eee eee eee 6 32 Monitoring the Network Using the Monitor Task suus 6 32 The Monitor Pause Continue Feature 0 00000 ee 6 34 Individual User Customization of Monitor Displays 6 34 Performing NMS Functions from the Monitor 6 35 Using the Alerts Option on the Monitor 0
58. Workstation 2 25 Trouble Tracking Task Window on the Full Feature Workstation 2 26 Utilities Task Window 20 05 ce d RR dee ade eke ee eee eee 2 27 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 28 Manager Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 29 Monitor Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation 4 2 30 External Systems Windows on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 31 Trouble Inventory Report Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 32 Trouble Tracking Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 33 Sample Input Form recte enea ene 2 34 Sample Input Form with Confirmer Box 00 0 0 02 e eee ee eee 2 35 Sample Results Form cct teert nur seadme eng miend pipke interen nmas January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Table of Contents Figure Page 2 36 Routine Input Form Page 1 0 ee eee 2 56 2 37 Routine Input Form Page 2 0 0 0 eee eee 2 57 5 1 Alert Filter Processing Flow 00 0 2 eee nee 5 3 5 2 Sample Connectivity Map for Multiplexers 0 000 0 5 11 5 3 Sample of Printed Event Messages 20 0 0 5 15 6 1 Geographic Map iis cies essem eS a SS a Se ae ag 6 4 6 2 Commands Menu cessc ud Se ab oes Sh Sass shea ce Seg aget etes 6 9 6 3 Zoom SUBMENU kis betes a ee pe gS SS GU Sh ale e el eg 6 10 6 4 Site Facility and
59. Yes Manager Configuration Parameters Display Node Connected dsncs All Levels Yes Yes Manager to System Display Options dso All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt dsop Display Physical Link dsplc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Configuration Display Poll List dspl All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Port dspc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Configurations Display Port Options dspo All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt dsportop 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table B 1 9 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Display Port Speed dspsp All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt dsportsp Display Processing Filter dspf All Levels No No Manager Display Queue Results dsqr All Levels Yes Yes Manager No Yes Trouble No Yes Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking Display Routine dsr All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Routing Table dsrt All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Scheduled Items dssi All Levels Yes Yes Manager No Yes Trouble No Yes Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking Display Site Profile dssp All Levels Yes Yes Manager Map Display Storage Filter dssf All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Supervisory dssdlc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Data Link Configuration Display System Poll List dsspl All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display T1 Interface dstis All L
60. You can change the automated action filter values via the Edit Automated Action Filter edaaf command You can display the automated action filter values via the Display Automated Action Filter dsaaf command Alert Driven Routine Filter ADR Filter Each alert that passes the ADR filter can trigger execution of an alert driven routine You can specify on a per device type per alert group basis that ADRs execute only if a triggering alert persists beyond a specified time duration ADR filters delay ADR execution only if the ADR is triggered by a new alert an ADR is not delayed by filtering if the ADR is triggered by an alert clear As with other filters you can modify the filter values associated with each defined alert group for a specified device type or you can specify exceptional filter values used for individual devices or device groups You can change the alert driven routine filter values using the Edit Alert Driven Routine Filter edadrf command You can display the ADR filter values via the Display Alert Driven Routine Filter dsadrf command 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Uniform Alarm Interface Filter UAI Filter Alerts received by the 6800 Series NMS can be transferred to an ACCUMASTER Integrator or StarKeeper via the Uniform Alarm Interface UAT The UAI filters can be set to allow only certain alert types to be sent via the UAI As with other filters you can mo
61. a call automatically over a switched line Equalization of a transmission channel that is adjusted while signals are being transmitted to adapt to changing line characteristics A feature that allows the automatic reporting of alerts to local or remote printers or terminals A channel established by the DBU for data traffic during a private line failure Consists of two 2 wire dial up lines Also called DDD lines January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Glossary backup session basic feature workstation brouter carrier category centralized rate control channel channel endpoint channel group channeling device channel interface module channel module circuit circuit card assembly CCA The period during which data traffic is on the backup channel rather than on the private line Also includes the time required to establish the dial up connections A user terminal capable of supporting all 6800 Series NMS menus and forms as well as ANALYSIS NMS System Controller and 839A DBU Control Unit cut through access in a single task environment See full feature workstation A device used as a bridge or router utilizing the SNMP protocol A rack mounting that contains 17 slots 1 slot is a control slot for an SDU or ICCU or SRCU and 16 slots are available for modems DSUs and other devices Alternately a continuous frequency capable of being altered modulated to transmit information A single cell
62. a profile populating fields with information it can obtain from the responding device You can edit this profile as necessary using the Edit Device Profile eddp command If a device profile does exist executing the acmccpl command causes the NMS to update the information in the existing profile e NMS automatically creates device profiles for devices directly managed by the ANALYSIS NMS with external systems cut through level support During the 6800 Series NMS start up process the device profiles are created via an upload function from the ANALYSIS NMS for all of the ANALYSIS supported devices You cannot create a device profile for an ANALYSIS device You must configure the device on the ANALYSIS system via the ANALYSIS device configuration function After initial installation as devices are added to the ANALYSIS configuration device profiles are automatically created Once the ANALYSIS profiles are created by NMS you can edit these profiles using the Edit Device Profile eddp command When editing ANALYSIS device profiles certain fields within the profile record are protected so you cannot edit these fields Refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for additional information on these fields When you create COMSPHERE DATAPHONE II or ACCULINK profiles NMS attempts to send an identification query to the device to obtain the information to populate fields in the profile Once NMS obtains
63. and facilities to which you have access Summary Real Time Alert Matrix by Category The Summary task provides system wide color coded numeric tallies of network alerts The Summary display consists of a 3x10 matrix each cell in the matrix can be used to tally a different set of alerts For each category you specify the set of alerts to be tallied NMS dynamically updates the network summary to reflect current alert activity Audible and Visual Alert Arrival Indicator Feature An audible alert arrival indicator feature provides an audible notification for new alerts The audible indicator is a beep on the Map and Monitor tasks The indicator continues until you acknowledge the alert The visual alert arrival indicator feature provides a visual notification for new alerts on the Map and Monitor tasks The visual indicator remains on screen until the alert is acknowledged The System Administrator can specify which alerts should activate the audible or visual indicators Multiplexer Support NMS provides the following capabilities for managing the ACCULINK multiplexers in the network e Centralized alarm and event reporting e Simplified network initialization including automatic routing table generation e Ability to perform multiplexer configuration and diagnostic tasks from a central location e Channel group traceability providing a description of the route traversed and optimal route indication e Configuration summary displays f
64. are performing normal start up from the floppy hard disk or tape drives the system continues with the boot sequence The system initializes in Single User Mode and pauses after displaying the following information lines INIT Single User Mode Type control d to proceed with normal startup or hit return for System Maintenance PRESS Enter before the 30 second pause expires to initialize in Single User Mode puts the system in a state for system maintenance To continue with normal start up PRESS CTRL D or allow the 30 second pause to time out 4 Atthe Console Login prompt TYPE nms PRESS Enter The Password prompt appears 5 At the Password prompt TYPE the password defined for the nms login PRESS Enter The 6800 Series NMS Menu appears Figure 2 1 2 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Network Management System Select 1 Start the system 2 Stop the system System status Backup system database Restore system database Enable Disable auto start Change password Download modem firmware file Shutdown UNIX Install PTF Return to Console login Enter number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 491 11822a Figure 2 1 6800 Series NMS Menu 6 To select Start the system from the 6800 Series NMS Menu TYPE PRESS Enter The following prompts are displayed Starting the AT amp T Paradyne NMS system Please wait Performing database error check Database error check is continuing
65. as much information as possible you can continue to create the profile record for the device 3 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Other NMS commands related to device profiles are identified as follows Delete Device Profile didp Use the Delete Device Profile dldp command when attempting to delete a device profile NMS checks for the existence of any facility profiles trouble tickets or alert records that may currently reference the device If there is a reference to any of these items NMS does not allow you to delete the device profile Therefore before deleting the device profile you must delete all historic alerts using the Delete Alert History dlah command and delete trouble tickets and facilities via the Delete Trouble Tickets ditt and Delete Facility Profile dlfp commands associated with the device profile you are deleting Also all active alerts for the device must be cleared refer to Chapter 5 for additional information on clearing alerts You cannot delete ANALYSIS device profiles within NMS You must delete the devices from the ANALYSIS configuration The device profiles are then automatically deleted from the NMS database You cannot delete a device profile for a multiplexer node used in an existing channel group or logical link without first deleting the associated channel group or logical link Display Device Profile dsdp Use the Display Device Profile dsdp command to display one or
66. automatic trouble tickets Automatically generated trouble tickets do not contain problem description comments assigned personnel or alarm request information unless this information is manually entered after the ticket is automatically created To have the system automatically generate trouble tickets execute the following commands e Edit Alert Monitoring State edams Execute this command to turn on or off the alert monitoring function polling of the desired control channels and to specify the control channel s time out intervals e Edit automated action Filters edaaf Execute this command to assign an automated action filter value to appropriate alert groups e Edit Device Profile eddp Execute this command to authorize automatic trouble ticket generation for alerts that exceed the automated action alert filter value and come from devices that have this feature enabled Editing Automatically Generated Trouble Tickets After a trouble ticket is automatically generated you can use the Edit Trouble Ticket edit command to add the following information to the trouble ticket e Trouble description e Comments e Person to whom the ticket is assigned e Alert type group NMS prevents duplication of automatic trouble tickets by scanning the trouble ticket database for any unclosed trouble ticket that has the same device address alert type and a state If there is an existing trouble ticket in the database with the same
67. be migrated e System printers and fault alert log printers can be re used e The host processor can be converted for use as the host processor or UIP for Release 4 2 e The basic feature workstation can be re used e The full feature workstation can be converted for use in Release 4 2 ANALYSIS to 6800 Series NMS To provide support for the ANALYSIS NMS via the 6800 Series NMS the ANALYSIS software must be upgraded when migrating from a previous NMS release Configuration data and new alert information is uploaded to NMS The ANALYSIS historical alarm information cannot be uploaded to NMS The ANALYSIS processor remains as a gateway to your ANALYSIS attached devices Up to 5 terminals and 4 printers currently connected to the ANALYSIS can remain on the ANALYSIS The number of locally attached terminals is limited by the number of configured cut through sessions to that ANALYSIS from the 6800 Series NMS 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 29 Getting Started Overview ci kokhenshiRpuireusrvatnUeilusp Peete dl eer Seas 2 2 Starting up the 6800 Series NMS 0 0 eee cece eee 2 3 6800 Series Start up from the System Console 2 3 Full Feature Workstation Start up 0 0 c cee eee eee eee 2 8 Basic Feature Workstation Start up 0 0 e eee eee eee 2 8 Stopping the 6800 Series NMS Software Application 2 14 Powering Down the 6800 Series NMS Host Computer
68. can accept the necessary information from the alert alert clear message s which triggers the ADR This requires you to know the following information 1 The object related information needed by the commands in the routine 2 The object identification parameters returned from an alert message For communications products CPS devices the object identified in the alert message is always either the object which reports the alert or the object for which the alert for example NR is reported To determine which device is included in the object information check the Device ID reported on the network monitor 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 61 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer alert messages contain the identity of the node reporting the alert Multiplexer alert messages may also include object identification information for links channel groups modules etc The set of object identification parameters which can be expected from a multiplexer alert message can be determined by referring to the text message associated with the alert displayed on the network monitor i e any of the parameter values that are read into the alert text message can be expected from the alert message for use as input to an ADR For example the alert type 70 00 has the text DS1 channel n Red alarm If this alert triggered an ADR the DS1 channel number n as shown in the text message can be imported to the DS1 channel module t
69. can also specify which alerts are to be tallied in each of the 30 categories of the Summary task This is done by executing the Edit Category edc command The related Edit Row Column Labels edrcl command permits the System Administrator to label the Summary display appropriate to the defined categories Each individual user can determine what alerts display in their Map and Monitor windows via the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc command When executing these commands be aware that the alert groups are device dependent Refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for additional information on the following commands 5 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Edit Alert Attribute edaa This command affects the visual and audible indicators for alerts associated with all alert groups for a specified device type Execute this command to edit the alert attributes for all alert groups for a specified device type You are able to enable or disable the state of the audible alert feature for alerts associated with each alert group and enable or disable the state of the visual alert feature associated with each alert group You are also able to specify the time out interval for acknowledgment of alerts and for the time out interval for clearing events associated with each alert group for a specified device type Edit Category edc This command affects t
70. change is automatically made in the AMI configuration database but not in the AMI graphical database To change the graphical location of the device the user must manually relocate the device to the new location using the AMI s Edit Network utility The fact that the graphical location of a device is not automatically changed to remain in sync with the AMI configuration database will cause a file import error if the NMS user tries to delete or change the name of a site which contained or contains devices When the AMI user attempts to load the update export file an error message will be generated The message indicates that a child graphical object is present This message means that even though from the NMS point of view the devices at a deleted site have been reassigned to another site from the AMI graphical point of view the deleted site is still associated with those devices The situation is the same with a name change since the name change is essentially a deletion of the old site and the addition of a new site with the new site name Though the AMI generates an error message all records except the delete site record should load properly All that remains is that the graphical database be updated by removing the equipment from the old to be deleted location moving that equipment to one or more new existing locations and then deleting the old location To do this use the following procedure 1 Display the old location us
71. channel or over an application channel The Analog Bridges and Dial Backup Units are application modules and follow standard module addressing rules This type of addressing implies that the Analog Bridge and Dial Backup Unit always operate in ADp mode and are always polled over their associated SRCU s application channel Their network addresses are in the ranges of 401 464 501 564 601 664 701 764 and are determined by the cabinet carrier and slot position of their physical location D 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing Mode Conversions and Addressing If you have installed a 6800 Series NMS and move from a network that was operating in DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode to one that operates in Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode you must consider the differences you will encounter as you change addressing schemes During conversion the NMS edits the profiles of all devices on the diagnostic tree to reflect new link level and alternate mode addresses protocol mode and system polling poll list status Therefore to achieve a smooth migration to the Advanced Diagnostic protocol addressing scheme you must maintain the address and protocol mode information in the device profiles When changing modes keep the following in mind In the Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode addressing scheme the link level address will not drop the port address If you migrate from Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode to DATAP
72. command to create the template routine Name the routine appropriately to define your template for example trib9600 Include the Change Options chop command in the routine You can also enter other commands as part of your configuration testing For example you might add a Display Options dsop command to verify the Change Options settings a Device Health and Status dhs command to determine the state of the device or Modem device Test mt to check the operation of the model after the Change Option settings When the command input forms for the chop command are displayed enter the device address of the model The input forms are pre populated with the options values from the model You do not change any options at this time Select Go F2 The model s options are now stored in the routine If other commands are included in the routine complete those input forms as necessary using the model s device address whenever a device address is required To copy the model s options to a target device execute the routine by typing the routine s name in the enter selection field Remember if you copied the routine to be a system routine prefix the name with sys On the Routine input form Page 1 specify that you want to edit the routine before execution On the Routine input form Page 2 input the address of the target device in the Control Device field Do not change any other command s input parameter options if you want to downl
73. communications channel If the local control modem is a DATAPHONE II device the local address is derived from the shelf slot number for the DATAPHONE II device in DATAPHONE II mode If the local control modem is a 3400 4400 Series modem the local address 1s the network address in Advanced mode When the 3400 4400 Series modem is at the head of a DATAPHONE II diagnostic tree it calculates its own local address directly from the network address D 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing Short Form Addressing Although the Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode does not permit short form addressing the DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode requires short form addressing This type of addressing is only applicable from the NMS and is a form of link level addressing In short form addressing the G2 and G4 tributary modems are omitted from the link level address of downstream devices These tributary modems are those point to point tributaries that have extended control devices downstream Short form addressing is required for extended devices to ensure that all alarm data is associated with the device reporting the alarm In the DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol the health and status result messages returned during normal polling on an extended circuit do not include the addresses of the G2 G4 tributary modems In Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode however these tributary modems are required For more information refer to the discu
74. display is resized to stay proportional to the window size Window resizing can also affect the display of icons in the map view For example if you downsize the window of the current Geographic Map view the map resizes to fit the window and closely located single site icons may be changed automatically by the system to a cluster icon see Cluster Icons in Chapter 6 2 26 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started NOTE Some windows have maximum and minimum sizes For example the Summary window comes up at its maximum size and the Monitor window has a maximum width but not height If you try to resize a window beyond its constraints the attempt is ignored Maximize Minimize Symbol The Maximize Minimize symbol toggles the Map and Monitor windows to the largest allowable size and back again A maximized window can also be returned to its original size by selecting the Restore option from the windows menu Iconify Symbol The Iconify symbol collapses an open window into an icon The window collapses into a small graphic symbol and appears in the upper right corner of the screen in the first available slot from right to left All system processes associated with the window continue To return the icon to full window size double click on the icon itself or select the Restore option from the icon s menu New Mail Symbol This symbol only appears when new mail has arrived The new mail symbol appears in the up
75. edtt Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Trouble Administrator Tracking Edit Uniform Alarm Filter eduaf Data Tech Manager Yes Manager Administrator Edit Uniform Alarm eduai Manager Yes Yes Manager Interface Administrator Edit User Group edug Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit User Profile edup All Levels Yes Yes Manager Edit User Selection edusc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Criteria Edit Vendor Profile edvp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Edit Workstation edwc Administrator Yes Yes Manager Configurations EIA Status eias All Levels Yes Yes Manager End To End Test eet Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt ee Administrator Equipment Performance epr All Levels Yes Yes Manager Report Exception Reports er All Levels Yes Yes Manager Export File Configuration efc Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Facility Errors Report fer All Levels Yes Yes Manager Facility Inventory Report fir All Levels Yes Yes Trouble Inventory Reports Facility Performance fpr All Levels Yes Yes Manager Report Facility Report Summary frs All Levels Yes Yes Trouble Inventory Reports Generate Routing Tables grt Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Hardware Module hms All Levels Yes Yes Manager Summary Identity id All Levels Yes Yes Manager Informix No No access level Yes Yes Utilities abbreviation assigned Indicates that an existing command was modified for this release B 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20
76. except for the F8 function key Cancel which is not supported for the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking main menu windows However F8 Cancel is available in submenus and results forms for these two tasks Refer to the Manager Task User Interface section earlier in this chapter for function key descriptions NOTE The Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks do not support the F8 function key Cancel within their main menus but do support this F8 key function on their submenus and results forms Once a transaction is executed from an input form F8 Cancel does not work Pressing F8 during execution cancels the results form once the transaction completes In addition to access form help for forms associated with the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks you must use the F1 function key 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 49 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Utilities Task User Interface The Utilities task provides access to UNIX INFORMIX the Read Mail and Send Mail functions the NMS Users List and the Printer Status and Move Print Jobs functions The user interface is keyboard based with no function keys active NMS Commands You use commands to execute most functions within the NMS You can request a command in one of three ways 1 Selecting the command name from a menu display You select a command name by clicking on the name or using the u
77. existing information on the input forms The Ticket field cannot be changed If the Reported by field contains auto and the escalation date is entered during editing your current User ID is automatically entered in the Assigned to field This is done so that an escalation mail message can be delivered to your terminal by the system If you modify any of the fields on the input forms the previous values of those fields and the latest values entered are automatically logged and displayed in the Trouble Ticket Audit Trail portion of the results forms However only the time of modification is logged for the Problem description and Comments fields You can edit trouble tickets using the Edit Trouble Tickets edtt command or access the Edit Trouble Tickets function from the Trouble Tracking menu Once you complete the input forms the Edit Trouble Ticket Selection List form displays all the trouble tickets matching the selection criteria in the sort sequence specified You can selectively chose trouble tickets to edit by scanning the list using the arrow keys and entering an x in the box at the left of a ticket You can select multiple tickets NMS provides selected tickets for editing in the order appearing on the list To bypass the Edit Trouble Tickets Selection List form and edit only one ticket populate both Ticket fields To and From with the same ticket number Once you complete the selection form press F2 to display the first edit form
78. field A parent device is a network device that may contain or manage another device For example a Service Restoration Control Unit can be a parent device to its application modules You can select the parent device object from an Object List and all devices with the same parent display on the parent s Object List Table 6 2 lists the selections available from an Object List window and also specifies under what conditions the selections are available Alert information for the text items representing network elements are color coded for visual recognition of current alert priority status The color of the object text is determined by the highest severity alert associated with its corresponding managed device When an alert is in the unacknowledged state an asterisk appears at each end of the text When the alert is acknowledged no asterisks display Refer to Chapter 2 for additional information on color coded alert priorities 6 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Table 6 2 1 of 1 Object List Window Operations Based on Object Selection Window Option Device Object Facility Object Site Object Alert Management Available only if the selected object is reporting one or more alerts invokes a submenu Available if the selected object is reporting one or more alerts invokes a submenu Available if the selected object is reporting one or more alerts invokes a submenu
79. for a description of the Display Automated Action Filter dsaaf and Edit Automated Action Filter edaaf commands ATR States The ATR state for each operational control channel can be turned on or off If the ATR state for a control channel is off no ATRs are sent for alerts on that control channel You can display and edit the ATR states See the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for a description of the Display ATR States dsatrs and Edit ATR States edatrs commands ATR Phone Directory The NMS ATR phone directories provide ATR dialing information for alert groups There are four ATR phone directories supported for each alert group Each directory is a table whose entries consist of the following information e Alert Group e ATR Destination telephone number or port e Number of Retries e Duration between Retries e Comments Tables 7 1 and 7 2 show examples of ATR phone directories for modems and multiplexers Table 7 1 ATR Phone Directory 1 for Device Type APL E Number Of Retry Interval Alert Group ATR Destination Retries MM SS Comments apl facility 800 555 4357 3 10 03 Tom in Middletown apl device 800 555 4458 3 10 03 Ann in New York apl service 800 555 4360 3 10 03 Bob in Middletown 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 7 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 7 2 ATR Phone Directory 2 for Device Type MUX Alert Group
80. for a later time if you specify crt the command must execute immediately NOTE When you specify crt NMS does not allow access to any other command from the current window until execution of the command completes Certain commands can take several minutes to complete For these commands it is recommended that you send the command results to a queue or printer so that the command executes in the background This frees the crt for access to executing other commands remote Sends the results of the command to a printer If you specify remote an additional input field appears enabling you to specify the telephone number of the remote printer or the ATR remote printer port If you provided a remote phone number in your user profile that phone number is populated in the field If you specify port results are sent to the printer connected to the ATR remote printer port Note that Trouble Tracking and Trouble Inventory Reports commands cannot be sent to a remote destination Ip Sends results to a remote line printer You are prompted for the name of the remote printer in a field that appears below the destination field printer Sends the results of the command to the system printer to which you are assigned as specified in your user profile 2 66 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started queue Sends the results of the command to one of your own results queues Command results go to one of three results queues
81. from the following windows e From the Button window the Manager window and the Performance Reports window By clicking on the Help button on these windows NMS displays a help screen describing the buttons and function keys displayed on the window Note that for the Manager and Performance Reports window the Help button may also be invoked by pressing the F1 function key e From the Map Summary Monitor and External System windows By pressing the F12 function key or by pressing the key sequence ESC task help information is displayed i e a screen is displayed describing the specific task selected NOTE Whenever this document directs you to use the key sequence ESC 2 you must press ESC SHIFT e From the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking windows By pressing the F1 function key F12 function key or the ESC sequence task help information is displayed 2 28 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Accessing Help in Forms Help can be accessed from within the following forms input and results forms e From the forms associated with the Manager and Performance Reports tasks form help context sensitive is accessed by pressing the F12 function key or by typing the sequence ESC e From the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking forms press the F1 function key Form help includes a general description of the form currently displayed The form help text for input
82. generated by the multiplexers are further subdivided into alarms alarm clears and events Each alert has associated with it a unique major minor code and text description The major minor code for alarms and events display on the NMS Monitor in the Alert Type field Major minor codes for alarm clears do not display instead they clear their respective alarms The text descriptions for alarms and events display essentially unmodified on the NMS Monitor Some minor differences from the text descriptions given in the devices User Interface Manuals are worth noting These minor differences are For alerts associated with a particular link number and or channel number the relevant numbers are displayed in square brackets immediately preceding the text description e For alarms the word ALARM is removed from the text description e Unnecessary white space such as tab characters are removed from the message e Multi line text descriptions are joined into one line e Text descriptions that are too long to fit on the Monitor display are truncated A tilde character is placed at the end of the displayed text to indicate the truncation The complete text can be found in the device s User Interface Manual or by cutting through to the device and viewing the device s Message Log ANM Generated Alerts ANM generated alerts are further subdivided into events and alarms Events are listed in Table 5 3 Alarms are listed in Table 5 4 In these t
83. headers which includes the specified message Escapes to the UNIX shell cd directory Changes the directory to the one specified list Lists all available commands without explanations top msglist Prints the top five lines of the specified message s Scrolls the header display forward or backward by 10 lines 9 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Utilities Send Mail To send mail select the Send Mail function from the Utilities menu The screen shown in Figure 9 4 appears Send Mail on all 493 14289 Figure 9 4 Send Mail Screen The following steps are used to send mail 1 At the To prompt type a single user name or type a user name list PRESS Enter 2 The prompt Subject appears Type the subject for the text to be sent and PRESS Enter 3 The prompt Enter body of mail message appears Enter the text to be sent and PRESS Enter 4 When finished with the message text make sure you are on a new line then PRESS CTRL D 5 The system displays EOT and the message is transmitted 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 9 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NMS Users List The NMS Users List function displays a list of currently logged on NMS users The listing includes the name of the host or UIP name to which they are logged on their most recent login date and time and their assigned service ID and user ID Figure 9 5 The System Administrator can lo
84. information NMS does not create a new trouble ticket even though the automated action filter has been exceeded 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 7 13 Reports OVerVieEW zip ass ied SES A Pee SES USE IER PDT UE PES 8 2 Trouble Inventory Reports leeeeeeeeeeeee ee 8 2 Accessing Trouble Inventory Reports 0 0 00 cee eee ee 8 3 Alert History Reports eee eens 8 3 Alert Report Summary 0 0 0 eee eee 8 3 Detailed Alert Report lseeeeseeeeee eee 8 3 Inventory Reports send dee ever RP DRESS ee be DH RES 8 4 Connectivity Report 2 0 2 eee eects 8 4 Device Inventory Report 00 cece ee eee 8 4 Device Report Summary 2 0 00 cece eee eee 8 4 Facility Inventory Report 2 0 0 cece eee ences 8 4 Facility Report Summary 00 cece eee eee 8 4 Trouble Tracking Reports 0 cece cece tenes 8 4 ATR Report voter be ee Coda Whee ee Gee eR CHE ER 8 4 Detailed Trouble Ticket Report 0 0 0 cee eee eee 8 5 Results Queue Management 2 0 0 cece eee eee eee 8 5 Scheduling Queue Management 00 0 cee eese 8 5 Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics Reports 8 5 Accessing Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics R port eon EE eU Pe Pen RNs SEE RAP RR ead cae EE 8 6 Alert and Trending and Exceptions Reports 00005 8 6 Trending Reports esee 8 7 Exception R
85. intended for general telephone use Distinguished from 4 wire private line network Also called DDD or switched network The textual presentation of information in a format designed to solve some problem Graphic reports can be presented using character graphics or bit mapped graphics A display that remains on the screen until you take specific action i e closing the resident display window or logging off the system to cause the display to be removed Selecting selectable items from a resident display does not cause the resident display to be removed These displays are used to display list items See list The elapsed time between a device receiving the first character of a message and the receipt of the first character of the reply See network delay Any device which is strictly used for data communication restoral This includes devices with boards which perform restoral functions etc The queue containing results entries from scheduled routines commands tasks etc A group of commands under a single name which can be scheduled or executed at your discretion User defined personal and system routines are available in the 6800 Series NMS A table used by a node to route traffic to another node in the multiplexer network The ability to mark a transaction or command for execution at a specific time and or for repeated execution A diagnostic channel connecting a control modem to a tributary modem The choosin
86. listing of all NMS commands and their command access levels 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 vii COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Appendix C contains a list of Connectivity Map icons Appendix D contains Device Addressing information Appendix E contains 6800 Series NMS Naming Conventions Appendix F contains International Dial Code information Appendix G contains Uniform Alarm Interface information Appendix H contains File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator information Appendix I contains configuration information for 6800 Series NMS X Window cut through Related Documents The following documents contain information pertinent to the installation process 6500 A2 GA21 ANALYSIS 6510 Automated Network Management System Reference Manual 6800 A2 GA22 COMSPHERE SNMP Manager Operation Guide 6800 A2 GB15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Quick Reference Guide 6800 A2 GB21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide 6800 A2 GB30 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual 6800 A2 GB31 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual 6800 A2 GB32 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Command Reference Manual 6800 A2 GB33 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 5270 Terminal Emulation Option Manual 6800 A2 GE25 COMSPHERE
87. ltainllenu Fo PrevForm FT 2Quit j 494 14445 Figure 2 25 Trouble Tracking Task Window on the Full Feature Workstation 2 38 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Utilities Task User Interface The Utilities task window Figure 2 26 provides access to UNIX INFORMIX the Read Mail and Send Mail functions the NMS Users List and the Printer Status and Move Print Jobs functions The User Interface Processor UIP selection appears if the UIP is configured on your system The Multiplexer Utilities selection appears if the multiplexer application is configured The user interface for all the functions except for the Multiplexer Utilities are keyboard based with no function keys active E oom Utilities Unix Informix Read Mail Send Mail HNS Users Printer Status Mowe Print Jobs UIP Multiplexer Utilities 494 14264 01 Figure 2 26 Utilities Task Window User Interface on a Basic Feature Workstation Use the keyboard to interface with the NMS tasks on a basic feature workstation The following sections describe the interface provided by each task available on a basic feature workstation The 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu is shown in Figure 2 27 NOTE Pressing the Pause Break key changes the meaning of the function keys For example if you are in a UNIX window and you press the Pause Break key rather than the DEL key and then open a Manager window pressing the PgDn key causes
88. marked as excepted For example 1 31 12 32 E 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Naming Conventions Dash Keyword All Keyword None would translate to all devices with addresses beginning with 1 31 12 32 would translate to all devices except 2 32 Order is not important The dash is used as a level separator for device names circuit names facility names network names IP Address and serial numbers The special character keyword all can be used in the Device s field to signify all devices For database transactions this is interpreted to mean all records The keyword all is not permitted in the Device s field for network control commands The keyword all may be used in non device s fields where so defined for the field The special character keyword none can be used in the Device s field to signify no devices The keyword none may be used in non device s fields where defined for the field Alert Groups and Alert Types Alert groups and alert types are used as input for many commands and for display on the Monitor task Alert groups are also used to set up filtering for alerts The values for group names and alert type names are application specific Chapter 5 contains valid alert groups and alert types Alert groups and alert types are defined by the system and cannot be changed in NMS Circuit Names Circuit names can be used in some fields on input forms instead of the device name indicating
89. mode ACCULINK Datagram Command Language If ACCULINK multiplexers are configured within the network they will use an ACCULINK specific datagram command language protocol to communicate with the NMS 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System If an ANALYSIS system is configured within your network the devices managed by ANALYSIS will use Remote Diagnostic RD or Diagnostic Microcomputer DMC mode The RD and DMC protocols are not directly supported by the 6800 Series NMS They are handled by ANALYSIS In this document and elsewhere in the NMS system itself RD and DMC modes are referred to collectively as DMC mode When information from ANALYSIS is transferred to the NMS an internal data transfer protocol is used Each protocol mode supports a different addressing scheme These addressing schemes are described in detail in Appendix D of this document The naming method offered by NMS enables you to assign a name to a device and to assign a network or circuit name to a group of logically related devices such as the devices sharing a common customer location or application You can then reference a group of devices a network or a circuit by entering a single name The naming conventions used in NMS contain special characters and numbers for identifying devices and groups of devices and specific naming conventions are applied to alert groups and types circuit names device group names de
90. more device profiles This command displays profiles based on device classification e g dce mux unsupported system snmp bytex Edit Device Profile eddp Use the Edit Device Profile eddp command to change the data in the device profiles You can edit one device profile at a time If you change the device address device name or device serial number the changes propagate through all facility profiles and trouble tickets related to that device However be careful Other databases and files which may reference devices by address for example routines ADR criteria records scheduled items are not updated with this command When editing a device profile you cannot change the NMS support field To change a device from supported to unsupported or vice versa you must delete the original device profile and create a new profile List Device Profile sdp Use the List Device Profile sdp command to enter specific search criteria to list all device profiles that match the criteria The resulting output of the command will be a list of summary information about the devices you have selected Automatic Generation of Site and Vendor Profiles Based on Device Profile Input If you specify a nonexistent site name in the Site name or Vendor name fields of the device profile the NMS automatically creates a new site profile or vendor profile for the name specified You can edit the vendor or site profile using the Edit Vendor Profile ed
91. multiplexer carrier The ACCULINK 740 hardware module that physically terminates a T1 facility Aggregate link interface modules are on the back card in the multiplexer carrier An abnormal condition affecting modems multiplexers and data services units usually requiring attention Major alarms indicate a service disruption minor alarms are less severe but are indications of a developing problem An occurrence of interest within the network Alerts include alarms and change of status experienced by modems and Data Service Units as well as alarms experienced by multiplexers and event messages reported by multiplexers 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 GL 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System alert driven routine ADR alert export alert filtering alert group analog bridge Analog Private Line APL ANALYSIS answering DBU asynchronous transmission async to sync ASC auto call auto answer ACAA automatic adaptive equalization Automatic Trouble Reporting ATR backup channel A routine consisting of a list of commands performing a specific process in response to a particular alert A feature permitting the export of alert data to external systems A feature that times or judges each alert and passes it only if the alert exceeds the specified duration threshold or other criteria The network management system features processing display storage and automated action filt
92. numeric address when requesting information about a particular device However the device profile must include a numeric address along with any of these user defined names 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 E 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System A device can be specified by using any of the following names e Device Addresses e Device Names e Serial Numbers e IP Address for SNMP brouter devices only Only the Device Address Device Name Serial Number and the IP Address can be used to uniquely specify one device You can assign a network or circuit name to one or more devices When a device ID other than the device address is given as input to the device field on forms NMS translates the ID to the device address found in the device profile associated with that ID Naming conventions allow you to use the previously listed device IDs and some special characters to create device names or device groups The following sections discuss the naming conventions you may use when identifying devices in the NMS environment Characters and Numbers Character Case Leading Zeros The naming conventions used in NMS contain special characters and numbers for identifying devices and groups of devices Uppercase alphabetic characters and lowercase alphabetic characters are equivalent in all device addresses device names network names circuit names facility names device types site names user IDs vendor names date fields a
93. of the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command When the alert remains in the unacknowledged state for a period exceeding the specified time parameter the system automatically acknowledges the alert Clearing Alerts Alarms and Status Reports Clearing Events NMS does not support manual clearing of alarms or status reports However these alerts can be cleared directly via other actions For example a modem alarm can be cleared by removing the device from the poll list of its control device via the Edit Device Profile eddp command or by setting the Alert Monitoring State field in the Edit Alert Monitoring State edams command to OFF An alarm is cleared when the device no longer reports the alarm condition a status report is cleared only when the device returns to its normal operating state Since events are information only messages sent from the multiplexers to NMS there is no clear message associated with the event from the multiplexer However NMS allows you to clear events manually through the Map and Monitor tasks To clear an event perform the following steps 1 In the Monitor or Map task window select the event you want to clear This highlights and selects the event and opens a window which displays the action you may take 2 Select the Clear Event entry The filter system is notified that the event has been cleared The filter system then sends a message to all display processes that are monitoring the event indicating that
94. off NMS does not make a call and the process terminates If the device profile has a valid entry 1 4 in the ATR field NMS uses the entry to determine which directory to use to place the call If more than one directory is specified NMS sends multiple ATRs one per directory specified The ATR phone directory numbers are defined per alert group via the Edit ATR Phone Directory edatrpd command NMS attempts to establish communications with the specified ATR phone directory number NMS attempts to call the number up to a maximum of 7 attempts at a specified interval ranging from 0 to 59 59 minutes The number of times NMS attempts to call the phone directory number and the interval between these attempts are specified in the ATR phone directory Both successful and unsuccessful calls are logged in the database if the automatic trouble ticket function was authorized for the device Also mail is sent for the number of unsuccessful calls If the alert log printer is configured ATR status is logged at that printer ATR status and feedback messages are logged as user mail to each user with network access for the associated device An ATR indication is included in the Monitor entry for an alert if that ATR was authorized for the device reporting the alert If the device profile is authorized to automatically generate a trouble ticket the Trouble Ticket is created for the alert regardless of whether the ATR call is successful or not The ATR stat
95. on the collection of trouble tickets These reports are described as follows ATR Report Use the Automatic Trouble Report ATR to obtain a summary of the calls made to the service center for ATRs that automatically generated trouble tickets 8 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Reports Detailed Trouble Ticket Report Use the Detailed Trouble Ticket Report to obtain a detailed listing of trouble tickets which match user defined selection criteria Results Queue Management You can view reports results that were sent to the Trouble Inventory Reports task s results queue with the Results Queue Management selection from the Trouble Inventory Reports menu Report results can be routed to the queue using the Destination for results field on the appropriate form You have your own results queues Your queue can have up to 50 items These items are numbered sequentially from 1 to 50 An index is assigned when a result is sent to the queue When the next assigned queue item number nears the limit of the queue 45 a mail message is sent indicating the need to delete obsolete items from the queue These queues are available to you only from the Trouble Inventory Reports task The commands available for results queue management are as follows e Delete Queue Results dlqr command e Display Queue Results dsqr command e List Queue Results sqr command Scheduling Queue Management You can examine scheduling information for reports th
96. on the results forms are system generated based on the information you entered on the input forms and the information in the database Use the PgUp and PgDn keys to view each results form 7 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Trouble Tracking Results Queue Management Use the Results Queue Management function to view results of creating editing and deleting trouble tickets Select the Results Queue Management selection from the Trouble Tracking menu or by directly entering specific Results Queue commands identified in the following sections The results of the trouble tracking functions are routed to the queue using the Destination for results field You access the Results Queue Management submenu from the Trouble Tracking menu The Results Queue Management submenu is displayed as shown in Figure 7 2 Trouble Tracking oO a Besults Queue Management 1 diqr Delete Queue Results 2 dsqr Display Queue Results 3 lsqr List Queue Results enter selection jj iis E FisHelp F2 6Go0 F32CIrFld Fd2Preullenu Fo Maintlenu Fo PrevForm Fr Quit F8sCancel i 493 14351 Figure 7 2 Results Queue Management Submenu Use these commands to Delete Display or List queue results 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 7 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Scheduling Queue Management You can examine the queues of trouble tickets scheduled for future execution and manipulate the contents of the queue Y
97. or system routine Edit Routine edr Enables you to add delete commands to from a routine List Routine lsr Lists system routines and or a user s personal routines 2 58 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Sample Procedure for Creating a Routine The following example provides a fairly straightforward application of the 6800 Series NMS routines In this example a routine is used to create a template for setting the same options on multiple devices of the same type However creating routines as templates for setting options strapping on some devices require certain considerations Be sure to read the section Considerations for Creating Routines as Options Templates Creating the Model Template 1 Select a device that is optioned or can be optioned with straps options that represent your model template In this example this device is referred to as the model The device whose options are to be changed with the template is referred to as the target device Make sure that ALL options of the model apply to all target devices on which the template is to be used For example you would not use a control DSU as a tributary DSU s template Execute the Change Options chop command to the model setting the options as necessary for the template It is suggested that you check the current option settings of the model even if you assume the device is currently optioned correctly Execute the Create Routine crr
98. profile commands The basic feature workstation does not support command selection from the Monitor window If the alert is for a managed device you get access to Network Control EL OD Device Profiles gt m Alerts gt Main Menu oon Acknowledge Alert Network Control Device Profiles gt Alerts gt b E Clear Event zi 493 14283 Figure 6 17 Monitor Main Menu Options from a Full Featured Workstation The Monitor options are described in more detail as follows Using the Alerts Option on the Monitor When you select the Alerts selection from the Monitor task menu you can access the Delete Alert History dlah and the Display Active Alert Snapshot dsaas commands Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for information on these commands 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 35 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Using the Device Profiles Option on the Monitor When you select the Device Profiles option from the Monitor s task menu a Map Manager is invoked at a Device Profiles submenu Create Device Profile crdp Delete Device Profile dldp Display Device Profile dsdp Edit Device Profile eddp List Device Profile sdp Refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for additional details on requesting these commands When you select a device profile command the input f
99. referred to as the network view of the Geographic Map Each user can customize the system default map view using the Set Default View selection To use the Set Default View selection perform the following steps 1 Identify the map view to be defined as new default view You can define this map view in one of three ways a Using one of the Zoom selections described in the next subsection or by using the left mouse button as described in the Zoom selections subsection b Defining a subview To define a subview place the mouse pointer at some point on the map this will become a corner of the new submenu press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally As you drag the mouse a box expands to encompass a map area When you release the button the area subview outlined by the box becomes the map view currently displayed in your window c Using the scroll bars 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Subnetwork View 2 With the map view identified select the Set Default View selection from the Commands menu by clicking on it with the left mouse button The system prompts you with the following message Setting your default view to the current view Do you wish to continue Yes or No If you respond y or press Enter the NMS executes the selection and the newly defined view becomes new default map view whenever the Map task is accessed This map view als
100. selecting a Connectivity Map from the results command menu A facility from a facility Object List or a single facility icon and then selecting a Connectivity Map from the results command menu Icons on the Connectivity Maps are also selectable These icons open a submenu enabling you to open additional Connectivity Maps on the selected icon or to choose other selections available for the selected icon 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System E nadeltl mi nade207 nodelll d c d c 0 ae ong Xv 75 nade245 greensbora ij commu 493 14269 Figure 6 5 Sample Connectivity Map Connectivity Maps can display connections between different product elements e g multiplexers to modems connections multiplexers to Digital Access Cross Connect Switches DACS modems to front end processors etc A Connectivity Map displays the following items e The selected device s icon e That device s directly adjacent devices e The connections between these devices based on the information contained in the selected device s facility profile s It is recommended that you configure unsupported devices in your network so that they appear on your Connectivity Maps With this information on your device database you significantly improve the ability to assess the impact of a device failure when diagnosing problems because you can readily identify
101. telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Notices WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY PARADYNE WARNING TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA THE DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS LE PRES NT APPAREIL NUM RIQUE N MET PAS DE BRUITS RADIO LECTRIQUES D PASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUM RIQUES DE LA CLASSE A PRESCRITES DANS LE R GLEMENT SUR LE
102. the 3800 3900 Series modem is C the network ends at C Figure D 8 shows a typical COMSPHERE 3800 3900 Series modem address 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 1 256 22 ri C tributary device network address B control device network address A control channel 493 11941b Figure D 8 Typical COMSPHERE 3800 3900 Series Modem Advanced Mode Address A This segment is the control channel on which the device is located The control channel identification can be a number from 1 to 8 for a 6800 Series NMS B This segment is the control device s local address There can be up to 256 addresses on a single control channel NOTE The COMSPHERE 3800 3900 Series modem stores its own network address internally For a tributary point to point configuration the address is always 1 NOTE Short form addressing is not allowed in ADp mode C This segment represents the tributary device network address for point to point ranges from 1 to 256 for 3800 3900 Series modems For 3900 Series modems tributary modems on multipoint circuits are restricted to network addresses ranging from 1 to 256 ADp Mode SRCU Addressing In ADp mode the SRCU has a network address ranging from 1 to 256 regardless of whether it is configured a local control device or whether it is on a device s diagnostic channel The SRCU cannot be polled over a secondary
103. the event has been deleted Events can also be cleared using the event time out values in the database The filter system times all events that have not been cleared from the network and which pass through the processing filter If the time out period is exceeded and you have not cleared the event the filter system clears the event by notifying the display processes that it has deleted the event from the active alerts list You set up time outs using the Edit Alert Attributes edaa command from the Manager task 5 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing If the display filter is blocked for an event NMS automatically clears the event once it passes the processing filter This is done because the event does not display to the user and consequently cannot be manually cleared this also eliminates the possibility of the number of active non cleared events becoming significant to the point where it would affect system performance The event then passes immediately to the storage automated action and Alert Driven Routine filters Once an event is cleared the event is stored in the historical alert database if you have specified it to be stored via the storage filter Alert Information Storage and Reports When an alert passes the NMS processing and storage filters and is cleared it is automatically stored in a historical alerts database You can retrieve device and alert information from this dat
104. the input form If any field is left blank on the input form the field is disregarded during the search You can display trouble tickets via the Display Trouble Tickets dstt command or access the Display Trouble Tickets function from the Trouble Tracking menu The Display Trouble Ticket Selection List form is bypassed if you populate the Ticket fields To and From with the same ticket number The first Display Trouble Tickets input form is displayed Once you complete the input forms a Trouble Ticket Selection List displays for you to select which trouble tickets you want to be displayed You can limit the display of the tickets by going through the list of trouble tickets displayed on the Trouble Ticket Selection List using the arrow keys and placing an x in the box at the left of each ticket you want displayed Use the PgUp and PgDn keys to move between pages of the Selection List Multiple tickets can be selected The selected tickets are displayed printed in the sequence in which they appear on the list You press F2 to display the results forms once the selection form is completed Use F2 for the next record or F3 for the previous record To view each page of the results use the PgUp and PgDn keys 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 7 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Edit Trouble Tickets Use the Edit Trouble Tickets function to change the information in trouble tickets Any fields can be edited by overwriting the
105. the key is in the RUN position the computer begins its BOOT UP sequence You may remove the reset run key while the 6800 Series NMS is running to prevent unauthorized persons from easily resetting the computer 2 During BOOT UP the system console on the host computer executes power up diagnostics to test its hardware After a delay of a few seconds a series of messages is displayed Graphics Controller sign on message memory test message if cold boot 640K Base Memory xxxxxxKB Extended 80486 and external cache enabled Press spacebar to interrupt autoboot NOTE On the Altos System 15000 the line 80486 and external cache enabled is replaced with External cache exists 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System At this point there is a 30 second pause This pause enables you to interrupt the autoboot sequence if necessary Do one of the following steps a Let the pause time out The system automatically proceeds with the normal BOOT UP sequence b Press CTRL D to force the system to immediately proceed with the normal BOOT UP sequence overriding the 30 second timer c Press the spacebar The boot menu is displayed You can select one of four options boot from hard disk floppy tape or enter the BIOS setup Then the following series of messages are displayed Booting from a Hard Disk Altos UNIX System V 386 Boot 3 If you
106. the next field Once you have selected an item s on the pop up menu press the F2 key The selected item s is displayed on the form field and the cursor is positioned at the beginning of the field When entering a question mark in fields that do not support a pop up menu the system displays help information on the format for these fields 2 30 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started The 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu The 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu Figure 2 22 is the main menu for the system This menu appears when you succe from this menu Im ssfully log on to the NMS You select all major NMS task selections Nanager Summary External Systems Performance Reports Trouble Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking Utilities gt J 493 14346 Figure 2 22 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu Window on a Full Feature Workstation You can have up to five task windows open simultaneously based on the following constraints e You can have two instances of any task opened at a time except for the Map Monitor and Summary tasks e For the Map task you can open one map from within the Map task e You can only have one Monitor task open at a time e You can only have one Summary task open at a time e From within the Utilities task you can open the options as follows two UNIX one Read Mail one Send Mail one NMS Users one Printer Status and one Move Print Jobs If you open option i
107. them to the target device Thus you need only use the chpsp command to download all configured model options to your target devices 2 60 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started For 3600 Series DBMs a similar procedure to that used for the 3600 Series DSU is applicable For 3400 4400 Series APL modems the same situation applies These modems have up to eight different options banks Depending on the model different commands Change Options cho Change Port Speed chpsp Change Port Options chpo and Change Telephone Numbers chtn commands may overlap with different banks If you need information on a particular command that may use overlapping options check with your service representative The capability to use a routine as an option template depends on the type of APL modem used However Method 1 works without this information regardless of the type of modem used Alert Driven Routines An Alert Driven Routine ADR is a system routine that executes automatically upon the arrival of an alert or an alert clear The System Administrator can define generic ADRs i e one ADR associated with multiple devices or several ADRs associated with a single object device facility channel channel module channel group or other user specified objects ADRs can be periodically disabled or enabled Also you can specify that the ADR be triggered only during user specified time intervals ADR execution can be based on alert ty
108. they do not have a clear indication or a stop time You can clear events manually from the displays by selecting Clear Event for your selected event You can also choose to set an Event clear timeout directing the NMS to automatically remove the event display after the time out time expires This is set via the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command discussed earlier in this chapter When you select the Clear Event selection from the Monitor s task menu the event is deleted from the Monitor list displayed on your workstation and is deleted from any other active Monitor list and from the Geographic Map and Summary windows if currently being displayed 6 36 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Monitoring the Network Using the Summary Task The Summary task is available only on full feature workstations It is accessed from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu by selecting the Summary task Once selected a single Summary window opens displaying the most current Summary totals The Summary is a real time color coded numeric representation of network alert totals that match categories with each category having different alert selection criteria On a fully configured NMS with multiplexer modem and ANALYSIS 6510 support the default Network Summary window Figure 6 18 displays 30 cells or alert categories The format is three rows with 10 columns each The rows relate to the priority level of the alerts major mi
109. to point 1 to 32 for multipoint Additional circuits can be extended beyond E up to five layers deep ADp Mode COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs Addressing Each 3600 Series DSU on the 6800 Series NMS poll list has a unique address which is composed of a string of numbers This address can be up to five levels deep The 3600 Series DSU can have two separately addressable units in the same housing One unit the DSU is restricted to odd network addressing The other the V 32 DBM modem must have even addresses with the address always greater than the DSU address Both the DSU and the V 32 DBM modem are at the same diagnostic level The tributary DSU and V 32 DBM modem are considered tributaries of the control DSU Figure D 7 shows a typical COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSU address d eee E extended downstream tributary device network address D downstream control device network address C tributary device network address B control device network address COMMENT A control channel 493 11941c Figure D 7 Typical COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSU Advanced Mode Address A This segment is the control channel on which the device is located The control channel identification can be a number from 1 to 8 for a 6800 Series NMS B This segment is the control device s local address There can be up to 256 addresses on a single control channel The network address is determined by the physical location of the device and the slot number
110. unique IP Internet Protocol address in the form XXX XXX XXX XXX Where XXX is a numeral between 1 and 255 inclusive IP addresses must be obtained from the Network Administrator E 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 International Dial Codes Table F 1 shows the international dial codes Table F 1 1 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Y OU Location Longitude Latitude 001 Atlantic Caribbean Islands 809 Bahamas Bermuda Puerto Rico 70 00 W 23 50 N Virgin Islands 001 Canada 403 Alberta 113 00 W 52 00 N 604 British Columba 123 00 W 52 00 N 204 Manitoba 98 00 W 52 00 N 506 New Brunswick 66 50 W 46 50 N 709 Newfoundland 56 00 W 48 50 N 902 Nova Scotia 63 50 W 45 00 N 613 Ontario Ottawa 75 43 W 45 25 N 705 Ontario Sault Ste Marie 84 20W 46 36 N 807 Ontario Thunder Bay 89 12W 48 27 N 416 Ontario Toronto 79 25 W 43 42 N 519 Ontario Windsor 72 01 W 45 35 N 514 Quebec Montreal 73 38W 45 30 N 418 Quebec Quebec 71 15 W 46 50 N 819 Quebec Trois Rivieres 72 34 W 46 21 N 306 Saskatchewan 106 00 W 52 00 N 001 United States 907 Alaska 152 00 W 64 00 N 808 Hawaii 158 00 W 21 50 N 213 N A Algeria 2 50 E 28 00 N 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table F 1 2 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 684 N A American Samoa 170 43 W 14 16 S 33 628 And
111. using the cut through feature and ANALYSIS Gateway by ANALYSIS NMS or independently through the modem s Diagnostic Control Panel DCP The DCP allows the operator of a modem which is optioned as a control to configure monitor and test both the control and tributary modems in the network Paradyne Basic Service Unit BSU Controlled by NMS via a cut through or by ANALYSIS these BSUs are capable of operating at 2 4 4 8 9 6 and 56 kbps and integrate both the Data Service Unit DSU and Channel Service Unit CSU functions in one unit The BSU operates over the DDS network or as a limited distance modem LDM for local area networks LANs The BSU offers both interruptive and noninterruptive testing as well as optional remote diagnostic channel feature NMS Supported Network Restoration Devices NMS provides configuration and alert management support for the following restoration devices DATAPHONE II 839A Dial Backup Unit DBU Control Unit The DATAPHONE II 839A is used to restore data communications when the APL facility fails The 4 wire APL channel restoration service transfers data communication from the failed APL channel to two public switched telephone network channels with a minimum of downtime The DATAPHONE II 839A DBU Control Unit is managed by the 6800 Series NMS on a cut through basis by using terminal emulation no alarms are reported to the NMS Paradyne Multidrop Auto Call Unit MACU via ANALYSIS Gateway The MACU re
112. within the Network Summary defined by its own set of selection criteria and reflecting the running total and severity information about the alerts which fit that selection criteria For certain 3400 Series modems a feature allowing modems in multipoint applications to control the data rate on the circuit When the control modem starts to operate at a specified fallback rate the tributary modem detects this rate change and also starts to operate at that fallback rate A bidirectional DSO voice or data path such as the one between devices and the network management system permitting I O operations to occur simultaneously with computer operations Also a logical end to end connection In the multiplexer network the specific channel terminus on the channel interface module An end to end allocation of bandwidth in integer multiples of 64k in the range of 64k to 1536k A device in which the data coming in to or going out of a certain port or ports is distributed to or gathered from the devices attached to various other ports such as multiplexers and control modems on a multipoint circuit The multiplexer hardware module that physically terminates a channel Channel interface modules are the back cards on the multiplexer The ACCULINK 740 multiplexer hardware module that provides channel control This module is the front card on the multiplexer A logical connection between 2 devices either point to point or multipoint A print
113. would bear the local address 35 NOTE In DATAPHONE II addressing local addresses range from 11 to 328 The values 0 and 9 are not permissible for the last digit C This segment is a particular port number of a modem Most DATAPHONE II modems have one port The default value is 1 Multiplexing modems can have up to six ports each supporting a data communications device The number in the address string represents which port number is being addressed D This segment is the network addresses of downstream tributary and control modems Tributary modems are not normally included in the address string unless they are the last network address or in the case of extended polling the third level tributary network address upstream of the control modem The omission of the tributary network address is called short form addressing The network address can range from 1 to 80 DATAPHONE II Mode DDD Addressing Addressing conventions in the direct distance dialing DDD or switched network service class differs from the APL and DDS classes in the following ways e DDD requires a shared diagnostic unit SDU for each mounting e Each SDU on acontrol channel must have a unique address from 11 to 328 however the last digit cannot be 0 or 9 The SDU has an APL control like diagnostic address e Each DDD modem s address is defined by its slot position 1 to 8 The local DDD modems have an APL tributary like diagnostic address e
114. 0 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee Network Printer Support System Capacity scesi troerien cadet DO CI REI eR dake geet 6800 Series NMS Hardware 00 cece eee eee ee Base 6800 Series NMS Hardware Components High Capacity 6800 Series NMS Hardware Components Optional 6800 Series Hardware Components List 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 6800 Series NMS Hardware Description 00005 1 15 Full Feature Workstations 00 0 e cee eee eee eee 1 15 Basic Feature Workstations 0 0 00 cece eee eee 1 15 Printers nct Mek Ugh ate eg Mie Ce AR LETS 1 15 UIP Cards sich thant pate beg Peg tie weer ee eed rena pes 1 16 Host Cards and Ports 1 16 Ports on the Motherboard 0 0 0 eee eee eee 1 17 IPC 1600 Gard 312 ine roe age Sait otek ae 1 17 Optional Cards 0 cee ee 1 18 NMS Softw te eR ohare eee yeas Gabe beet ie ceed 1 22 Base 6800 Series NMS Application Software Package 1 22 Optional Software Hardware Packages 0000 1 23 Description of Devices Supported by NMS suse 1 23 NMS Supported APL Modems 0000000 eese 1 23 NMS Supported Direct Distance Dialing DDD Modems 1 24 NMS Supported Data Service Units DSUs 1 24 Paradyne APL Modems and DSUs via ANALYSIS Gateway 1 2
115. 0 and later users may choose the alert groups to which multiplexer alerts device generated and ANM generated are assigned The ANM software comes with a default mapping However users may want to group alerts differently or filter selected alerts differently For information on how to change the mapping see the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide 5 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Bytex Alerts Table 5 6 shows the alert messages generated by the Unity Management System UMS on the Bytex Switch Table 5 6 Bytex Alerts Alert Group Alert Type Priority Text biem equip p1 bytex switch p1 1 variable text sent by Bytex UMS biem nms p1 sftw err p1 1 variable text sent by Bytex UMS mag corruption 1 corrupt message received from Bytex UMS biem equip p2 bytex switch p2 2 variable text sent by Bytex UMS biem nms p2 sftw err p2 2 variable text sent by Bytex UMS biem link down 2 link to Bytex UMS is down biem link up 2 link to Bytex UMS is up biem equip p3 bytex switch p3 3 variable text sent by Bytex UMS biem nms p3 sftw err p3 3 variable text sent by Bytex UMX biem unk event 3 unknown event received from Bytex device xxx System Alerts Table 5 7 shows the alert messages generated to inform of system conditions These messages display on the Monitor windows Table 5 7
116. 00 6 35 Using the Device Profiles Option on the Monitor 6 36 Network Control Option 00 00 eee eee 6 36 Acknowledging Alerts from the Monitor 00 6 36 Clearing Events from the Monitor 0 00 00 00 0005 6 36 Monitoring the Network Using the Summary Task 6 37 Customizing the Summary 0 0 cee eee eee eee 6 38 Customizing Row and Column Labels 00005 6 38 System Default Categories 0 0c cee eee eee 6 39 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Overview This chapter describes the Map Monitor and Summary tasks These tasks are the main Network Management System tools for monitoring the health and status of your network The Map Task The Map task is available only on full feature workstations You can use the mouse to perform user interface functions and navigate around the map Mouse key usage is noted as appropriate throughout the following sections The Map task provides three major windows or views of your network Geographic Map window The Geographic Map shows a graphic representation of your entire network It places icons representing network elements at geographically correct locations on an outline of the world map Connectivity Map Connectivity Maps show detailed graphic representations of the connections between specific devices within your network
117. 00 Series NMS normally supports For diagnostic communication to proceed across the extension the network address of that tributary must appear in the addressing scheme Because only four network addresses can be included in the link level address the ability to address extended tributary devices depends on the network configuration In the four layer point to point example illustrated in Figure D 5 the extended control device fills the fourth address slot If all four address slots are used the 6800 Series NMS cannot address the extended tributary modem therefore tests and commands cannot be issued to that device However the extended control can poll the tributary modem for health and status and report faults back to the 6800 Series NMS 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System LA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA ee ponte rannel 1 231 1 80 65 1 40 Loca ress aI Je NA Network Address Fourth Network Address Extended Control Third N kA Tri _ Addressing limit ird Network Address Tributary without extended polling Second Network Address Control _ Tributary used to effect First Network Address Control extended polling Port Address M Local Address Control Channel UOI Figure D 5 Extending Addressing NOTE The port address shown in Figure D 5 can be Ports 1 through 6 A
118. 1 Dial connect dial mode dial standby profile and a device df 1 Device failure type cannot be dm 1 Device control mode determined dsab 1 Device disabled el 1 External lead alarm fa 1 Facility alarm ht 1 Hold time mb 1 Make busy md 1 Device failure mm 1 Maintenance mode na 1 No answer nr 1 Diagnostic failure pf 1 Port failure DTE alarm or problem si 1 Service line Sr 1 Streaming terminal th 1 Parameter threshold exceeded tm 1 Test mode trnc 1 Subtree truncation UNK Unknown unk backup dc 2 Dial connect dial mode dial standby not classified unk device md 1 Modem failure ANALYSIS rs Reset UNK power failure unk facility fa 1 Facility alarm nr Diagnostic failure si Dial line lost unk message cm 3 Calling switch unk service tm 3 Test mode mm Maintenance mode da Device action retrain auto retry dm Device control mode remote mode as Abnormal operating speed unk terminal el 1 External lead alarm Sr Streaming terminal pf Port failure DTE alarm or problem 5 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Multiplexer List of Alerts Alerts for multiplexers comprise two categories alerts generated by the devices and alerts generated by the ACCULINK Network Management ANM application For a list of alerts generated by the devices see the User Interface Manuals for those devices Alerts generated by the ANM application are listed in this section Multiplexer Generated Alerts Alerts
119. 11 PM 54 04 HW 65 00 SF 52 12 PM 54 05 HW 65 01 SF 52 13 PM 54 06 CL 65 02 SF 52 14 PM 54 07 HW 65 03 SF 52 15 PM 54 08 CL 65 04 SF 52 16 PM 54 14 PM 65 05 SF 52 17 PM 55 00 PF 66 00 SF 52 18 FA 55 01 PF 66 01 SF 52 19 FA 55 02 PF 67 00 SF 52 20 FA 55 03 PF 67 01 SF 52 21 FA 55 04 PF 68 00 SF 52 22 PF 55 05 PF 68 01 SF 52 23 PF 55 06 HW 69 00 FA 52 24 PF 55 07 PM 69 01 FA 52 25 PF 55 08 RS 70 00 DS 52 26 PF 55 09 RS 70 01 DS 52 27 PF 55 10 HW 71 00 DS 53 00 RS 55 11 HW 71 01 DS 53 01 HW 55 12 PF 72 00 DS 53 02 HW 55 14 DS 72 01 DS 53 03 HW 55 15 DS 73 00 DS 53 04 HW 55 16 DS 73 01 DS 53 05 HW 55 17 DS 74 00 PD 53 06 HW 55 18 DS 74 01 PD 53 07 HW 55 19 DS 75 00 CG 53 08 HW 55 20 DS 75 01 CG 53 09 PD 55 21 DS 76 00 FA 53 10 PD 55 23 CL 76 02 HW 53 12 PD 55 24 CL 76 04 FA 53 13 DS 55 25 CL 76 06 FA 53 14 MM 55 26 CL 77 00 FA 53 15 DS 60 00 FA 77 02 HW January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Uniform Alarm Interface Table G 2 3 of 4 UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic 53 16 CL 60 01 FA 77 04 FA 53 17 HW 60 02 FA 77 06 FA 53 18 HW 60 03 FA 78 00 FA 53 19 HW 60 04 FA 80 00 HW 53 20 HW 60 05 FA 80 01 HW 53 22 PD 61 00 FA 81 00 HW 53 23 PD 61 01 FA 81 01 HW 53 24 PD 62 00 FA 82 00 PM 53 25 PD 62 01 FA 82 01 PM 54 00 DS 63 00 FA 82 02 PM 54 01 HW 63 01 FA 82
120. 22 CG 02 00 RS 19 03 PD 48 23 CG 03 00 RS 19 04 CM 50 00 DM 04 02 RS 19 05 CM 50 01 DM 04 03 RS 19 06 CM 50 02 DM 04 04 RS 19 07 CM 50 03 DM 04 05 RS 19 08 CM 50 04 RS 04 06 RS 19 09 CM 50 05 CG 04 07 RS 19 10 CM 50 06 CG 05 00 RS 19 11 CM 50 07 CG 06 00 RS 19 12 PD 50 08 CG 07 00 DS 19 13 CM 50 09 RS 08 00 DS 19 14 RS 51 00 FA 09 00 PD 19 15 RS 51 01 FA 10 00 DS 19 16 RS 51 02 FA 11 00 RS 19 17 NA 51 03 FA 12 00 DS 19 18 CM 51 04 FA 12 01 MM 19 19 CM 51 05 FA 13 00 MM 20 00 PD 51 06 FA 13 01 MM 21 00 PD 51 07 FA 14 01 PD 22 00 PD 51 08 RS 14 02 PD 23 12 PD 51 10 SF 14 03 PD 23 13 PD 51 11 SF 14 04 PD 23 14 PD 51 12 SF 14 05 FA 40 00 DA 51 13 SF 14 06 FA 41 00 CG 51 14 CL 14 07 FA 42 00 PD 51 15 CL 14 08 FA 42 01 PD 51 16 CL 14 09 FA 42 02 PD 51 17 CL 14 10 FA 42 03 PD 51 18 CL 14 11 FA 42 04 PD 51 19 CL 15 00 CM 42 05 PD 51 20 CL 15 01 CM 43 00 PD 51 21 CL 15 10 CM 43 01 PD 52 00 FA 15 11 CM 43 02 PD 52 01 FA 16 00 CM 43 03 PD 52 02 HW 17 00 DS 43 04 PD 52 03 HW 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 G 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table G 2 2 of 4 UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic 18 00 RS 44 00 PD 52 04 HW 18 01 HW 47 00 CG 52 05 HW 18 12 HW 48 00 CG 52 06 PD 18 14 RS 48 12 CG 52 07 PD 18 17 RS 48 14 CG 52 08 CG 18 19 HW 48 19 CG 52 09 CG 52 10 PM 54 03 HW 64 01 FA 52
121. 26 20 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation C AT amp T Mail Alert Log Printer or NetView PC lt Monitor Cy SNA Host L Keyboard g Mouse L H Jle L Lj ANALYSIS NMS Td ACCULINK lt k z M Multiplexer Helle Lt EE lise l int ts ACCULINK Multiplexer lt ex MID ALTOS s e HE5 Cut through Port Command and Event Interface ts OT 1 o fpr i SYSTEM G Im a a 8 8 N 5000 al HE Automatic Trouble Ty of Pye m 9 H F Report Interface as ee De Host o q T 2 UAI AMI AI UT s d I PARALLEL SERIAL AMI File Export L UUCP E L 1 System 839A Dial Backu Printer n Modem System Controller Control Channels DCX Multiplexer lt 4 tas Service Restoration Second L Control Unit Card R Channels System Printer VT100 Emulation 9 16 optional a 1 Service Restoration Full Feature Control Unit Ol Workstations VT100 Emulation NETWORK IT AT amp T Mail C HUB UNIT 1 Monitor I 1 Basic Feature Keyboard Workstations L E O L E E 839A Dial Backup ri T E H System Controller z i E SYSTEM z s N 5000 DCX Multiplexer z o T UIP L E L E Basic Feature SERIAL PARALLEL SERIAL Workstations L 1 lt IJ 839A Dial Backup System Controller DCX Multiplexer lt 4 Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation 494 13051
122. 37 Cuenca 79 00 W 2 54 S 32 Quito 78 30 W 0 14S 20 Egypt 29 50 E 27 00 N 3 Alexandria 29 55 E 31 13 N 2 Cairo 31 15 E 30 03 N 66 Port Said 32 18 E 31 17 N 503 El Salador 88 58 W 13 42 N 251 Ethiopia 38 42 E 9 03 N 1 Addis Ababa 38 42 E 9 03 N 7 Jimma 36 47 E 7 39 N 679 Fiji Islands 178 00 E 17 75 S 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 F 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table F 1 4 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area t Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 358 Finland 2745E 63 32 N 0 Helsinki 25 00 E 60 08 N 33 France 2 28 E 47 05 N 56 Bordeaux 0 34 W 44 50 N 91 Marseille 5 22 E 43 18 N 13 Paris 2 20E 48 52 N 14 Paris 2 20E 48 52 N 16 Paris 2 20E 48 52 N 596 French Antilles 61 05 W 14 36 N 689 French Polynesia 149 34 W 17 32 S 241 Gabon 11 48 E 0 38 S 49 Germany West 8 40 E 50 33 N 30 Berlin 13 25 E 52 32 N 228 Bonn 7 06 E 50 44 N 69 Frankfurt 8 41 E 50 06 N 89 Munich 11 35 E 48 08 N 37 Germany East 12 39 E 51 53 N 2 Berlin 13 25 E 52 32 N 51 Dresden 13 45 E 51 03 N 41 Leipzig 12 25 E 51 20 N 30 Greece 21 55 E 39 22 N 1 Athens 23 44 E 38 00 N 241 Rhodes 28 14 E 36 26 N 671 Guam 144 45 E 13 28 N 53 Guantanamo Bay 75 14 W 20 09 N 99 all points 75 14 W 20 09 N 502 Guatemala 90 20 W 15 28 N 22 Guatemala City 90 22 W 14 38 N F 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 International Dial Codes Table F 1 5 of 11
123. 5 Paradyne Basic Service Unit BSU 0 0 0 cee eee eee 1 25 NMS Supported Network Restoration Devices suus 1 25 NMS Supported Multiplexers seeeeeee eese 1 26 Migration sete REC E E S ERN we ated IRE RR AR 1 27 Product Overview The COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NMS is an integrated network management system It supports both dial and leased modems DSUs CSUs and T1 access as well as nodal processors on a modular hardware and software platform providing centralized network management for users with distributed networks Also the 6800 Series NMS enables you to view access and manage unsupported devices from the NMS via VT100 and 3270 external system cut throughs to the management systems controlling them The 6800 Series NMS offers two versions for network management One version provides network management for networks of up to 10 000 devices supporting up to four simultaneous users or up to 12 simultaneous users if the User Interface Processor UIP is installed The system runs on an Altos System 5000 There are two 6800 Series configurations a base configuration and a UIP configuration Depending on the configuration you have installed the number of workstations supported varies see Table 1 1 6800 Series NMS System Capacities later in this chapter for specific capacity specifications The second version provides network management for networks of up to 15 000 devices s
124. 6800 Series NMS System Administrator e Task name which provides the full path to the command to be executed The command is assumed to start an X window session e Parameter s required by the task 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 I1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Perform the following steps on both the 6800 Series NMS host and the UIP if your system is configured with a UIP 1 Log in as root 2 Add the external systems host name and the IP address to the etc hosts file using a UNIX text editor such as vi in the following format nnn nnn nnn nnn space or tab host name 3 Add the external system s host name to the etc XO hosts file Perform the following steps to configure the 6800 Series NMS NOTE The following steps must be performed with the NMS application running 1 Execute the Edit External System Configuration edesc command The input form appears 2 Using the following information fill in the edesc input form Enter sm in the Type field e Enter a cut through name to be assigned to the external system in the Name field e Enter the host name IP address e Enter the task name This is the task name that will remotely execute on the external system host e Enter the parameter that may be required by the task Enter 0 in the Port group field The default is 0 3 Execute the Edit User Profile edup command or Create User Profile crup command to grant per
125. 80 12 4464 19 3481 22 3433 02 3481 12 3480 19 3483 22 4434 02 3483 12 4484 19 4484 22 3440 02 4484 12 3440 22 3440 23 3441 02 3440 13 3441 22 4444 23 3443 02 4444 13 3443 22 3460 23 4444 02 3460 13 4444 22 4464 23 3460 12 4464 13 3460 22 3480 23 3460 90 3480 13 3461 22 4484 23 3461 12 4484 13 3463 22 3460 32 3463 12 3440 19 4464 22 3463 32 COMSPHERE 3900 APL Modems 3910 3911 DATAPHONE II APL Modems 2024A 2048C 2096C 2192A 2024T 2048T 2096T 2192B 2048A 2096A 2144A COMSPHERE DDD Modems and DSUs 3510 3511 3810 A1 001 3820 A1 001 3610 3611 3811 B1 001 3830 A1 001 3830 a1 001 DATAPHONE Il DDD Modems 2224A 2224E 2224G 2248A SDU24A SDU48A SDU96A 2296A 2656SG 2796SG DATAPHONE II DSUs 2556 2656SC 2756 2796 2596 2696 2756b 2796b 2656 2696A DDS 3500 DSU 3510 3511 AB COMSPHERE ab DBU COMSPHERE dbu s dbu d SRCU COMSPHERE srcu Multiplexer Devices 719 740 56k 741 56k 745 735 740 741 742 742 56k A 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Command Access Levels OVerVIe We e veut eh ee bd S A P e De o ek B 1 Overview Table B 1 is an alphabetical listing of all commands that you can access from the command menus or from the enter selection field in the appropriate task menu The table also provides the following information for each command COMMANDS represents the NMS command name NOTE A dagger T at the beginning of a command name in the COMMAND column indicates that this is a new command for thi
126. 800 Series NMS Full Feature Workstations Running X ONE Server slesleelseeeeeeee eee I 3 Network Configuration 6800 Series NMS Sun Workstations 1 3 Overview The 6800 Series NMS X window cut through feature provides an X window cut through session to any external management system on the same TCP IP network as the 6800 Series NMS Cut Through Session Restrictions Observe the following restrictions when performing the X window cut through e The X window cut through from the 6800 Series NMS to any system on the TCP IP network can be accessed only on a 6800 Series NMS full feature workstation e The 6800 Series NMS allows a maximum of two cut throughs on each full feature workstation independent of cut through type e Any user given access to cut through to a TCP IP external system must have an account on the external system s host which coincides with the 6800 Series NMS login A rhosts file needs to be set up for each account wanting to perform a cut through Initially this file does not exists so you must create it using a UNIX text editor The rhosts file must reside in the home directory of the user s account Network Configuration 6800 Series NMS Host and UIP To configure the 6800 Series NMS host and UIP the following information is needed e Host name or the IP address of the external system Ensure that this host name is also set up in the 6800 Series NMS host and UIP etc hosts files by the
127. 800 Series NMS Hardware Components The host computer for the high capacity 6800 Series NMS is the Altos System 15000 The Altos System 15000 is based on the EISA bus featuring two Intel 180486 processors running at a clock speed of 50 Mhz It comes configured with 32 Mb of memory three 530 Mb SCSI hard disk drives a 1 44 Mb 3 5 inch floppy drive and an SCSI cartridge tape drive For a detailed description of the Altos System 15000 refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide Optional 6800 Series Hardware Components List Optional hardware components for the base 6800 Series NMS system are full feature and basic feature workstations printers monitors circuit cards and a modem for dial up connection to printers and external systems General descriptions of these optional hardware components are provided in the following sections 6800 Series NMS Hardware Description The 6800 Series NMS hardware is described in this section Full Feature Workstations The optional full feature workstation can be 1 a DOS based workstation 2 an X Terminal workstation or 3 a Sun Workstation This workstation has bit mapped graphics capabilities as well as multi windowing and multitasking capabilities The full feature workstation offers a mouse based interface and is connected via a LAN Basic Feature Workstations Printers A basic feature workstation running MS DOS and Windows software and work
128. 9 1 UNDC ACCESS mI i oor Cr exe are ae UR E enact 9 2 INFORMIX Access 0000 ccc s 9 2 Mail Functions ossen aare a e een cnet teenies 9 2 NMS Users Lasts 4 228 206 een EE SER e eere 9 8 Printer F nctlons aee Re BS BE RANA e 9 9 User Interface Processor UIP 0 00 cece eee eee eee 9 10 Multiplexer Utilities ssr snare eo niee e a eee eee 9 10 A Device Model Numbers 00 cee eee eens A 1 B Command Access Levels nnn nunnana nenne B 1 5 5 ICONS oo E a A ML RN E C 1 D Device Addressing 0 cece ee eee eee eee D 1 E Naming Conventions 00 0 0 ee E 1 F International Dial Codes lille F 1 G Uniform Alarm Interface 00 0 0 G 1 H File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator H 1 I 6800 Series NMS X Window Cut Through I 1 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 iii COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System List of Figures Figure 1 1 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports without UIP Configured 1 2 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports without UIP Configured 1 3 High Capacity 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports with Two UIPs Configured eeseeeeeeeee e 2 1 6800 Series NMS Menu s acia ninii ie ie Ie 2 2 Login Window eeeeeeeeee hh m m 3 n 2 3 6800 Series NMS Task Menu Window 0 0 0 eee eee eee 2 4 Manager Task Window
129. ATR Destination ee MSS al Comments mux nodst3 800 555 5222 3 10 03 Jim in Atlanta mux callst3 800 555 4456 2 0 55 Joe in Atlanta mux noderr1 800 555 1234 3 5 02 Mary in Dallas mux facstt3 800 555 8432 3 10 01 Andrew in Dallas swtch cmneqp1 800 555 2345 3 10 05 Paradyne Tech Support For each ATR NMS checks the telephone number entry that corresponds to the alert group and responds as follows e Jf no telephone number is provided NMS does not place a call e Ifthe entry contains a telephone number NMS calls that number to report the alert e Ifthe entry contains the value port NMS uses the dedicated ATR remote printer port to send the ATR report There can be only 1 port configured as a dedicated ATR port see the Edit Port Configuration edpc command The ATR phone directory allows you to specify whether a call should be made for a particular alert group You can also configure the directory so that NMS can call a different telephone number for a different alert group Each ATR phone directory contains the information on the number of retries and the interval between each retry for each call and a comment space for each entry You can display and edit the ATR Phone Directory See the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for a description of the Display ATR Phone Directory dsatrpd and Edit ATR Phone Directory edatrpd commands 7 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Tr
130. COMSPHERE 6800 SERIES NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM USER S SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Document No 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 NOTE This document supports Release 4 2 or greater of 6800 Series NMS COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide 6800 A2 GE26 20 2nd Edition January 1997 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release or a Technical Update Memo TUM to this manual Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use one of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 727 530 2340 Trademarks All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners do Printed on recycled paper COPYRIGHT 1997 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyrigh
131. Clearing Events E A ep IR e ees 5 16 Alert Information Storage and Reports 00005 5 17 Communications Products List of Alerts 00000000000 eee 5 17 Multiplexer List of Alerts 2 0 0 0 0 eee eects 5 23 Multiplexer Generated Alerts 0 0 ccc eee eee eee eee 5 23 ANM Generated Alerts 2 0 0 0 ce cece cee eee 5 23 Alert Group Assignments 0 0 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 5 24 Bytex Alerts 4 07 1e Mote Meck et A p Poe t M a t USN dite cls 5 25 System ACLS ic A e todas en dey tento shod ar po Memes utet elder eee SR and aere An 5 25 Overview This chapter discusses the processing of alerts through the NMS filter system and the processing and management of alerts The filter commands are provided under Alert Management which is under System Management in the Manager task 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Filter Administration A filter is a mechanism that lets the NMS software determine whether or not an alert is accepted by the subsystem or process controlled by the filter parameter Filters can be defined as duration filters which check the length of time an alert is present before passing the alert on or simple on off or pass block filters which check the type of alert and determine whether or not to pass it An alert is an alarm status report or event reported by a device Each alert received by NMS is mapped to an alert type Alert types are sho
132. Command Reference Manual for additional information on modems Data Service Units and Service Restoration Control Units Each modem on the NMS poll list has a unique address based on its location in the network Once the list is established the NMS polls each modem on each control channel requesting its health and status 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System In turn each local control device must establish a poll list of its tributary devices Tributary modems can also poll extended control modems via the diagnostic channel In the case of DDD devices each control device must establish a poll list of its DDD devices After a poll list is established the control modem polls each device on its poll list When alerts are detected by control modem or polling the alert is reported to the NMS when the NMS polls the control device You can place an individual device on the NMS poll list by using the system polling field in the device s device profile instead of using the Acquire Modem Control Channel Poll List acmccpl command The System polling field in each device profile is used to activate skip polling on the control channel for the device Use of the System polling field is described in greater detail in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual If you change the device s protocol mode from DATAPHONE II mode to ADp mode or the other way aroun
133. DCP 286i card is needed to support the 3270 Terminal Emulation option which allows access to the SNA based hosts and software from both full feature and basic feature workstations It allows the workstation to appear as if it were functioning as a 3270 terminal with a nonstandard keyboard 1 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction b0 1908 L v6l uog ubnoiurino sjsenbeg 1ejuugd uodsugJ ue v SINN SISATVNV UORE SXJOM Jejuug uejs s D ein 91 6 sjeuueyD ainyee4 olseg peo Jejuug ueis s mm TWldas Vidas 000S WALSAS SOLIV ooo peoqioy mm JOJUO A uoe AOM NEN enyeoJ nJ 1 puoses 8 1 s euueu Jonuo2 wapo ISOH VNS A LINN 8nH X3HOML3N V OO HOOOHOO V V 0 USV Tata E zu 2 1 a A e TE a ed Se E en ahali z 2 x HERREN uff 3 2 3 3 11 E HELM de 3 oo uomge nur3 OOLLA yun jouoo UOITEIOISAY aS JexejdninWw xoa Jejoguo ueis s BEER ME dnyoeg eld veeg aonn uodx3 l4 INV swely IAV IVN eoepeij yod y jqno oneuoiny eoeyiey juo 3 pue pue w wog 1exejdninig ANITINOOY Jexejdninj MNIINDOV Cc JO Adog e007 SUOITE SHION ainyee4 oiseg Od M IN N 10 Jejuug 801 uev renw 9 1v uomgejnura o0 LLA yun Jonuoo UOITEIOISAY aus Figure 1 1 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports without UIP Configured 1 19 January 1997 6800 A2 GE
134. Device Commands Menus 000 eee ee eee eee 6 13 6 5 Sample Connectivity Map 0 0 02 ee ee eee 6 18 6 6 Placement of Adjacent Devices on a Connectivity Map esses 6 20 6 7 MapCommand Menu i re crina a EERE RE E ere 6 22 6 8 Manager Window Invoked from Map Command Menu 6 23 6 9 Command Menu for a Selected Object 0 cee eee eee ee 6 24 6 10 Network Control Submenu 1 for a Selected Object 0 0 6 25 6 11 Network Control Submenu 2 for a Selected Object 0 0 0 0 6 26 6 12 Network Command Input Form for a Selected Object 0 6 27 6 13 Network Profile Submenu for Selected Device 0000 6 28 6 14 Network Profile Input for Selected Object 0 00 000 6 29 6 15 Routines Schedule Items and Queue Results Submenus 6 31 6 16 Monitor Task Window seeeeeeee Ie 6 32 6 17 Monitor Main Menu Options from a Full Featured Workstation 6 35 6 18 Sample Network Summary Window seeeeeeeeee eee 6 37 7 Trouble Tracking Menu sssseseeeeeee eI 7 3 7 2 Results Queue Management Submenu 0 002 eese 7 5 7 3 Scheduling Queue Management Submenu 00 0000 00 0000 7 6 7 4 Automatic Trouble Report 0 0 0 cece n 7 11 8 1 Trouble Inventory Reports Task Menu 0 0 0 0 e eee eee ee eee 8 3 8 2 Perfo
135. Diagnostic Control Processor DIAG diagnostic network diagnostic tree dial backup Dial Backup Unit DBU Digital Access Cross Connect System DACS A condition state or value in effect unless the user specifically changes it The transformation of an iconified window back into a full size window caused by clicking on an icon A user or system defined group of devices In the 6800 Series NMS a record containing configuration data for each device on the network A diagnostic connection between collocated tributary modems and control modems It is used to transmit tests and commands downstream and to transport diagnostic information upstream to the 6800 Series NMS Physically this channel can be either a dedicated link or multiplexed with another data link The ability of a product to coexist in diagnostic networks composed of products of other types to send interpretable alarm information upstream and to receive and execute commands from other devices For example DATAPHONE II and Model 2 modems are diagnostically compatible The common term used for any DATAPHONE II network management device Level II Diagnostic Console Level III Network Controller and Level IV System Controller A diagnostic microcomputer processor used by 3400 Series modems to perform real time transmission line measurements modem performance monitoring and complete modem terminal interface monitoring A network used to trans
136. FORMIX DATABASE USE ANOTHER TAPE 4 Remove tape from the tape drive label it Database Files Directories Backup with the current date Wait for the following message to display Please insert cartridge tape Type Vc to continue or q to quit and then press Enter 5 Insert a new tape To continue TYPE c PRESS Enter Wait for the following message to display Please refer to page 3 20 of the Informix OnLine Administrator s Guide for additional information Backing up INFORMIX database please wait Performing archive of the entire INFORMIX OnL ine system Please mount tape and press Return to continue 6 Because the cartridge tape has already been inserted into the tape drive ignore the instructions to mount the tape PRESS Enter 4 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 System Administration 7 There are different formats available for archiving the INFORMIX database Always run a complete archive of all used disk pages A full archive is selected by responding with 0 to the following prompt Please enter the level of archive to be performed 0 1 or 2 TYPE 0 PRESS Enter 8 Atthis point the database transfer to tape begins The message below dynamically updates as the archive continues Archive in progress X percent done If more than one tape is required to complete the archive the following message is displayed Please label this type as number 1 in the archive sequence Remove the tape a
137. HONE II diagnostic protocol mode the NMS adds a default port address of 1 to the link level address In the Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode addressing scheme short form addressing is not supported If a device is in DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode and its link level address is in short form you must add the missing tributaries network addresses to the link level address in the Alternate mode address field of the device profile You must also ensure that device profiles are created for these tributaries and for all devices on the diagnostic tree In the Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode only local control devices are polled on the control channel Therefore change the System polling field from active to skipped for these external devices These changes are identified as the output results of the Change Protocol Mode chpm command You may need to add some of the affected devices to their upstream device s poll list Figure D 9 provides a comparison of the two addressing schemes used for a sample circuit Note that for each type of link level address its alternate form which should be included in the device profile is shown 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Modem Local Address Port Address Network Address DPII Mode Link Level Address DPII Mode Alternate Address ADp Mode Link Level Address ADp Mode Alternate Address A B C D E 328 n a n a n a n a
138. MS configuration are identified for you in this chapter in the appropriate configuration descriptions These commands display detailed input forms for configuration data entry For detailed information on requesting a command for execution refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual in tandem with this chapter You may also need to reference the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual and the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Command Reference Manual NOTE Many commands discussed in this chapter are executable only by the System Administrator Refer to the command descriptions in the appropriate NMS reference manual for access level information 3 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Sequential Steps for Configuration It is recommended that you read through this chapter first to gain an understanding of the concepts then refer to Activating the NMS at the end of this chapter when you are ready to configure your NMS The following list summarizes the activities for configuring your NMS 1 Configure all ports 2 Create Profiles user site facility vendor and device profiles 3 Create the network map 4 Activate control channels 5 Establish filter parameters for each device type Edit color code scheme as desired Concepts of Configuration Management Configura
139. MSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Login Window 9 At the Login prompt TYPE admin PRESS Enter 10 At the Password prompt TYPE the password defined for the System Administrator PRESS Enter The following message appears Verifying Login Please Wait If the login is successful the 6800 Series NMS Main Tasks menu appears Figure 2 10 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Session Edit Print Configure COMSPHERE 6800 NMS Tasks Manager 2 flanitor 3 External Systems 4 Performance Reports 5 Troubles Inventory Reports 6 Trouble Tracking 7 Utilities enter selection MAJ 10 MIN 1 WRN 1 New Mail Tue Apr 19 22 56 1991 Help ClrField Tasks Refresh Logoff Cancel 491 13532 01 Figure 2 10 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu Shown for Basic Feature Workstations Stopping the 6800 Series NMS Software Application To reset the 6800 Series NMS software application on the host computer perform the following steps using the full feature workstation NOTE If you are currently in an active X window session proceed to Step 1 If the Console Login prompt is displayed skip to Step 2 1 Select Quit from the workspace menu and confirm OK If you logged in as ffw you should now be at the Console Login prompt At the Console Login prompt 2 TYPE nms PRESS Enter This brings up the Password prompt At the Password prompt TYPE the password
140. MSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 5 2 1 of 5 Communication Products Alerts MESI Alert Group Alert Type Priority Alert s Textual Display AB ab backup aplo 3 APL connection open COMSPHERE ab device df 1 Device failure Analog Bridge nr Diagnostic failure ab message ccn 3 Configuration change ab service dsab 3 Device disabled tm Test mode ACU Paradyne acu backup da 2 Device action auto retry Auto Call Unit na Failed all ANALYSIS acu device df 1 Device failure acu facility fa 1 Facility alarm nr Diagnostic failure acu message cm 3 Calling switch acu service dm 3 Device Control mode ACU manual acu terminal pf 1 Port failure DTE alarm or problem ADC Paradyne adc device df 1 ADC hardware fault ANALYSIS Data rs Reset ADC power up Concentrator adc facility nr 1 ADC timeout ANALYSIS adc message cm 3 ADC call adc service mm 2 Maintenance mode ADC disabled DL abort DL IP tm Test mode 5 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Table 5 2 2 of 5 Communication Products Alerts TES on Alert Group Alert Type Priority Alert s Textual Display APL apl backup dc 2 Dial connect dial mode dial standby COMSPHERE pl ok Private line OK for data DATAPHONE Il and apl cnnd msg message 3 Text of canned message Paradyne Analog dial 3 Alert text varies depending on dial failure Private Line apl device am
141. Management System Spectrum Administrator Table B 1 13 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From t Manage Automatic mab Administrator Yes Yes Manager Backup t Manage Automatic mar Administrator Yes Yes Manager Restore Manage Call Statistics mcs Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Modem Bit Error Rate mbert Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Test Administrator Move Print Jobs No No access level No No Utilities abbreviation assigned NAP and SDL State nsss All Levels Yes Yes Manager Summary NMS Users No No access level No No Utilities abbreviation assigned Network Paths Summary nps All Levels Yes Yes Manager Network Wide Channel nwcgs All Levels Yes Yes Manager Group Summary Node Errors Report ner All Levels Yes Yes Manager Node State Summary nss All Levels Yes Yes Manager Offline Test ot Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt offl Administrator Open Trouble Ticket optt Data Tech Manager No No Manager Administrator Physical Link Loopback pll Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Physical Link Module plmt Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Test Tech Manager Administrator Power and Alarm pact All Levels Yes Yes Manager Control Test Printer Status No No access level No No Manager abbreviation assigned Receive Signal Level rsl All Levels Yes Yes Manager Receive Signal Q
142. Manager Yes Yes Manager Passwords Administrator Change Options cho Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt chop Administrator Change Physical Link chplc Manager Yes Yes Manager Configuration Administrator Change Poll List chpl Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Change Port Options chpo Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt chportop Administrator Change Port Speed s chpsp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt chportsp Administrator Change Protocol Mode chpm Manager No No Manager Administrator Change Routing Table chrt Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Change Supervisory chsdlc Manager Yes Yes Manager Data Link Administrator Change Telephone chtn Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Number s Administrator Change Thresholds cht Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Channel Group cgl Manager Yes Yes Manager Loopback Administrator Indicates what is shown on the screen B 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Command Access Levels Table B 1 4 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Channel Group cgpr All Levels Yes Yes Manager Performance Report Performance Reports Channel Group cgs All Levels Yes Yes Manager Summary Channel Group Trace cgt All Levels Yes Yes Manager Channel Loopback cl Help Desk Data Yes Yes Ma
143. Map Simple links contain only one facility Aggregate links contain more than one facility Link icons are not labeled on the Geographic Map Links shown on the map that do not represent any managed facilities do not display alert state information and appear in the unmanaged color system default color for unmanaged is white When a managed facility terminating at at least one managed device associated with a link icon reports an alert s the link icon changes from its color coded normal state color to the color associated with the highest alert state of any of its component facilities system default color is red While the alert s remains unacknowledged the line remains solid When the alert s is acknowledged the solid line changes to a dashed line Site Placement on the Geographic Map NMS determines site placement by the type of site named unnamed unplaceable being placed Those sites that cannot be placed at a determined location on the map by the system are placed in the default site location on the map These placement scenarios are further explained as follows Placement of Named Sites on the Map NMS places sites on the map based on the information contained in the site profiles If the Longitude and Latitude fields contain valid data NMS places the site at the specified coordinates on the map Otherwise NMS places the site based on the Country code and City code information in the profile Refer to Appendix F f
144. N 3 Tokyo 139 45 E 35 40 N 45 Yokohama 139 38 E 35 28 N 962 Jordan 36 40 E 30 46 N 254 Kenya 37 40 E 0 39 N 11 Mombasa 39 40 E 4 04 S 2 Nairobi 36 50 E 1 17S 37 Nakuru 36 04 E 0 16 S 82 Korea 128 08 E 36 25 N 51 Pusan 129 02 E 35 05 N 2 Seoul 127 00 E 37 30 N 965 Kuwait 48 00 E 29 20 N 231 Liberia 10 46 W 6 20 N 218 Libya A S J 16 21 E 27 51 N 21 Tripoli 13 12 E 32 58 N 41 Liechtenstein 9 32 E 47 08 N 352 Luxembourg 6 08 E 49 37 N F 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 International Dial Codes Table F 1 7 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 265 Malawi 34 29 E 13 45 S 550 Zomba 35 22E 15 228 60 Malaysia 102 00 E 4 11 N 4 Alor Setar 100 23 E 6 06 N 5 Ipoh 101 02 E 4 36 N 3 Kuala Lumpur 101 42 E 3 08 N 52 Mexico 101 59 W 23 20 N 748 Acapulco 99 56 W 16 51 N 5 Mexico City 99 10 W 19 25 N 33 93 Monaco 7 25 E 43 44 N 212 Morocco 6 59 W 31 44 N Rabat 6 51 W 34 02 N Tangiers Tanger 5 50 W 35 48 N 264 Namibia 17 06 E 22 34 S 31 Netherlands 5 57 E 52 13 N 20 Amsterdam 4 54 E 52 21 N 10 Rotterdam 4 29 E 51 55 N 70 The Hague s Gravenhage 4 16 E 52 05 N 599 Netherlands Antilles 68 56 W 12 12 N 8 Aruba 70 00 W 12 30 N 7 Bonaire 68 27 W 12 15N 9 Curacao 68 56 W 12 12N 4 Saba 63 26 W 17 42 N 3 Sint Eustatius 63 05 W 18 05 N 5 Sint Maarten 63 00 W 17 33 W 687 New Caledo
145. OMM brter clst CLST clst comm COMM snmp dacs DACS dacs dbu DIAL dbu ddd MOD ddd dds MOD dds erth ERTH fep fep FEP fep host HOST host macu DIAL macu mux MUX mux nms HOST nms ntwk SMUX ntwk pbx PBX pbx pkt sw COMM pkt sw prin PRIN prin proc HOST proc psw SW psw satl SATL satl snmp COMM snmp Srcu COMM srcu swtch SMUX swtch system HOST system term TERM term und UNK und unk UNK unk 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Circuit Object Class Data from the facility profiles will be mapped into the CIRCUIT object of the AMI FI data in Table H 7 Table H 7 CIRCUIT Object Class NMP Message Element Corresponding NMS Information Corresponding File Import Information Circuit ID Facility Name Facility Name Endpoint Names Device Name of devices at both endpoints See Table H 5 of devices at both endpoints State 255 255 Circuit Type UNK UNK Deleting NMS Sites on the AMI When an NMS device profile for a new device is loaded into the AMI database via the File Import utility the AMI automatically creates an NMP association between the device and the site location to which the device belongs If a device profile is changed to reference a new or different location as determined by the Site name field in the device profile and then loaded into the AMI database via the File Import utility the location
146. RE 6800 Series Network Management System delayed Causes the command to be executed at one or more future time s When you enter delayed in the Schedule execution field the following additional fields are displayed Date s The command executes on the date s specified in this field You can enter as many dates as will fit in the field Separate all dates with commas or spaces Valid entries are individual dates in the formats mm dd yy mm dd dd or the keywords today today nn last Where today Execute today today nn Execute nn number of days from today last Execute on the last day of the month mm dd yy Execute on the specified month day and year mm dd Execute on the specified month and day the year defaults to the current year dd Execute on the specified day the month and year default to the current month and year Time s The command executes at the time specified in this field Valid entries are individual times in the format hh mm hh mmam or pm or a range of hours in the format hh hh mm and all mm Where hh mm Execute at the 24 hour time specified hh mmam or Execute at the 12 hour time specified or hh hh mmpm with an am or pm designation hh hh mm Execute every hour within the time range specified at the specified minute all mm Execute every hour at the specified minute weekly Causes the command to execute on a weekly basis When you enter weekly in the Schedule execution field the
147. S enhanced UAI should be used For backward compatibility with older versions of StarKeeper or the AMI basic UAI should be used A list of the basic enhanced alert mappings is included in Table G 2 in the Network Monitor UAI Indicator section 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 G 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Uniform Alarm Filters Uniform alarm filters are used to determine which alerts should be sent across the UAI connection An alert must pass both the processing filter and uniform alarm filter before it will be sent As with other alert filters the uniform alarm filter parameters can be changed on a per device type per alert group basis In addition device exceptions can be created such that alerts from a particular device or group of devices will be filtered differently than those from other devices of the same device type Port Configuration The UAI port information specified in the port configuration table is used to determine the port parameters associated with the UAI connection The UAI connection must be a dedicated connection any port speed supported by the NMS can be used If you change from basic UAI to enhanced UAI or vice versa after the UAI port has been installed via the Edit Port Configuration edpc command you must do the following to make the change take effect 1 Remove the UAI port information from the port configuration table To do this execute the Edit Port Configurations
148. S devices if an ANALYSIS connection is configured Unsupported devices are devices that the NMS cannot directly communicate with or directly manage and which can only be accessed via cut through sessions to other environments outside the 6800 Series NMS Examples of unsupported devices are Digital Access Cross Connect DACS systems Private Branch Exchange PBX front end processors etc Although NMS cannot communicate directly with unsupported devices information for these devices can still be stored in the profile database and the devices can still be displayed on the network map You create device profiles using the Create Device Profile crdp command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for a detailed description on the Create Device Profile crdp command When you execute the Create Device Profile crdp command the required fields differ depending on whether the device is supported unsupported modem multiplexer or system The NMS also creates device profiles automatically as follows e NMS creates a device profile for itself during installation It assigns the reserved device name system 1 to this profile You can edit or delete that profile as necessary e NMS creates device profiles when you execute the Acquire Modem Control Channel Poll List acmccpl command if the local control devices responding to the poll do not have device profiles In these cases the NMS creates
149. Violation Information The 6800 Series NMS provides an audit trail tool for monitoring usage and attempted security violations of the NMS System Administrators can view a historical record of the system command usage via user level commands The tool contains a record of all commands with the exception of the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks executed by a user This record includes security violations showing attempts to execute a command or attempts to access a device for which permission is denied Automated Trouble Tracking System for Network Problems with Customization Capabilities The Trouble Tracking task uses the INFORMIX relational database system to aid in the tracking of network problems If a device reports an alert the NMS can automatically open a trouble ticket for the alert documenting alert device assignment information in the ticket You can append comments or additional information in the ticket Using Trouble Tracking you can track and escalate outstanding problems providing a jeopardy state for the problem and a database for problem history You can customize trouble ticket forms inputs and results displays using the optional INFORMIX 4GL Reports Customization software package Personal System and Alert Driven Routines A routine is a group of commands executed sequentially when you request execution of that routine A personal routine is a routine that can be executed only by the user who created
150. Workstations9 Generic X Terminal Support Configuration Management for Unsupported Devices Token Ring Network Interface for Altos 5000 Systems Only Interface to the Paradyne ANALYSIS NMS Interface to Bytex U30 and U50 Matrix Switches and to Unity Management System Interface to Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Brouter devices Uniform Alarm Interface to Star amp eeper NMS and ACCUMASTER Integrator File Export of Configuration Information to ACCUMASTER Integrator SNMP Trap Export Interface to IBM s NetView via NetView PC and NetCare Automatic Trouble Reporting Standard and Customized Reports Audit Trail Tool Providing Usage and Security Violation Information Automated Trouble Tracking System with Customization Capabilities Personal System and Alert Driven Routines Command Execution Scheduling Command Results Destination Routing On line Database Backup 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System e Automatic Back Up and Restore User Mail e User Interface Processor UIP e Network Printer Support Modular System Design Modularity in system design enables applications support based on individual customer configurations It also facilitates migration of new product support and management features to the existing customer base User Configurable Ports The user assigned 6800 Series serial ports can support the following peripherals e System printers e Basic works
151. abase to generate alert history reports Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information on report generation Communications Products List of Alerts Table 5 2 is a list of the possible modem alerts and their attributes The table contains the following information DEVICE TYPE AND DESCRIPTION The type of device reporting the alarm ALERT GROUP The alert s assigned alert group ALERT TYPE The alert s abbreviation used within NMS PRIORITY The alert s assigned priority level ALERT S TEXTUAL DISPLAY The alert s textual description which is displayed on the Monitor NOTE COMSPHERE devices can report more alert types than DATAPHONE II devices COMSPHERE devices operating in mixed mode report alerts Health and Status as if they were coming from DATAPHONE II devices Some of the COMSPHERE alerts have DATAPHONE Il equivalents For example tm test mode is both a COMSPHERE and DATAPHONE II alert In this case a COMSPHERE device in mixed mode would correctly report a test mode alert However there are some COMSPHERE alerts which do not have DATAPHONE II equivalents For these cases the device has two ways of handling these alerts 1 The alerts are not reported at all 2 It makes a misleading mapping and as a result reports the wrong alert For example a CCN alert from a COMSPHERE device in mixed mode is reported as being a maintenance mode mm alert 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 17 CO
152. ace either dedicated or dial up e Alarm Interface cut through port for Bytex Unity Management System Optional Cards The optional cards configurable for a 6800 Series NMS system depend on your configuration requirements These cards are briefly described as follows Dedicated IPC 900 Card to Support the ANALYSIS Option The ANALYSIS option provides cut through capability to the 6510 5600 and 5605 ANALYSIS Network Management Systems With this option you can open a cut through session to the ANALYSIS NMS and manage DMC protocol devices If the ANALYSIS software option is installed on a 6800 Series NMS system an ANALYSIS dedicated IPC 900 card is required for interface support This dedicated IPC 900 8 port card uses one serial port on the card to communicate with each ANALYSIS NMS for alert and configuration information transport printer requests and for ANALYSIS NMS cut through access An IPC 1600 card cannot be substituted for the ANALYSIS dedicated IPC 900 card DCP MUXi 8 512 Card to Support ADp and DATAPHONE II Protocol Devices The DCP MUXi 8 512 card provides eight ports The card continuously monitors the network to gather health and status information on the modems and to transmit command requests from the 6800 Series NMS to the modems Each port can support up to 256 control modems Emulex DCP 286i Card to support 3270 Terminal Emulation Option If an NMS configuration includes 3270 Terminal Emulation support the Emulex
153. ace those previously specified in the stored routine This is also true when editing individual commands as part of executing a routine Edit Required fields Indicates whether or not you want to edit the command s input forms for the commands listed Valid entries are yes and no To edit all command input forms enter yes in the all commands field To edit selected commands enter yes in the input field following the command abbreviation The default in all cases is no After you complete all entries on the Routine input form Page 2 subsequent input pages display forms for each command you requested to edit When you finish editing the final command input form the last input page displays the common input fields for specifying results destination and execution scheduling information Populate these fields as necessary and send the routine for execution by selecting Go F2 Routine Notification and Results If you execute a routine manually and specify that the routine results be sent to your queue the system sends you a mail notification when results are placed in the queue If the results are sent to a system or remote printer the user is also notified by mail Editing Deleting Listing or Displaying Routines Other commands associated with routines are as follows Delete Routine dir Deletes a personal routine associated with a specific User ID Display Routine dsr Displays the contents of a specified personal
154. acent device placement is reversed placing the line side adjacent device to the right of the control device and the port side adjacent device to the left side of the control device The terms line side and port side refer to the sides of the device as defined in the device s facility profile s endpoint interface type 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System If there is more than one adjacent device connected to the line side port side they are connected to an icon extender drawn from the line side port side of the device icon The devices on the icon extender are sorted alphabetically by device name Icon extenders are shown in the foreground color and cannot be selected Figure 6 6 is an example of the placement of adjacent devices node 10 node 111 d c d c cable 1 Fdde 1234 3440 12 3440 12 3440 12 491 13240 Figure 6 6 Placement of Adjacent Devices on a Connectivity Map If a device displayed on a Connectivity Map has a configured external restoral device the restoral device is shown connected by a short link Restoral devices on icon extenders are placed below any other devices If the restoral device field in the device profile of a device indicates restoral capabilities an R is placed within the icon If a facility is selected the device in the facility profile specified as device endpoint 1 becomes the selected device If the device endpoint is null devic
155. acility Profile dsfp Displays all existing facility profiles Edit Facility Profile edfp Used to change information in an existing facility profile List Facility Profile sfp Lists facility profiles that meet specified search criteria The output from this command lists summary data for each selected facility Site profiles maintain information on the various sites where your network devices are located Site profile information includes the geographic location for the site specified by telephone city or country codes or by latitude and longitude Use the Create Site Profile crsp command to manually create a site profile The NMS creates site profiles automatically whenever you reference a new site name while creating or editing a device profile An automatically created site profile contains only the site name You must supply the remainder of the information needed for the site profile record using the Edit Site Profile edsp command The unnamed site is the default site within the NMS If you do not assign a site name to a device the device is automatically placed in the unnamed site by the system You cannot delete the profile for the unnamed site refer to Chapter 6 of this manual for a description of unnamed sites and how they are placed on the map However you can edit this site profile to specify a different geographic location for the site 3 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Vendor Prof
156. al IPC 900 Ports card or the optional Emulex DCP 286i card installed e One optional Proteon Token Ring Network Interface Card The Altos System 15000 can be configured with the following ports cards e Three system ports two serial ports and one system printer parallel port e One IPC 1600 Ports card with 16 user defined ports e One optional dedicated IPC 900 ports card for ANALYSIS NMS interface e Two DCP MUXi 8 512 cards for support of up to 16 modem control channels 1 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Figure 1 1 illustrates port usage connections for the base 6800 Series network Figure 1 2 illustrates port usage connections for the 6800 Series network with UIP installed Figure 1 3 shows the port usage connections for the high capacity 6800 Series network The following narratives define port usage in more detail For full information on 6800 Series hardware refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide Ports on the Motherboard IPC 1600 Card The Altos System 5000 has one parallel port dedicated to the system printer two user definable serial ports and keyboard and mouse connections An add on video card provides the connector for the monitor A TCP IP access port is used for connection to the Ethernet network support User configurable ports for the 6800 Series NMS are provided by an IPC 1600 card that is shipped with the system The IPC 1600 card
157. an install these devices at either end of a network containing any compatible DSU These units support both point to point and multipoint configurations and can be used as either a control or a tributary in non network managed networks The 3500 Series DSUs have no network management capabilities except when they are used as tributaries in DATAPHONE 2600 Series networks 1 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs These DSUs are capable of multispeed operations on the DATAPHONE Digital Service network or equivalent Digital Data Services network and can operate as local area datasets limited distance modems An optional integrated V 32 dial backup module DBM enables backup through the public switched telephone network in case of failure of the digital connection The DSU interface to the 6800 Series NMS can be via either control channel connection when directly connected to the 6800 Series NMS or via diagnostic channel connection when remotely connected to the 6800 Series NMS Paradyne APL Modems and DSUs via ANALYSIS Gateway These modems consists of the MPX LSI24 and the 3400 Series high speed DMC protocol APL modems These modems perform at speeds ranging from 1 2 kbps to 19 2 kbps These speeds are accomplished by using a variety of CCITT Paradyne proprietary and Forward Error Correcting FEC modulation schemes as appropriate for the specific model chosen The modems can be controlled by NMS
158. anager command by entering its abbreviation on the command line However if you request a command not applicable to the object chosen the command s input form may not correctly populate with object specific information 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Network Profile Access Device site and facility profiles are network profiles You have access to network profile commands from a Map Manager window opened from the Map To access the Network Profile submenu if an object device icon name site icon name or facility icon name is not selected select the Manager menu item from the Map s Command Menu See Accessing the Manager Task earlier in this section Then select the System Management submenu which displays the Network Profile selection You can also enter any network profile command abbreviation directly on the command line provided When a device site or facility is selected from a geographic or connectivity map the command menu for that object contains the menu item Network Profiles Selection of this menu item opens a Map Manager window This window displays a menu listing the device site or facility profile commands the commands you have access to and applicable to the object selected See Figure 6 13 The device site facility name is automatically populated in the network profile input form fap Manager j ze Profile 2 didp Delete Device Profile 3 ds
159. and MACUs send diagnostic data to ANALYSIS using the DMC protocol Because the addressing conventions of the DMC protocol differ from those of the protocol modes recognized by the 6800 Series NMS the NMS automatically translates ANALYSIS addresses into a link level address format For details about the database transfer process from ANALYSIS to the 6800 Series NMS refer to Chapter 3 Figure D 10 illustrates an ANALYSIS network The addressing conventions for the devices shown in Figure D 10 are discussed in the following sections NODE A NODE B Drop 1 Drop 2 Drop 3 Drop 4 Line 1 Name A Name B Name C Name D Drop 5 Name E ADC 1 NODE G 8 1 1 Drop 1 Drop 2 Name Y ADC 2 8 1 2 Drop 12 a Name 12 Drop 14 Name 14 490 11942 Figure D 10 Sample ANALYSIS Network 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Addressing Conventions for Network Modems In the ANALYSIS network the addressing scheme consists of the line and drop numbers When this information is transferred to the 6800 Series NMS it must be translated by interface software into a link level address For node C the address of modem Y would be 5 2 The new link level address for this device would take the form shown in Figure D 11 a1 5 2 C drop B line A control channel 491 11943a 01 Figure D 11 Typical ANALYSIS Device Link Level Address A This segment is the c
160. and call detail information should be gathered and up to two times in a day can be specified for information to be retrieved You may also selectively specify the set of 3800 Series devices from which call summary and or call detail information should be retrieved by appropriately populating the call statistics fields in each 3800 Series device profile 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 8 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Collecting and Storing Call Statistics Call Processing Initially you must turn on call statistics collection for individual devices via fields in the 3800 Series modem device profiles also you must set up call status information via the Managing Call Statistics mcs command Then an internal NMS process automatically retrieves this information from specified local 3800 Series devices at the user specified times Call statistics are stored based on the entries in the device profile You specify yes no to Collect call summary information or store call detail information Call statistics are stored as follows e fcall statistics are to be collected for 1 to 1000 local 3800 Series devices NMS stores up to 13 months worth of call summary records and up to seven days worth of call detail information e If call statistics are to be collected for 1001 to 2000 local 3800 Series devices NMS stores up to six months worth of call summary records and up to 7 days worth of call detail information
161. and in the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for more information Configuring Map Access to External Systems To configure the NMS to automatically open the appropriate cut through to the management system of an unsupported device bytex brouter or SNMP device when that device is selected from the Map task assign the appropriate External System name to the External System field in the unsupported device s device profile See the Create Device Profile crdp command in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for more information Notes on External Systems Interface to ANALYSIS NMS The 6800 Series NMS provides interface access to the ANALYSIS 6510 5600 and 5605 Network Management Systems The external systems feature provides the capability for a 6800 Series NMS workstation to simulate a workstation connected directly to the ANALYSIS NMS The ANALYSIS NMS manages modems and other network devices such as Data Service Units DSUs and service restoration devices The 6800 Series NMS receives and stores alerts and configuration data from the devices managed by the ANALYSIS NMS and provides alert management functions for those devices such as alert filtering alert storage trouble tickets and management reports Remote printing capabilities are also provided The ANALYSIS NMS network devices are represented on the 6800 Series NMS real time Map Monitor and S
162. are empty A device not directly supported by NMS for purposes of alert notification and network access Specifically unmanaged devices alerts cannot be interpreted by the NMS and the NMS cannot directly access the device s tests and commands without using the cut through software The specification of one s ability to access a command or task Every command and task available on NMS is associated with one of the system defined user groups or access levels A means by which NMS users can be categorized to provide access to those NMS features applicable to their specific job functions An NMS processor providing control for multiple full feature and basic feature workstations In extended networks the direction in which diagnostic messages flow from the final tributary diagnostic modem to the intermediate links to the diagnostic control site 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 GL 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System vendor profile In the 6800 Series NMS a record containing data describing vendor information for the equipment window A workspace in which you interact with a task workstation A user terminal See basic feature workstation and full feature workstation GL 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20
163. ary Tasks When a specific command is selected from a menu item or command line the input form for that command is displayed Where applicable NMS pre populates input fields with object specific information obtained from the object or from the NMS databases See Figure 6 12 F Map Manager no DEUICE TEST Page 1 Devicels Test type os DRTRPHOHE l apli Speed test is executed WW fOATAPHONE I ddd No additional entry required for COMSPHERE apl ddd dds and DRTRPHO HE dds Destination for results crt Schedule execution io f o CirFid euflenu E Haintenu Fill Form 493 14278 Figure 6 12 Network Command Input Form for a Selected Object However you can modify this information as needed If you change a device s name or address and do not subsequently execute the Create Map crnm command the information displayed on the map used for pre population of input forms accessed from the map is not up to date from the 6800 Series NMS databases Therefore tests commands executed with the old device information will not be sent to the correct object correct as defined by the 6800 Series NMS database The user must execute the crnm command close the open Map task and reopen the Map task in order for the updated device information to be used in pre population of command test input forms From the Map Manager window invoked when you select a specific object You can also request any accessible M
164. ask Geographic Map Window The first window to display when you access the Map task is the Geographic Map window This window Figure 6 1 provides an outline of a geographic world map on which site cluster and link icons are automatically placed in the appropriate geographic locations to reflect the actual equipment locations within your network However sites are not required to have installed devices The icons are selectable enabling you to perform various operations available for the specific type of icon type selected refer to Table 6 1 for additional information Refer to Appendix C for graphic illustrations of the icons 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Device Icons Site Icons Nap From crom run Tue Jun 29 14 14 11 19 493 14271 Figure 6 1 Geographic Map NMS places the icons automatically on the map based on the information in the profile device site and facility database The following sections describe the Geographic Map icons the placement of the icons on the Geographic Map and the window icons unique to the Geographic Map Refer to Chapter 2 for information on customization of the system color codes The Commands Menu is then described and the options available from this menu are identified in detail Device Icons are representations of devices on Connectivity Maps A list of device icons is provided in Appendix C Icons You can also v
165. assis and expand it up to 128 channels The channels on the ACCULINK 740 56K 741 56K multiplexer can be terminated on another 74x 56K in a point topoint configuration They also can be terminated on a 740 741 T1 multiplexer when Fractional T1 services are used to provide a bandwidth connection between the 56K and T1 nodes 1 26 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction ACCULINK 745 Switching Multiplexer The 745 multiplexer is an intelligent DSO switching multiplexer that can switch up to 16 T1 links The 745 also provides DS1 connections to Digital Access Cross Connect System DACS Customer Controlled Reconfiguration CCR and digital Private Branch Exchanges PBXs such as the AT amp T System 75 85 The NMS provides alert and cut through support for the following multiplexers Test and commands are not supported DATAPHONE II Series 700 Model 719 72x NETWORKER The 719 72x is a statistical packet switching multiplexer that supports up to 32 independent data channels 18 network links or a combination of channels and links The 719 72x NETWORKER s multilink capability can also be used to provide alternative supervisory data links SDLs DATAPHONE II Series 700 Models 724 735 T1 Multiplexers The 724 735 multiplexers use bit interleaved time division multiplexing to concentrate up to 128 different channels of data voice or compressed video for transmission over 1 544 Mbps T1 facilities The 735 supports over 500 synchronou
166. at are scheduled for future execution The commands available for scheduling queue management are as follows e Delete Scheduled Items disi command e Display Scheduled Items dssi command e List Scheduled Items Issi command Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics Reports For Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics reports you use the Performance Reports task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu You can also access these reports from within the Manager task The same menu shown in Figure 8 2 appears if you select Performance Reports on the Network Control menu in the Manager task NOTE Call Statistics reports are applicable only to COMSPHERE 3800 Series DDD modems 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 8 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Accessing Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics Reports To access the Alert Trending Exceptions and Call Statistics Reports select the Performance Reports task from the 6800 Series NMS Task menu The Performance Reports task menu appears as shown in Figure 8 2 l 1 L1 Performance Reports 1 Alert and Trending Reports 2 Call Statistics 3 Multiplexer Performance Reports enter selection ES ClreFld PrevMenu Mointenu E PrevForm EUN Cancel 493 14285 Figure 8 2 Performance Reports Task Menu All reports commands display input forms for entering selection criteria a
167. at device for that day 8 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Reports Multiplexer Performance Reports The ACCULINK multiplexers have statistics registers that record the performance of a node s hardware T1 facilities and channel groups The statistics registers keep a running count of errors for any specified interval of up to 24 hours When the specified interval expires the registers are cleared and the error count starts again from zero This process applies to all registers except those for the facility performance report These registers are overwritten with new data every 24 hours You can clear the statistical registers on demand by performing a statistical reset Because of these registers you can get an on demand error count from any node or facility by requesting one of the error or performance reports that display the number and type of error that occurred since the last statistical reset For nodes and facilities experiencing recurring problems you can schedule these reports for execution so that they report their results prior to the expiration of the specified performance data reporting interval For Multiplexer Performance reports you use the Performance Reports task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu You can also access these reports from within the Manager task The same submenu as shown in Figure 8 3 appears if you select Performance Reports on the Network Control submenu in the Manager task Accessing Multipl
168. atches the device identification of the selected device Always available Queue Results Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Routines Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Scheduled Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Items Adjacent Device Placement on the Connectivity Map Adjacent devices are those devices known by the system to be immediately connected to a given device i e known to be connected without intervening devices When you display a Connectivity Map for a selected device the placement of the adjacent devices forces the placement of all other connected devices The resulting display ensures that the selected device is shown in the map window You may need to scroll or enlarge resize the window to view any other devices connected to the selected device When a facility connects a device to itself the device is displayed twice to show both ends of the facility The adjacent device placement for tributary devices on the Connectivity Maps depend on the definition of the facility which connects the devices to the selected device In general if the facility is connected to the line side of the selected device the adjacent device is placed to the left of the selected device If the facility is connected to the port side of the selected device the adjacent device is placed to the right of the selected device For control devices the adj
169. b 02 Figure 1 2 6800 Series NMS Showing Configuration of all Ports without UIP Configured 1 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Service Restoration Control Unit VT100 Emulation AT amp T Mail Alert Log Printer or NetView PC la Monitor SNA Host m Keyboard a Mouse 2 E ANALYSIS NMS ACCULINK Multiplexer lt k a iM elf R ARE LES ia hea ACCULINK Multiplexer is lle llall s ALTOS s p Een B Eus Command and Event Interface E EH E SYSTEM
170. bject List windows display textual lists of network devices sites or facilities For both the Geographic or Connectivity Maps the icon and Object Lists relationships are as follows e Object List for a site lists individual devices facilities located at that site e Object List for a cluster icon lists individual sites composing the cluster site e Object List for a link cluster icon lists individual facilities composing the link cluster e Object list for an individual device lists its child devices as defined in those device profiles Based on how your NMS network is configured opening an Object List selection can provide another Object List selection from the resulting submenu Selecting this Object List selection can then lead to device specific information For example if devices are grouped into sites and multiple sites are clustered selecting the cluster icon and opening its Object List provides a list of all sites in that cluster If you select a site and open its Object List you are provided with a list of all devices or facilities by device or facility name grouped into that site At the device or facility level in an Object List you can select a device and open a Connectivity Map Refer to Table 6 2 for a list of function selections based on icon selection You can establish a parent child relationship between devices via the parent device field in a device s profile You enter the parent s device address or device name in this
171. can be stored into any one results queue Online Database Backup NMS allows you to backup your database without shutting the system down This feature enables you to continually maintain a current backup of your NMS database without disrupting network operation Loss of database information is possible due to locked database tables during backup Automatic Database Backup and Restore The Automatic Database Backup Restore feature provides the user with the ability to backup and or restore automatically all the INFORMIX database files and other NMS files and directories on a scheduled frequency date day of the week and or time of day This feature provides the capability for maintaining up to three hot spare systems ready to run at short notice Once the user sets up the schedule all files that are needed to restart a fully functioning NMS will be transferred from a specified NMS host to a separate destination NMS host processor Restoring all the backed up files will occur according to the user s established schedule with a minimum of intervention User Mail The 6800 Series NMS provides a user mail facility for reading sending and receiving messages among NMS users The NMS also uses this facility to broadcast messages to its users User Interface Processor UIP The 6800 Series UIP package consists of a single Altos System 5000 processor This package enables you to add additional full feature workstations to your NMS configuratio
172. cated The control channel identification can be a number from 1 to 8 B This segment is the control device s local address There can be up to 256 addresses on a single control channel The local address of the 3600 Series DSU is derived from its network address The network address is determined by the physical location of the device and the slot number with the carrier NOTE In DATAPHONE II addressing local addresses range from 11 to 328 The values 0 and 9 are not permissible for the last digit The 3600 Series DSU stores its own network address internally and calculates its own local address directly from the network address when the DSU is at the head of a DATAPHONE II diagnostic tree C This segment is a port address For COMSPHERE devices in DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode this is a dummy address that always bears the value of 1 A null port address is permissible and is defined as 1 NOTE Because 3600 Series DSUs do not use a port address in their link level addresses a default port address can be assumed by the NMS only when the address is clearly a DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode address The NMS identifies the address as such only when the local address is in the range of 257 to 328 which is an illegal range in Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode D This segment represents the network address of any device on the secondary or diagnostic channel Tributary devices on a multipoint
173. ce and inventory control When a new NMS is first installed 90 null empty workstation records are automatically provided by the NMS see the Edit Workstation Configurations edwc command in the next section enabling the System Administrator to complete workstation configuration records for each workstation that is configured on the NMS Use the Display Workstation Configurations dswc command to display the workstation configuration records Updating Workstation Configuration Records Workstation records are updated and maintained via the Edit Workstation Configurations edwc command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for details on executing the Edit Workstation Configurations edwc command 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 4 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Backup and Restoring the System Database NMS provides manual backup and restore procedures for saving the system database These procedures are described in this chapter NMS users also have the automatic backup and restore feature This feature enables a user to schedule backup and restore tasks to maintain up to three hot spare systems that can be ready to run on short notice This chapter provides a description of the Automatic Backup and Restore feature Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Core Command Reference Manual for a description of these commands Automatic Backup and Restore
174. ch alert type s or alert group s are to display and you can specify what alert priority levels should display Each time you subsequently access the Map or the Monitor tasks the selection criteria you establish here is used by the system to initialize the displays You see only those alerts matching your specified criteria on your Map and Monitor appears Alert Processing Alert management enables NMS to process alerts online and to take the appropriate action to restore operations An alert can be classified as a failure of diagnostic routines a condition not normal for operation or as a message from the network to the NMS Alerts can be received from the following devices DATAPHONE II APL modems DATAPHONE II DDS Data Service Units DSUs DATAPHONE II DDD Shared Diagnostic Units SDUs COMSPHERE Devices APL DSU DDD modems ANALYSIS NMS supported Devices 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Device Alerts e 719 NETWORKER e DATAPHONEII 735 multiplexers e ACCULINK 731 740 741 742 745 and 74x 56K multiplexers e Service Restoration Control Units e Bytex Unity Management System UMS Bytex U30 and U50 switches e Analog Bridges e Dial Backup Units e SNMP brouter devices The 6800 Series NMS can monitor device health and status of the modem and multiplexer control channels display the health and status of devices report alerts to a technical support group track th
175. chedule From Create Channel Group crcg Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Create Device Profile crdp Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Monitor Create Export File cref Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Create Facility Profile cr p Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Create Logical Link cril Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Create Network Map crnm Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Create Routine crr All Levels No Yes Manager Create Site Profile crsp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Create User Profile crup Administrator No Yes Manager Create Vendor Profile crvp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Daily Historical dhu All Levels Yes Yes Trouble Utilization Inventory Reports DDS Channel ddscps All Levels Yes Yes Manager Performance and Status DDS Channel Trouble ddsctc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Codes DDS Signaling Test ddsst Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator T Delete Audit Trail dlat Administrator Yes Yes Manager Delete Audit History dlah Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Monitor Delete Channel Group dlcg Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Delete Device Profile dldp Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Monitor Delete Export File dlef Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Indicates what is shown on the screen T Indicates that this is a new command for this release
176. circuit are restricted to network addresses in the range 1 to 256 for 3400 4400 Series modems and 1 80 for 3600 Series DSUs DATAPHONE II Mode SRCU Addressing The Service Restoration Control Unit SRCU is a peer device to the 4400 Series APL modems As such standard link level addressing applies to the SRCU as described in the DATAPHONE II Mode APL and DDS Addressing section In DATAPHONE II protocol mode the SRCU is controlled over an upstream device s diagnostic channel and has a network address ranging from 1 to 80 D 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing DATAPHONE II Extended Polling and Addressing In the DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode the 6800 Series NMS supports real time fault monitoring for up to 50 extended DATAPHONE II network devices on each control channel Extended network devices are control and tributary modems in point to point or multipoint circuits that are connected beyond the first tributary device of a point to point circuit Extended polling provides diagnostic monitoring one layer deeper into your network For example without extended polling in a point to point configuration a chain of three modem pairs can normally be monitored over the diagnostic channel by having each tributary device poll its downstream control device and each control device poll its downstream tributaries By changing options in the last tributary modem of the third pair and configuring the next control modem in
177. cking Trouble Tracking Reports You can use the following commands to generate reports in the Trouble Tracking task e ATR Report attr command to obtain a summary of the calls made to the service center for Automatic Trouble Reports ATRs that automatically generated trouble tickets e Detailed Trouble Ticket Report dttr command to obtain a detailed listing of trouble tickets which match a set of user defined criteria See the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for additional information on these commands Automatic Trouble Reporting The Automatic Trouble Reporting ATR system is a feature of the 6800 Series NMS that automatically reports alert information in the form of an ATR when the automated action filter value is exceeded An ATR report is sent to one or more user specified destinations ATR Process within NMS When an alert passes the processing filter and is not cleared by the time it passes the automated action filter NMS checks the ATR states for the control channel to determine whether or not the ATR feature is enabled e Ifthe control channel s ATR state is on NMS automatically calls the ATR phone number s and sends the ATR s e If the control channel s ATR state is off NMS does not send an ATR regardless of the device profile authorization If the ATR is enabled then NMS checks the device s device profile for ATR authorization If the ATR authorization is
178. columns ALERT TYPE NMS are the types as they are referenced on the 6800 Items under the columns ALERT TYPE ENHANCED are the types as they are sent to a destination system using Enhanced UAI Items under the columns FAULT TYPE BASIC are the two letter abbreviated alert types into which 6800 alerts are mapped and sent when basic UAI is used Table G 3 NMS Alert Type to UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping Alert Type NMS Alert Type Enhanced Fault Type Basic bytex switch p1 swthp1 HW bytex switch p2 swthp2 HW bytex switch p3 swthp3 HW sftw err p1 swerrp1 MM sftw err p2 swerrp2 MM sftw err p3 swerrp3 MM msg corruption msg cor HW biem link up bmup MM biem link down bmdown MM biem unk event bmevent MM January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Uniform Alarm Interface Table G 4 lists the 6800 alert type mappings for both Basic UAI and Enhanced UAI as they relate to alerts received from the SNMP Manager system Items under the column ALERT TYPE NMS are the types as they are referenced on the 6800 Items under the column ALERT TYPE ENHANCED are the types as they are sent to a destination system using Enhanced UAI Items under the column FAULT TYPE BASIC are the two letter abbreviated alert types into which the 6800 alerts are mapped and sent when Basic UAI is used Table G 4 NMS Alert to UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping For the SNMP Manager Alert Type NMS Alert Type Enhanced Fault Type Bas
179. command refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 G 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 2 Configure the NMS UAI port by executing the Edit Port Configuration edpc command as follows e Make an entry for this port in the NMS port configuration table e Set the UAI port s state to enabled For more information about this command refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual Turn on UAI authorization for each device for which alert information is to be sent across the UAI connection UAI is authorized for a device by executing the Edit Device Profile eddp command as follows e Enter on in the UAI authorization field of the device s profile For more information about this command refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual Setthe uniform alarm filter parameters by executing the Edit UAI Filter eduaf command For each alert group device type combination set the filter to the desired amount of time that the alert must be active before the NMS will send alert information to a receiving system across the UAI connection For more information about this command refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual NOTE If any parameters specified in the Edit Uniform Alarm Interface e
180. companies this acronym stands for DATAPHONE Digital Service More commonly it is used for Digital Data Service A 64 kbps digital telecommunications signal or channel A digital signal transmitted at the rate of 1 544 Mbps In extended networks the direction in which diagnostic messages flow from the diagnostic control site to any intermediate links and then to the final tributary modem The integral 4 wire APL dial backup module for remote site housings that automatically answers two incoming calls and switches the modem s voice frequency connection from leased to dial telephone lines A signaling method using two voice frequencies to designate the tones used for touch tone dialing as distinguished from pulse dialing A form of buffering between collocated data communications devices in complex networks required to maintain timing synchronization for data transmission in the entire network Within a network an occurrence of interest that is reported via an event message A printer connected to the Network Administration Port on the ACCULINK 740 and 745 multiplexers used to print messages of real time events from a node s event log The physical connection of two devices without any intervening devices e g a T1 facility which can connect two multiplexers In the 6800 Series NMS a record containing data that describes the connections and facilities that connect the devices in the network A dedicated data communicat
181. configuration support requirements Table 1 3 Optional Software Hardware Packages Software Package Supported Tasks Devices SNA 3270 Emulation Package 3270 Terminal Emulation INFORMIX SQL Software INFORMIXe Task under Utilities Customized database option software INFORMIX 4GL Software UNIX SVR 3 2 Development Software Customized database reports Customized Trouble Tickets NVI Software IBM NetView Interface NVI also requires IBM software NMS Upgrade Option Software Upgrade of NMS configuration 6800 Series SNMP Trap Export Software Sends SNMP Traps to HP OpenView 6800 Series NMS 16 Control Channel Support Adds 8 control channel support System 5000 only Token Ring Network Interface Package Switches LAN from Ethernet to Token Ring for Altos 5000 Systems only Description of Devices Supported by NMS The types of devices that can be managed by NMS are briefly described in this section NMS Supported APL Modems NMS supports the following APL modems COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Modems These modems consist of 4 8 kbps point to point and multipoint modems 14 4 9 6 kbps multipoint modems and 19 2 14 4 kbps point to point modems They are capable of full duplex synchronous data transmission over analog private lines APL These modems incorporate the VLSI Very Large Scale Integration design with new generation architecture referred to as Universal Signal
182. confirmer boxes which provide information messages For most confirmer boxes you can either Continue or Cancel the command after reading the message You can use the mouse to click on the appropriate response Note that some confirmer messages have only an OK button For these confirmer boxes you can click on the OK with the mouse to confirm and continue or you can use the F8 Cancel button to cancel the command For basic feature workstations you can use the left and right arrow keys when a selection is available then press Enter to execute the selection Figure 2 34 shows an example of a confirmer box m Manager oo COMMAND NAME Fage 1 Channel group jte ml Endpoint modes nnn nnn Capacity Restricted to network compatible no There are connected channel groups on the logical link and or the logical link is currently connected All connections will be automatically broken if you continue with this command s zl 493 14266 Figure 2 34 Sample Input Form with Confirmer Box 2 52 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Results Forms You can have multiple results forms depending on the command selected The final results form ends with the message END OF RESULTS Figure 2 35 shows an example of a results form Map Manager RESULTS DISPLAY ALERT MONITORING STATE Page 1 Control Channel Alert Monitoring State Timeout Interval Sec m2 polling amp asynch reporting n a
183. connected directly to an external system allowing management of the SNMP brouter devices For more information on this cut through access refer to Appendix I 3 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Notes on External Systems Interface to Hosts Through Telnet The 6800 Series NMS provides telnet cut through access to any hosts if the hosts support the telnet mechanism and they are on the same TCP IP network to the 6800 host Note that the cut through feature is through an X window session and is only available via a full feature workstation Perform the following steps to configure the 6800 Series NMS NOTE The following steps must be performed with the NMS application running 1 Execute the Edit External System Configuration edesc command The input form appears 2 Using the following information fill in the edesc input form TYPE cut through logical name to be assigned as the external system name TYPE telnet in the Type field TYPE 0 in the Port group field The default is 0 TYPE host name IP address Leave the task name and parameter name blank Grant permission to NMS users to cut through to the host by executing the Edit User Profile edup command or the Create Device Profile crdp command Access to an external system can be granted to a user by specifying the name of the external system or the keyword all in the External Systems field on the user profile form For related
184. creen prints from a full feature workstation to the SC system printers are not supported System controller local copy printers can be reused as 6800 local copy printers for basic feature workstations Release 1 X to 6800 Series NMS When you migrate the database from Release 1 X NMS to the Release 4 0 6800 Series NMS all device profile and historical alarm information is transferred to the appropriate databases Facility profiles are automatically generated for multiplexers based on device profile link profile and node connectivity information Site profiles are automatically created based on site name and location information in the earlier device profiles Channel group tables are also transferred However trouble tickets and routines are not transferred The following hardware components can be migrated e System printers and fault alert log printers can be converted for re use e The host processor can be converted for use as a full feature workstation e Any 6386 full feature workstation can be updated with Release 4 0 NMS software and then connected to the Ethernet LAN for use in Release 4 0 NMS e Any PC based basic feature workstation can be re used as a basic feature workstation for Release 4 0 Release 2 0 to 6800 Series NMS When you migrate the database from Release 2 0 6820 NMS to Release 4 0 6800 Series NMS all device profiles site profiles facility profiles vendor profiles historical alerts trouble tickets user profi
185. cute the Create Export File command or make any further changes in device facility or site profiles until the file is sent and received by the AMI Otherwise the changes that were logged in the lost update file will be overwritten and cannot be recovered unless you create and send a new base file Troubleshooting and Miscellaneous Notes If the file export connection is down when the Send Export File snef command is executed export files will be queued at the NMS by the uucp function When the connection is re established all export files which have been queued will be sent sequentially This behavior does not cause problems when sending base files however if multiple update files are queued the latest file will overwrite any previous files when the files are finally sent to the AMI Consequently only the changes contained in the last update file written will be retained all others will be lost Therefore it is important to verify that each file sent by the NMS is received by the AMI If you are using device name mapping you cannot create a device profile for a device with a link level address longer than 21 characters 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 H 7 6800 Series NMS X Window Cut Through OVeryview euscbuwsktiupeeieustsitnUelesRI NBeseRl sSel Uis I 1 Cut Through Session Restrictions 0 0 ccc eee eee eee ee I Network Configuration 6800 Series NMS Host and UIP I 1 Network Configuration 6
186. d dot An example of a valid facility name is as follows fac t1 ny chi or fac 211to212 fac all and fac none are not valid facility names E 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Naming Conventions Device Names for Addressing Mnemonic names provide another way of addressing a device and can be used as input to the Device s field They are defined in a device s device profile in its Device name field Serial Numbers Site Names Mnemonic names are unique and are made up of a string of 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters All 26 alphabetic characters a z the digits 0 through 9 and the special characters dash and dot are allowed The only restrictions are that the name may not be the keywords all default or none and may not begin with any of the following series of special prefixes For example net cir ser fac cg grp nyc atm1 det resv2 det resv2 nyc Serial numbers are another way to address a device and can be used on input forms in the Device s field to identify a device Serial numbers must be unique to a device Devices can have serial numbers that you assign or which are returned by the device Serial numbers can contain up to 13 characters They can consist of alphanumeric characters and the special characters dash and dot To address a device using serial numbers prefix the number by ser Site names are user defined A site name can contain alphanumeric and any special cha
187. d 02 25 91 08 4 7T45 50 02 245 fr 100s Control Mode Entered atby L 245 hit return to continue gt J E 493 14270 Figure 5 3 Sample of Printed Event Messages The COMSPHERE 3400 4400 APL modems include a message directory that can accommodate up to five 40 character alphanumeric text messages Default messages are provided within the device firmware From the 6800 Series NMS messages are displayed and changed using the Display Canned Messages dscm command and the Change Canned Message chcm command When received by the NMS these modem messages are treated as events They are associated with the alert group apl cnnd msg and are of the MESSAGE alert type This alert type is reported when an asynchronous canned message is sent to the NMS from a 3400 4400 Series modem The alert text associated with the alert type is the modem message as received from the device The Monitor and Map provide both visual and audible indications of when the event is received All alert management and display features apply to these modem events Bytex Switch Events While alerts from the Bytex switch report some trouble conditions they are handled as NMS events The user must take some action to clear and acknowledge these events as they will not clear automatically For more information see Clearing Events later on in this chapter SNMP Device Brouter Events SNMP device brouter events are SNMP traps alerts sent from brouter devices an
188. d This key is automatically placed in the correct state when the workstation is started If after workstation start up Num Lock is toggled Off window control functions like iconify resize and close will be suspended until Num Lock is toggled on again The Screen input operations are not affected by the Num Lock setting Terminology for Mouse Use The following terms are used throughout the descriptions of mouse operations dragging Pressing and holding down the left button and then pulling the mouse over a flat surface without lifting it Typically you use this operation to move or resize a window or to zoom in on a particular area of the Geographic Map The phrase drag the mouse implies this activity pointing Moving the mouse to position the cursor at a specific point on the screen The phrase point the mouse implies this activity click Quickly pressing and then releasing the left mouse button The phrase click on an option icon etc implies this activity double click Quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice The phrase double click on an icon etc for example double clicking on the down arrow key on a basic feature workstation window frame implies this activity For additional information on using a mouse refer to your mouse User s Manual 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Basic Feature Workstation Windows
189. d you must use the Change Protocol Mode chpm command to adjust the value of the System polling field If executing the chpm command and the System polling field value is changed from extended poll to no poll for a device you may have to add that device to its upstream device s polling list to have that device included in the normal polling process You can turn the NMS polling function for each control channel on or off via the Edit Alert Monitoring State edams command This command enables you to turn the polling process on or off for each of the control channels being polled and enables you to set the response time out interval for each control channel The time out value is specified in seconds to indicate the time interval that the NMS will wait to receive a response from a polled device on the specified control channel If the time interval elapses without a response from the polled control device on the control channel the NMS then returns a no response NR alert for the device and moves on to the next sequential control device on the channel to which the NMS has access Polling Multiplexers The polling of multiplexers by the NMS is a similar process except each multiplexer in the network is polled individually by the NMS You cannot acquire all multiplexers for the NMS poll list with the Acquire Modem Control Channel Polling List acmccpl command The system polling field in each multiplexer device profile is used to add remove a multipl
190. d in braces when specified as part of the message When the message is received by the other network management system the alarm text message will be expanded with the numbers variables replaced with the actual alert device or network information Table G 1 list defines the number mapping that is used when specifying variables in the alarm text message 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 G 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table G 1 Number Mapping Number Parameter Value 0 NMS Type PARADYNE if using basic version of UAI COM6800 if using enhanced version of UAI 1 NMS Id Serial of the NMS software 2 Alert Type Alert type e g NR FA reported 3 Device Type Device Type Device type eg apl ddd of the reporting device 4 reserved reserved 5 reserved reserved 6 Priority MAJOR for a priority 1 alert MINOR for a priority 2 alert WARNING for a priority 3 alert 7 Device Address Link level address of the reporting device 8 Device Name Mnemonic name of the reporting device 9 Network Name net xxxx where xxxx is the assigned network name 10 Circuit Name cir Xxxx where xxxx is the assigned circuit name sent if using the Facility Name basic version of UAI fac xxxx where xxxx is the assigned facility name sent if using the enhanced version of UAI If facility name cannot be determined unam biguously Device Name 8 w
191. d other SNMP devices to a COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS residing on the same Ethernet local area network LAN Traps forwarded to the 6800 Series NMS are treated as events by the NMS s alert subsystem all advertised filtering and display capabilities are applicable to brouter and SNMP events 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Acknowledging Alerts Alarms and Events NMS allows you to acknowledge an alert displayed on the Monitor Acknowledgment of an alert turns off the audible and changes the visual color indications for that alert If there are other active Monitor or Map sessions in the system displaying the alert the audible and visual indications for the acknowledge alert are turned off on those displays also You can acknowledge an alert manually or automatically by the NMS e To manually acknowledge an alert you must be in either the Map task or in the Monitor task You click on the unacknowledged alert and from the subsequent command menu s pop up menu click on the Acknowledge alert option On the Monitor the option is Acknowledge Alert in the Map task Acknowledge Alert is in a submenu under the selection Alert Management When using the Monitor task on a basic feature workstation move the arrow keys and press Enter to select the option e To have NMS automatically acknowledge an alert you can set the time out period for the alert in the Acknowledgement timeout field
192. d site name are displayed next to each device icon on the Connectivity Map refer back to Figure 6 5 The device name is shown centered above the associated icon For non restoral devices the site name is placed below the device name Facility names are displayed above each simple link representing a non restoral facility on the map Interface ID and slot ID are displayed at each end of the facility if any If there is a redundant interface defined its interface ID and slot ID are placed below the primary interface and slot IDs If the link represents more than one facility between two devices no textual information is shown However the link can be selected and a facility object list can be opened Connectivity Help Window The Connectivity Map Help window can be selected by typing ESC The Help window displays all available device icon types Network Test and Command Access The map provides access to NMS supported network tests and commands for devices directly managed by the 6800 Series NMS Network tests commands are accessible from the Geographic Map and from Connectivity Maps 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Network Test Access Click on the Commands button on the lower left corner of the Map task screen The menu that appears provides the selection item Manager See Figure 6 7 LE Stokya X ede Commands Bn a S le KON EN OR Wi den Qu Sub
193. d start with log number x Where x a log number To continue TYPE n PRESS Enter The Archive menu appears ARCHIVE Create Restore Tape Parameters Exit Restore dbspaces from tape to disk Select Exit in order to return to the INFORMIX ONLINE menu TYPE e The INFORMIX ONLINE menu appears INFORMIX OnLine Archive Logical Logs Exit Select Exit from the INFORMIX ONLINE menu TYPE e The following message appears Restoring any printer remote terminal or atr ports Now bring INFORMIX ONLINE system on line INFORMIX ONLINE is currently off line INFORMIX ONLINE daemon restarted Press RETURN to continue Toreturn to the 6800 NMS Menu TYPE 11 PRESS Enter Wait until the light on the tape drive goes off then remove the tape from the tape drive This completes the procedure for system database restoral NOTE After restoring the system database run the Create Network Map crnm command to update the Map display 4 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing OVERVIEW aosi vutqui eum uel nsspcNrydebiesISUESSRl 5 1 Filter Administration seeeeeeee IA 5 2 NMS Filter Processing Flow 0 0c cece eee eee 5 2 Filtering Exceptions acean a ee yey acne AERE aA Ss 5 2 Filter Types oou este bns On ele EO DENS SEE RAS 5 4 Processing Filteri eec recrea me ep RR perse 5 4 Display Filter ori 2 vAzpIlewee fte WR Wese
194. d with the actual alert device or network information The number mapping used when specifying variables in the clear text message is the same mapping as used for the alarm text message see the previous number parameter list The default clear text message is cleared alert 2 time 12 device 7 circuit 10 NOTE The maximum length of the expanded clear text message is 160 characters If the expanded message exceeds this length the message will be truncated at 160 characters If the basic version of UAI is used the parameters 2 7 10 and 12 MUST be included in the clear text message in order for the alert information to be properly handled by the receiving network management system Basic UAI and Enhanced UAI In configuring the NMS Uniform Alarm Interface feature the NMS user can specify whether the NMS should use basic UAI or enhanced UAI This is done by specifying either basic or enhanced in the Alert reporting option field of the Edit Uniform Alarm Interface eduai command With the enhanced version of UAI the NMS will send any and all of its defined alert types as they are known by the NMS With the basic version of UAI the NMS first maps each alert type into one of twenty five alarm types before transporting the alert information to the receiving system NOTE If the receiving network management system is Release 2 or later of the ACCUMASTER Integrator or Release 3 or later of the StarKeeper NM
195. dcard is used to specify multiple devices and you want to eliminate some of the devices specified The exclamation mark may be placed only at the beginning of a device naming group The exception character can only be used within the following fields e Device address e Network name e Circuit name e Facility name e Device name e Serial number e P address You may want to address a group of devices by using the network name address If the network link is defined in such a way that there are more devices on that link than you want to address then the exception character could be used to eliminate the unwanted devices from the particular address command For example 1 80 11 2 43 80 implies that the command is to be sent to all devices on control channel 1 with a final network address of 80 except for device 1 2 43 80 The exception character takes precedence over any other set of addresses given Therefore if you were to enter the following set of addresses 1 12 31 8 52 1 12 31 11 12 31 8 NMS would translate to the following 1 12 31 11 12 31 8 ignoring the first device address entered as it was negated by the third set of addresses by use of the exception character When the exception character is used NMS removes the devices identified with the from all other non excepted devices you listed If there are no non excepted devices NMS considers the desired set to be all and returns all device records but those
196. dems Supported 2048 2048 2048 Number of 740 745 Multiplexers Supported 249 249 249 Channel Groups 10 000 10 000 10 000 Logical Links 19 000 19 000 19 000 Number of 6510 Systems Managed 6 6 6 Trouble Records 10 000 10 000 10 000 Active Alert Records 10 180 10 180 10 180 Historical Alerts Records 25 000 25 000 75 000 Total Number of Assignable Ports 19 35 35 1 Requires two UIPs in the System Configuration capacities 2 An additional Emulex DCP MUX I card is required in the Altos 5000 host 3 The device profiles allowed for ACCULINK 740 745 multiplexers 3800 Series modems brouter SNMP devices and 6510 managed devices are included in the number of device profiles supported 4 Printer and cut through Session capacities are those supported by the 6800 Series software If you have the base system configuration you may not have the physical ports to support the printer external system 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 1 1 2 of 2 6800 Series NMS System Capacities Altos 5000 Altos 5000 Host Only Host W UIP Altos 15000 Feature System System System Capacit Capacity Capacity paety Direct Connect System Printers Networked System Printers 15 15 15 Scheduled Items Manager Task 998 998 998 Trouble Inventory Reports Task 150 150 150 Trouble Tracking Task 150 150 150 Queue Results User Subsystem 50 50 50 Simultaneous
197. devices specify the cut through logical name entered in Step 2 in the External System field on the device profile form This will allow cut through from the 6800 Series NMS network map Notes on External Systems Interface to SRCU The 6800 Series NMS provides cut through access to device tests and commands available at the 4400 Series SRCU ASCII terminal You can open a separate window to a terminal emulation session connecting the NMS directly to the ASCII terminal interface of the SRCU All tests and commands available at this terminal are available through the NMS For each AB DBU and SRCU you should indicate the logical external system name in the device profiles for these devices Once this data is available to NMS terminal emulation sessions to the appropriate ASCII terminal can be automatically initiated from the External Systems task or the Map task 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Notes on External Systems Interface to 850 DCX Multiplexer Connection To establish an external system connection to an 850 DCX multiplexer the port on the multiplexer side must be configured for connection termination See your DCX manual for additional details When connected to an 850 DCX in monitor mode the connection is dropped if no activity is sensed in 30 seconds in update mode the time frame is 30 minutes Notes on External Systems Interface to 700 Series Multiplexers Cut through acces
198. dify the filter values associated with each defined alert group for a specified device type or you can specify that exceptional filter values be used for individual devices or individual device groups You can change the UAI filter values via the Edit Uniform Alarm Filter eduaf command You can display the UAI filter values using the Display Uniform Alarm Filter dsuaf command Customizing Alert Attributes and Criteria The user selection criteria allows per user customization of Map and Monitor alert displays A user s Map displays only those alerts as follows 1 The alerts which pass the display filter 2 The alerts from device groups for which the user has been given Map Monitor access 3 The alerts which are specified as part of the selection criteria Map in the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc 4 The alerts which are specified as part of the selection criteria Alerts in the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc A user s Monitor displays only those alerts as follows 1 The alerts from device groups for which the user has been given Map Monitor access 2 The alerts which are specified as part of the selection criteria Map in the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc The System Administrator can customize the alert attributes by editing the visual and audible alert attributes of all alert groups associated with a specified device type via the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command The System Administrator
199. dp Display Device Profile 4 eddp Edit Device Profile 5 ledp List Device Profile enter selection aS io MES Preuflenu gj Maintenu li PrevForm Cancel i 493 14279 Figure 6 13 Network Profile Submenu for Selected Device 6 28 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks EE EM CleFld Q Prevtenu Maintenu FillForm MECTRE When you select a network profile command NMS displays the command s input form Where applicable NMS pre populates input fields with object specific information obtained from the selected object or from NMS databases See Figure 6 14 B Nap Manager BD DISPLAY DEUICE PROFILE Page 1 Device classification BE Z oO o UT IE Destination for results nt Schedule execution Cancel E 493 14280 Figure 6 14 Network Profile Input for Selected Object 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 29 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Routine Scheduled Item Queue Results Access You can access commands for routine scheduled items and queue results administration from the Map task You enter the command abbreviation on the command line of any Manager window invoked from the map or select the appropriate menu item Routines Scheduled Items or Queue Results from a selected object s command menu Figure 6 15 illustrates the submenus displayed when you select Routines Scheduled Items or Queue Results menu it
200. ds on the particular external systems your login ID has given you permission to access assuming those external systems interfaces are not currently being used To add or remove external system permissions use the Edit User Profile edup command You access external systems from the Map task by selecting a device icon from a Connectivity Map or from an object list Then you select the Network Control menu selection from its command menu If you had specified an external system for that device in the device s profile NMS attempts a cut through session For devices managed directly by the 6800 Series NMS the Network Control option displays a Manager window You are then under the control of the selected external system s environment 3 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Terminating External Systems Connections When finished with an external systems interface logout of the far end external system system If the far end system does not drop the line press tilde and dot This closes the connection on the local end then closes the external systems window On full feature workstations you can also kill the process by closing the window selecting Close from the Window menu Configuring the NMS for External Systems Interface External systems interfaces are configured by executing the Edit Port Configuration edpc command to configure the external system port s and then creating external system records to assi
201. duai command are changed after the UAI port is installed via the Edit Port Configurations edpc command you must do the following to make the change take effect 1 Remove the UAI port information from the port configuration table To do this execute the Edit Port Configurations edpc command changing the Application field from uai to none 2 Re execute the Edit Port Configurations edpc command changing the Application field back to uai and respecifying the other port parameters related to the uai entry January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Uniform Alarm Interface Transmission of Alert Information A receiving SK or AMI can log into the NMS UAI port when this port is enabled When the receiving system is successfully logged into the NMS the NMS will send alert and optionally alert clear information to the receiving system During times when there is no alert information to transmit the NMS will periodically send an Pm alive message to the receiving system to indicate that the connection is still active even though no alert information is being transferred If the message is not received by the receiving system within the time expected the receiving system will drop the connection and attempt to login to the UAI port again The time interval at which the NMS sends an I m alive message is specified in the Edit Uniform Alarm Interface eduai command The interval must be coordinated with the receiving network manageme
202. dynamic alert status The Monitor task provides a dynamic textual list of active alerts The Summary task is a non interactive display which provides dynamic counts of active alerts These tasks are described in Chapter 6 of this manual External Systems The External Systems task provides cut through access to other systems such as ANALYSIS NMS Information on this task is provided in Chapter 3 Performance Reports The Performance Reports task provides access to alert and trending reports call statistics and multiplexer performance reports This window provides the same functionality as the Manager window the only difference is that the initial menu display is the Performance Reports submenu Chapter 8 of this manual provides information on generating reports as well as examples Descriptions of the actual reports input and results forms are provided in their device related reference manuals as follows e Descriptions of the commands used to generate the Alert and Trending Reports and the Call Statistics Reports are provided in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual e Descriptions of the commands used to generate Multiplexer Performance Reports are provided in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Command Reference Manual Trouble Inventory Reports The Trouble Inventory Reports task is used to generate Alert History Inventory and Troubl
203. e DATAPHONE II Level 4 System Controller Notes on External Systems Interface to 3270 Refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System 3270 Terminal Emulation Option Manual Notes on External Systems Interface to VT100 To connect to any system supporting VT100 compatible interface specify vt100 in the type field of the Edit External System Configuration edesc command input form VT100 support is limited to the full feature workstation 3 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Notes on External Systems Interface to ANSI compatible Terminals The 6800 Series NMS will support cut through to ANSI X3 64 standard compatible terminals To connect to any ANSI compatible interface specify the terminal type as listed in the terminfo database in the Task name or Terminal type field of the Edit External System Configuration edesc command input form Multiplexer Configuration If you have multiplexers installed in your NMS network you must configure the multiplexers before NMS can interact with the devices Multiplexer support is an NMS software application package option Since some customers may not have multiplexers in their network configuration all information on configuring and managing multiplexers is provided in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide Modem Data Service Unit DSU and Service Restoration Control Unit SRCU with Associated Ana
204. e Tracking Reports Chapter 8 in this manual provides information for generating these reports as well as examples Descriptions of the actual reports input and results forms are provided in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual 2 32 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Trouble Tracking The Trouble Tracking task is used to report and manage network problems through trouble ticketing The commands available from this task are used to create delete display and edit trouble tickets Chapter 7 in this manual provides information on this task Descriptions of the commands for Trouble Tracking are provided in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual Utilities The Utilities task provides access to UNIX INFORMIX mail NMS user printer functions and multiplexer utilities Chapter 9 provides information on using this task Opening Task Windows Open Task windows by selecting a task name from a task menu Full feature workstation users open a task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu by clicking on the task name with the left mouse button Basic feature workstation users can enter the number of the selection in the Enter selection field and then press the Enter key Optionally basic feature workstation users can use the up down arrow keys to highlight a task selection on the screen Then invoke the task by pressing the Enter key NMS Men
205. e address of the downstream device 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 GL 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System mnemonic addressing modem modem sharing device MSD Multidrop Auto Call Unit MACU multiplex multiplexer multipoint circuit NetCare NVI network network address Network Administration Port NAP network data network delay The identification of system components by a customer defined easy to remember alphanumeric name e g nycl A device that converts signals for transmission modulator and receives signals for delivery demodulator The device that allows multiple terminals to share one modem thereby reducing the number of modems and transmission lines required An ANALYSIS controlled device that permits sharing of dial backup units among 3400 Model 1 APL modems To combine many low speed data sources into a single high speed serial data stream The data is coded at transmission and decoded at reception Some multiplexing techniques include Frequency Division Multiplexing FDM Time Division Multiplexing TDM and Statistical Multiplexing Stat MUX The device used to combine a number of individual channels into a common bit stream for transmission A special type of circuit where one control device communicates in a broadcast mode with one or more tributary devices Communication from a tributary device is always directly to the control device and not to an
206. e backup of any circuit link that has a collocated device as needed It is shared among many devices and circuits A circuit card that plugs into a dedicated slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier to provide the shared diagnostic control panel and network management interfaces to the modems and DSUs in the carrier It translates the network management protocol to the devices in the carrier and routes incoming messages to the appropriate devices In the 6800 Series NMS a record containing data describing the physical location of network devices Addressing scheme used in DATAPHONE II networks in which the network addresses of the G2 outboard and G4 backbone tributary modems are left out of the address sequence for devices downstream from those tributaries An AT amp T Paradyne automated network management system that allows an operator to monitor network conditions analyze problems and take restorative measures A menu which is invoked by selection of a menu item on a previous menu A collection of devices which are diagnostically connected starting from a local device on the control channel down to the remote termination point s See secondary channel The connection between multiplexer nodes used to pass network control data A device supported by a user s NMS It is a device from which alerts can be interpreted by NMS or for which tests and commands can be directly accessed from the NMS A facility which is connec
207. e endpoint 2 is the selected device Stopping Conditions Affecting Connectivity Map Displays A stopping condition is used to limit the number of devices shown on a Connectivity Map If the fanout from an adjacent device is greater than one then the connectivity from that device is not shown Instead a stub appears indicating that a stopping condition has occurred see the next subsection for a description of stub facilities To view the connectivity represented by the stub you can select the device with the stub then select the Connectivity Map from the resulting command menu Bridges are an exception to the stopping condition The devices connected to the bridge are shown even if the fanout is greater than one Stub Facilities When a device s stopping conditions result in adjacent devices not being shown a stub a short solid black line is drawn next to that device to indicate this refer back to Figure 6 5 You can select that device and open a new Connectivity Map window showing its adjacent devices The stub itself cannot be selected and is shown on the display in the foreground color 6 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Connectivity Map Icon Alert State Information Connectivity Map icons are color coded to indicate current alert priority states Icon extenders and stubs are not color coded and are shown in the foreground color Textual Information on Connectivity Maps Device name an
208. e need to repeat data in multiple files Refer to the section The Concept of Network Profiles in Chapter 3 for more information on the content of each profile INFORMIX Relational Database System An INFORMIX customization option enables you to create additional customized database tables see the Standard and Customized Reports description in this chapter These new tables can be linked to existing tables to generate customized reports or change the content and or appearance of standard reports You can also have direct access to INFORMIX for database querying purposes and reporting via optional purchase of SQL Menu and Command Oriented Multi Window User Interface with Help Features The full feature workstation provides many user friendly interface features such as mousedriven menus and input forms for quick and easy menu selections and data entry as well as field and form help to assist in using menus and forms NMS is a command oriented system allowing you to request commands easily via a menu tree structure or to bypass the menu structure to request commands directly from the command line You have multi windowing capabilities to view and execute separate network activities concurrently You select these network activities called tasks from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu which is the main menu for the NMS The tasks are Manager Map Monitor Summary External Systems Performance Reports Trouble Inventory Reports Trouble Track
209. e of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 727 530 2340 Trademarks All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners do Printed on recycled paper COPYRIGHT 1997 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revi
210. e part of the sequential address Valid entries are from 1 to 80 Each device on the 6800 Series NMS poll list has a unique address based upon its location within the network This address is comprised of a string of numbers that represent certain aspects of a device s location The service classes differ somewhat in addressing conventions DATAPHONE II Mode APL and DDS Addressing A typical analog private line or DATAPHONE Digital Service DDS device address as shown in Figure D 1 1 35 2 79 1 D network address C port B local address A A control channel 490 11937 Figure D 1 Typical APL or DDS Address A This segment is the control channel on which the device is located The control channel identification can be a number from to 8 for the 6800 Series NMS The highest numbered control channel cannot be used if the 6800 Series NMS is connected to an ANALYSIS NMS D 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing B This segment is the control device s local address There can be up to 256 addresses on a single control channel The local address is based on a modem s location within a specific mounting The mounting ranges from 1 to 32 The first digit or first two digits refers to the mounting s designated number The last digit refers to the modem s position in the mounting There are eight slots numbered one to eight from left to right A modem located in mounting number 3 and occupying slot number 5
211. e repair of faulty devices and transfer alert information from the 6800 Series NMS to other network management systems There are three types of alerts that can be displayed on the Map Monitor and Summary displays device alerts facility alerts and system alerts Alert management for device types is affected by these alert types as follows A device that has a value of supported in the NMS support field of its device profile is a device managed by NMS and the display object corresponding to the device can show alert state information A device that has a value of unsupported in its device profile is not managed by NMS and the display object corresponding to that device cannot show alert state information Device alerts are processed in alert groups which are device type specific Alert group information for modems DSUs and SRCUs multiplexers bytex devices SNMP brouter devices and the NMS is provided later in this chapter Alerts on Undefined Devices Facility Alerts If an alert is reported to the NMS for a device that does not have a device profile the NMS classifies the alert as an undefined device Alerts for undefined devices are handled the same as other devices However once processed they are dropped and not stored in the historical alert database because the alert cannot be associated with a device profile Facility alerts inform the user regarding problems or activities corresponding to the physical connections between device
212. e terminal type refer to the following UNIX features and documentation terminfo terminal capability database infocmp compare or print out terminfo descriptions tic terminfo compiler UNIX User s or System Administrator s reference manuals To get the Trouble Tracking task and Trouble Inventory Reports task working on the terminal refer to the INFORMIX 4GL Reference manual appendix explaining the procedures for modifying a termcap file Prior to modifying the termcap file save the original termcap file Prior to re installing the NMS save the modified termcap file as the modified version will be lost during installation After the NMS is installed restore the modified termcap file 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 41 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Example of Remote Terminal Login Set Up The following example provides information for configuring PROCOMM PLUS or PROCOMM PLUS for Windows when these emulation packages are used for remote terminal login to the NMS This information can assist you in determining the steps required for performing a remote login using another type of emulation package To set up your emulation package to communicate with the NMS you must configure the terminal emulation options provided by the emulation package then perform keyboard mapping Once these steps are finished you can establish connection Configuring PROCOMM PLUS PROCOMM PLUS must be properly con
213. e the information display in your window If you have not specified selection criteria the system default selection criteria for this task is applied and you have a view of all alerts as they are reported to the NMS and pass the display filter NOTE Any modifications you make via the edusc command will not affect the Monitor window currently open An active Monitor window must be closed and then reopened for your new selection criteria to take effect 6 34 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Other alert display customization commands that affect the Monitor display are Edit Color Code edcc and Edit Alert Attribute edaa These commands affect all users of the system and cannot be used to customize individual user s Monitors Refer to the Customizing Alert Attributes and Criteria section in Chapter 5 Performing NMS Functions from the Monitor On the basic feature workstation you use the up and down arrow keys to select the alert in the Monitor window and then press Enter This action invokes a menu allowing you to clear an event or acknowledge an alert On the full feature workstation click the left mouse button to select the alert to display a menu with additional selections Figure 6 17 On this menu you can access an Alert Management command selection menu to request the Delete Alert History dlah command or the Display Active Alert Snapshot dsaas command You can also access device
214. ealth status and test results through this process The identification of a port for DATAPHONE II devices on the control channel For Model 2 modems operating in DATAPHONE II diagnostic mode the port address is always 1 A network used to transport data from terminal to computer or from computer to computer It shares the same physical transmission facilities with the diagnostic network A transient display which requires an immediate user response You will not be able to proceed with normal task interaction until you respond to the priority display A view from a database Data are stored internally within NMS in INFORMIX database tables Profiles are used to group portions of those tables into a specific class for presentation and management to the user 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 GL 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System protocol mode Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN report resident display response time restoral device results queue routine routing table scheduling secondary channel select selection criteria selection filter The operational state in which a device communicates with other devices and NMS The protocol mode determines the format and types of messages that are communicated within the network There are three types of protocol modes for modems and DSUs DMC DATAPHONE II and Advanced ADp NMS does not support the DMC mode The dial up network
215. ears The database restore consists of files directories used with the INFORMIX database and the INFORMIX database itself To perform a database restore the NMS system must not be running Checking NMS system please wait Wait until the following message appears Please insert tape labeled Database Files Directories Backup Type c to continue or q to quit and then press Enter Insert the tape labeled Database File Directories Backup TYPE c To continue PRESS Enter The following message appears Restoring files directories please wait Wait until the following message appears Restore of files directories completed Please remove tape and insert the tape containing the INFORMIX database backup The following message appears Please follow the instructions on pages 3 27 to 3 31 of the INFORMIX ONLINE Administrator s Guide Please wait for menu Press Return to continue When the INFORMIX ONLINE menu is displayed the following message appears Informix OnL ine Status Parameters Dbspaces Mode Force Ckpt Status menu to view INFORMIX OnL ine Select Archive from the INFORMIX ONLINE menu TYPE a The following Archive menu appears ARCHIVE Create Restore Tape Parameters Exit 4 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 System Administration 4 Select Restore from this menu TYPE r The following message appears Restoring entire INFORMIX OnL ine system Please moun
216. eat the dragging and clicking of the mouse to change the size and location of the box until your subview is appropriately defined 2 Select the Zoom In To SubView option to make the candidate subview the current map view The map view that appears as a result of using the Zoom In To SubView selection or by using the left mouse button depends on the existence of site or cluster icons in the newly defined candidate subview If the candidate subview contains no site or cluster icons at a minimum the new map view displays the geographic area defined by the candidate subview You may see more area than that defined by the candidate subview because of the difference in the shape of the candidate subview box and the shape of your current window The map view origin or upper left hand corner of the new map view stays the same as previous map view origin If the candidate subview contains site or cluster icons the system ensures that the resulting map view includes all site icons including the individual sites that were clustered into the cluster icons in the previous view If this occurs you may see a new map view of a larger geographic area than that selected in the subview Zoom Out To World View This selection displays a full world map regardless of the geographic span of your actual network Zoom To Default View This selection returns your current map view to the default view The default view can be the map view previously set using the
217. ed by the Manager task Refer to the section Manager Task User Interface for more information Trouble Inventory Reports Task and Trouble Tracking Task User Interfaces On the basic feature workstation use the keyboard to interface with the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks The Trouble Inventory Reports task displays the task window as shown in Figure 2 31 When you select the Trouble Tracking task the Trouble Tracking task window appears as shown in Figure 2 32 Hain Menu 13 Alert History Reports 2 Inventory Reports 3 Trouble Tracking Reports 43 Results Queue Management 5 Scheduling Queue Management enter selection Fl Help F2 Go FR ClreFld F4 PreyvMNenu FS Maintenu F6 PreuForm F uit 491 13180 Figure 2 31 Trouble Inventory Report Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 48 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Tain Menu 13 2 3 4 5 8 7 Fl Help ditt dstt edtt latt optt Delete Trouble Tickets Display Trouble Tickets Edit Trouble Tickets List Trouble Tickets Open Trouble Ticket Results Queue Management Scheduling Queue Management enter selection F2 Go F3 ClrFld F4 Preufenu FS NainNenu Fo PrevForm FT Q uit 491 13181 Figure 2 32 Trouble Tracking Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation The function keys shown at the bottom of the windows are identical to those in the Manager task on the full feature workstation
218. ed circuit card to which separate components have been attached 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 GL 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System cluster command abbreviation command button command key composite object configuration management control channel control device cut through access database datagram Data Communication Equipment DCE DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode data service unit DSU Data Terminal Equipment DTE Composite object containing a group of sites which have been aggregated together in order to avoid icon overlap on the screen A short acronym for a command You use the abbreviation on task menus to execute a command An on screen icon which is selectable with the mouse Selection of a command button invokes a specific pre defined function from a full feature workstation Command buttons are used to invoke application specific commands and basic commands e g logoff refresh etc One of the keyboard function keys F1 through F8 Pressing a function key invokes a specific pre defined function Command keys are used to invoke application specific commands e g previous field main menu from the keyboard An object on the network map which contains or is composed of other objects For example a site may contain network devices The storage administration and synchronization of data concerning a network e g device facility connectivity
219. ed manually as a normal routine When manually executing a routine ADR criteria does not apply to the routine s execution You use the following commands for creation display modification of ADR criteria e Display ADR Criteria dsadrc command e Edit ADR Criteria edadrc command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for detailed descriptions of these commands ADR Criteria ADR execution criteria indicates the following information e Whether or not device information imported should be used as input to the ADR alert messages e Times days the ADR is executable e The set of reporting objects whose alert reports should cause the ADR to be executed The set of alert s or alert clear s that should cause the ADR to be executed e The routine to be executed e Destination s for ADR results and users to be notified of ADR execution ADR Notification and Results NMS notifies you of an ADR execution via the network monitor and user mail Monitor When an ADR is triggered by an alert the network monitor displays the ADR indication in the corresponding entry for the alert NOTE The Monitor does not display any indication if the ADR is triggered by an alert clear 2 64 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started User Mail ADR Filters When ADR results are sent to the queue or printer NMS sends mail notifications to users informing them
220. ed with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the
221. edpc command changing the Application field from uai to none 2 Re execute the Edit Port Configurations edpc command changing the Application field back to uai and respecifying the other port parameters related to the uai entry UAI Authorization in Device Profiles Device profiles for supported devices contain a UAI authorization field The entry in this field must be on in order for alerts from the device to be sent across the UAI connection Network Monitor UAI Indicator On the Network Monitor the indicator UAI will be displayed in the alert entry if 1 UAI authorization for the device reporting the alert is turned on 2 The alert has passed the uniform alarm filter 3 The UAI port is enabled Table G 2 lists 6800 alert type mappings for both Basic UAI and Enhanced UAI Items under the columns ALERT TYPE ENHANCED are the types as they are referenced on the 6800 and as they are sent to a destination system using Enhanced UAI Items under the columns FAULT TYPE BASIC are the two letter abbreviated alert types into which 6800 alerts are mapped and sent when basic UAI is used G 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Uniform Alarm Interface Table G 2 1 of 4 UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Alert Type Fault Type Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic Enhanced Basic 00 00 NR 19 00 RS 48 20 CG 00 01 CG 19 01 HW 48 21 CG 01 00 RS 19 02 CG 48
222. een You can use a mouse to execute Windows commands within the Windows application To select a command using a mouse press the left mouse button This action takes the place of pressing the Enter key on the keyboard Once the NMS application is successfully loaded all functions within the NMS must be performed using the keyboard The mouse is active only for Windows commands To start up the basic feature workstation perform the following steps 1 Power on the PC 2 At the DOS prompt TYPE win nmw if Windows 2 1 or win r nmw if Windows 3 0 PRESS Enter This starts the Windows program The Network Management Workstation copyright window appears Figure 2 5 Connect Network Management Workstation Software Release 2 0 Copyright 1991 AT amp T Paradyne All rights reserved EOIN OSDIR OLIN IT OI DT OTE GOUONGORUOINOI RON AUIRURMOARUSORHON GERONA EN 491 13557 Figure 2 5 Network Management Workstation Copyright Window 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 3 To start the NMW software acknowledge that you have read the copyright information by clicking on OK with the left mouse button or PRESS Enter The Network Management Workstation main screen appears Figure 2 6 Connect 491 13166 Figure 2 6 Network Management Workstation Main Window Window Frame 4 To initiate the connection between the PC and the NMS host computer
223. eir unique network configuration The information in this document assumes total access to all functions in the system Users with a lesser security access will not see some of the available functions Chapter 1 provides an overview of the 6800 Series NMS system features and descriptions of the 6800 Series software applications packages and the 6800 Series NMS hardware This chapter also provides information on migration support Chapter 2 provides information on common procedures information on the user interfaces for workstations and descriptions for the following items tasks Help feature routines commands and alert color coding Chapter 3 provides information on the profile database and provides configuration information for the system at the user level Chapter 4 provides System Administrator information for user database set up and low level system configuration This chapter includes the procedures for Database Backup and Restoral Chapter 5 provides information on the 6800 Series NMS system filters and alert processing Chapter 6 provides information on using the Map Monitor and Summary tasks in monitoring the network Chapter 7 provides information on trouble tracking and the Automatic Trouble Reporting feature Chapter 8 provides information on reporting for the 6800 Series NMS Chapter 9 provides information on 6800 Series NMS utilities Appendix A contains the Device Model numbers Appendix B provides an alphabetical
224. em Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide for more information on this printer 5 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Alert Processing within NMS Alarms Status Events Alerts consist of alarms events and status reports NMS handles these types of alerts alike An alarm is a trouble condition in the network such as the alert type DL Dial Line Lost for modems or alarm 62 00 1 Active Yellow Link for 731 742 or 740 741 multiplexers There are actually two types of multiplexer alarms facility and node alarms Facility alarms are caused by a problem on any T1 or aggregate link connected to a node or a T1 or aggregate link alarm signal received by an upstream device Node alarms are caused by a hardware problem within a node An alert can be caused by a service affecting hardware problem within a link or by a problem with a device An alarm starts when the subsystem receives a state change from normal to an alert condition The alarm is cleared when the subsystem receives a state change back to normal The time stamps are provided by the subsystem The duration of the alarm is the time between when the alarm starts and when it is cleared based on the time stamp The function of acquiring network alarms is performed by the internal Monitoring Unit NMU for modems and DSUs or the core subsystem for multiplexers The NMU monitors the change in state and reports the change to t
225. ems 000 3 12 Configuring Map Access to External Systems 3 12 Notes on External Systems Interface to ANALYSIS9 NMS 3 12 Notes on External Systems Interface to Bytex Unity Management System 3 12 Notes on 6800 Series NMS X Window Cut Through 3 12 Notes on External Systems Interface to Hosts Through Telnet 3 13 Notes on External Systems Interface to SRCU sluuus 3 13 Notes on External Systems Interface to 850 DCX Multiplexer Connect On ain enoiexv erep eu e Se Se aha i ee EE ERA 3 14 Notes on External Systems Interface to 700 Series Multiplexers 3 14 Notes on External Systems Interface to DBU 3 14 Notes on External Systems Interface to SC 00 00000 3 14 Notes on External Systems Interface to 3270 0000 3 14 Notes on External Systems Interface to VT100 3 14 Notes on External Systems Interface to ANSI Compatible Terminals 3 15 Multiplexer Configuration sseeeee cece eee 3 15 Modem Data Service Unit DSU and Service Restoration Control Unit SCRU with Associated Analog Bridge AB and Dial Backup Unit DBU Configuration soen as ee aA ae ER e 3 15 Establishing the NMS Poll List 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee eee 3 15 Polling Modems DSUs eeeeeeee ee 3 15 Polling Multiplexers 2 242 ier Ee exe RR 3 16 Activating the NMS i creyera ee E etn S 3 17
226. ems from the Map Manager menu You can also execute routines from the Map by entering the routine name in the command line provided 6 30 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks E Nap Manager Routines 1 cpr opy Routine 2 cnr Create Routine 3 dle Delete Routine 4 dsadrc Display ADR Criteria 3 dsp Display Routine 8 edadrc Edit AOR Criteria 7 ede Edit Routine 8 lar List Rautines Hap Manager l Scheduled Items 13 disi Delete Scheduled Items 2 dssi Display Scheduled Items 33 lssi List Scheduled Items enter select ion O Manager Queue Results B 13 dign Delete Queue Results 2 dsqr Display Queue Results 3 Isqn List Queue Results enter select ion INNEREN Help Go CleFld Praeullenu Nainttenu PrevForm Quit Cancel 493 14281 Figure 6 15 Routines Schedule Items and Queue Results Submenus 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 31 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Terminating the Map Task To terminate the Map task select Close from the Window Manager menu or press ESC x on the keyboard Monitoring the Network Using the Monitor Task The Monitor task shows real time color coded textual representations of network alerts Using the Monitor task you can view new alerts view updated information on existing alerts acknowledge alerts clear events and also have access to Network Contro
227. enu 2 From the command menu of a selected object icon object name You can invoke up to two separate Map Manager windows invoked either from two different objects or from the Map task command menu Map Manager windows are Manager windows opened from the Map command menu or from an objects command menu Geographic Map Commands Menus You display the Commands menu by clicking on the Commands button located at the bottom left corner of the Geographic Map window 6 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Selecting the Command Button If you click on the Commands icon on the Geographic Map window the menu appears as shown in Figure 6 2 Map Manager Set Default View Subnetwork View Zoom 493 14274 Figure 6 2 Commands Menu These selections are defined as follows Geographic Map Selection The Geographic Map selection opens a Geographic Map window containing the current default map view Manager Selection The Manager selection invokes the Manager task see the section Manager Task Activities from the Map Set Default View Option When you first open a Geographic Map window the map view that appears in the window is the default view of the Geographic Map If the default view was not changed using the Set Default View selection the system default map view appears This default view shows only the portion of the world map containing network devices This map view is also
228. enus in Mouse Supported Tasks The mouse supported tasks provide pop up menus which list valid selections for a form field You can display a pop up menu by clicking on the field To choose a selection from the pop up menu click on the selection NMS automatically populates the selected field with the selection from the pop up menu Using Pop up Menus in the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking Tasks The Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks provide pop up menus for form fields You display a pop up menu by placing a question mark in a field and pressing Enter The pop up menu appears as a checklist with blank spaces appearing to the left of each item Figure 2 21 Trouble Tracking EDIT TROUBLE TICKETS Page 1 els ress els ets Alert groupis ntus Escalation status y s Ticket severityfs MORE Fi Help F2 Go F3 CleFld F PrevFld F5 Hainllenu F amp FillFonrm F Defaults F amp Cancel u EOPD NoaGcGGG o 493 14347 Figure 2 21 Sample Pop Up Menu for Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking Tasks To select an item on the pop up menu place an x in the blank space to the left of each item you want to select To deselect an item place the cursor in the blank space next to the item you want to deselect and clear the field using the F3 key or press the spacebar If the spacebar is used the cursor automatically advances to
229. ependent of application packages that is groups of device names can represent devices from different application packages Device Types The device type field is provided by the system and cannot be changed by the user Device types must be unique to an application package Device types can be both supported device types and unsupported device types The managed device types are as follows ab Analog Bridge acu Auto Call Unit adc ANALYSIS Data Concentrator apl APL Modem brter Cisco Brouter Device dbu Dial Backup Unit ddd Direct Distance Dial Modem E 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Naming Conventions dds macu mux 56mux hms ntwk snmp srcu swtch system Digital Service Unit Multidrop Auto Call Unit Non switched Multiplexer such as a 740 741 or 742 56mux 740 74 1 742 multiplexer with 56K interface Network Management System such as System Controller Star Keeper ANALYSIS another 6800 Networking Multiplexer such as 719 any SNMP device Service Restoration Control Unit Switching Multiplexer such as a 745 or a Bytex U30 U50 Switch or Bytex Unity Management System 6800 Series Network Management System All device types listed above with the exception of SNMP and brouter devices are also valid unmanaged device types Additional unmanaged device types are as follows bridge clst comm dacs erth fep host pbx pkt sw prin proc Central Office Brid
230. eports onore Ier RUN pe Reb ES 8 8 Call Statistics zoe ue APORTE DEERE ee ee 8 8 Call Detail Display Report 00 0 eee eee eee 8 0 Call Duration Distribution Report 0 00000 0 eee 8 0 Call Occurrence Distribution Report seser 8 9 Daily Historical Utilization Report eese 8 9 Managing Call Statistics ranere eee eee ee eens 8 9 Collecting and Storing Call Statistics llle 0 0000 8 10 Call PTOGCGSSIBE uere peer eoe betes 8 10 Call Buffer in the Device 0 0 0 cee eee ee 8 10 Multiplexer Performance Reports 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 8 11 Accessing Multiplexer Performance Reports 0 0 8 11 Channel Group Performance Report cgpr 000 5 8 12 DDS Channel Performance amp Status ddscps 4 8 12 DDS Channel Trouble Codes ddsctc 000 cee eee 8 12 DSOB Performance amp Status dps 8 12 Equipment Performance Report epr lesse lesse 8 12 Facility Errors Report fer 0 0 0 cece eee 8 13 Facility Performance Report fpr 0 2 0 ce eee eee eee 8 13 Node Errors Report ner 0 0 eee eee eee eee 8 13 Time Slot Performance Report tspr 000 000 eee ee eee 8 13 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Overview NMS provides both standard and customized reporting capabilities through the INFORMIX Relational Database
231. ers A type of error control for data transmission in which the receiving device can detect and correct characters or blocks of code containing a predetermined number of erroneous bits A pre defined collection of alerts used to manage alerts for filtering purposes An alert group may consist of one or more alerts A multiport broadcast polling bridge that is used to increase the number of dial backup units available for multipoint backup An analog bridge can be used at either a remote tributary site or at the control modem site The private circuit used for data transmission Also called 4 wire private line private line or leased line The network management system that monitors Paradyne 3400 Series modems multiplexers digital links and terminal connections The 6800 Series NMS offers cut through access to ANALYSIS The dial backup unit that receives the first call when DDD connections are being established with another DBU Data transmission in which time intervals between transmitted characters can be of any length Transmission is controlled by start and stop elements at the beginning and end of each character For Model 2 modems an option that converts asynchronous data received from data terminal equipment to data synchronized with the transmit clock for a synchronous modem port A circuit restoration features used on point to point telephone circuits that allows a station to initiate a call automatically and respond to
232. es for the following operations e NMS system start up e NMS system reset e NMS system powerdown e Using windows within NMS Mouse operations Using the full feature and basic feature workstations e Using the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu e Navigating through the NMS menu tree hierarchy e Selecting invoking NMS commands e Scheduling commands for execution e Creating editing displaying listing routines e Editing and displaying alert driven routines criteria e Selective filtering for alert driven routines criteria e Alert color coding within the NMS 2 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Starting Up the 6800 Series NMS The 6800 Series NMS runs on an Altos System The start up procedure initializes the NMS system as opposed to installation which installs the software onto your Altos system You use the start up procedure whenever you need to start the system for example after shutting down the system for maintenance or when upgrading to a new release The following sections provide the specific steps required to start up the 6800 Series NMS on the host computer start up for the full feature workstation and start up for the basic feature workstation 6800 Series NMS Start up from the System Console To start up the system perform the following steps 1 Power on the Altos System NOTE Insert the reset run key in the RESET RUN switch and make a one quarter turn clockwise to the RUN position Once
233. est command See Table 2 2 for object identification information passed by multiplexer commands The 6800 Series NMS system messages contain only the identity device name of the 6800 system During the creation of a routine you must supply a device address if it is required Any command with a Device s field in its input form can accept a device address from alert messages when the command is used as an ADR Also you must indicate that NMS uses these addresses when the routine is executed as an ADR rather than the address obtained from incoming alert messages To specify that these pre specified addresses are used verify that the Import object info field in the Edit ADR Criteria input form is set to No During routine creation you must enter both a control and tributary address for commands that require this information Be aware that when including commands requiring both control and tributary addresses in an ADR the control device input forms must have the Import object info field set to no for both devices 2 62 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Table 2 2 lists the object identification information that can be passed to multiplexer commands from multiplexer alert messages Table 2 2 Object Identification Information for Multiplexers Command Parameter s Command Parameter s Command Parameter s accg none cs node channel fer node link DS1 group channel acll node cst node channel fpr node link DS1 c
234. et The workstation offers a mouse based interface and features mutli windowing and multitasking capabilities To start up the full feature workstation perform the following steps 1 Power on the PC 2 Atthe DOS C prompt TYPE cd xone PRESS Enter This changes directory to xone 3 To start the workstation TYPE xone PRESS Enter The grey workspace appears You must wait a few minutes until the 6800 NMS login window appears as shown in Figure 2 2 4 Atthe login window TYPE an assigned admin login PRESS Enter TYPE an applicable password PRESS Enter Basic Feature Workstation Start up The basic feature workstation PC should be installed and connected to the network and Microsoft Windows and the Network Management Workstation NMW software must also be installed on the PC For installation information refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide 2 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started NOTE If you are using Microsoft Windows Version 3 0 software you must set the display setting to EGA for the 6800 Series user This is done via the Change System Settings dialogue box when running the SETUP procedure from Windows Refer to the Network Management Workstation Software Release 1 0 User s Guide for additional information Also to determine the version of Microsoft Windows on your workstation refer to the Microsoft Windows copyright scr
235. etworks or control channels In addition users may be restricted to particular commands or sets of commands against those customized groups of devices The System Administrator assigns a User ID and password to each user in the system Users can change their own passwords for their personal login security For information on user access security and user access customization see Chapter 3 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Logical Network Partitioning with Customization Capabilities The 6800 Series NMS System Administrator can customize command access and device circuit network and control channel permissions to satisfy user requirements within the customer s network The ability to grant or deny permissions to devices circuits networks control channels and commands is accomplished through the definition of device groups and user groups Device groups identify sets of devices by name address circuit network or control channel User groups identify sets of 6800 Series NMS commands which are executable by users who are assigned to those groups The 6800 Series NMS has built in access security via four functional access user group levels Each command is associated with one or more of four user groups Help Desk Data Technician Manager and Administrator The NMS System Administrator can edit these groups or define additional groups up to a total of 30 user groups User group as
236. evels Yes Yes Manager Status Display Telephone dstn All Levels Yes Yes Manager Number s Display Thresholds dst All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Trouble Tickets dstt All Levels Yes Yes Trouble Tracking Display Uniform Alarm dsuaf All Levels Yes Yes Manager Filter Display Uniform Alarm dsuai All Levels Yes Yes Manager Interface Display User Profile dsup All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Vendor Profile dsvp All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Workstation dswc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Configurations Download Device dndf Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Firmware Administrator DSOB Channel dcs All Levels Yes Yes Manager Summary B 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Command Access Levels Table B 1 10 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From DSOB Performance amp dps All Levels Yes Yes Manager Status DS 1 Channel Loopback dcl Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator DS 1 Channel Module demt Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Test Tech Manager Administrator Edit Alert Attribute edaa Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Alert Monitoring edams Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager State Administrator Edit Alert Driven Routine edadrc Administrator Yes Yes Manager Criteria Edit Alert Driven Routine edadrf Administrato
237. examples of the reports generated With these reports you can analyze alert information for pinpointing trouble areas and resolving problems For example reports specific to multiplexers and modems can assist in resolving problems for these types of devices You can sort compile and generate reports in tabular format for concise data analysis Also both detailed and summary reports are available providing the appropriate form and amount of data needed at given time on a timely basis You can schedule most reports for delayed and repeated execution You can customize standard reports using the INFORMIX 4GL software You can also use NMS database and the INFORMIX SQL software package to create your own reports For more information on customizing reports refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Reports and Trouble Tracking Customization Guide Trouble Inventory Reports This section describes the Trouble Inventory Reports task This task does not support the use of the mouse Refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for a description of the commands used to generate these reports 8 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Reports Accessing Trouble Inventory Reports To access Trouble Inventory Reports select the Trouble Inventory task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu A menu appears as shown in Figure 8 1 listing the specific reports available IT Trouble i
238. exer Performance Reports To access the Multiplexer Reports select the Performance Reports task from the 6800 Series NMS Task menu The Performance Reports Task menu appears as shown in Figure 8 3 l sc L1 1 Performance Reports Alert and Trending Repo 2 Call Statistics 3 Multiplexer Performance Reports enter selection aS EN ClreFld PrevMenu Mointenu E PrevForm EUN Cancel 493 14285 Figure 8 3 Performance Reports Task Menu All reports commands display input forms for entering selection criteria and formatting information and for results forms This information is used to determine what data to display or print The reports available from this menu are described as follows 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 8 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Channel Group Performance Report cgpr Use the Channel Group Performance Report to obtain the number of errored seconds and failed seconds that occurred for each network compatible channel group which has the specified node as one of its endpoints The data reported is that accumulated since the last statistical reset This report is generated by executing the Channel Group Performance Report cgpr command When a channel group registers high error rates it may be indicative of a degradation in the quality of a T1 facility carrying the channel group To monitor indirectly the quality of the T1 facilities carrying a cha
239. exer from the NMS poll list The NMS also uses multiplexer asynchronous alert reporting as a redundant measure against the loss of event information as a result of a hardware failure This reduces the probability that a problem might not be reported during equipment outage The multiplexer polling process is discussed in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide Multiplexer alert processing is discussed in Chapter 5 of this manual Use the following commands to monitor the polling process Display Alert Monitoring State dsams Displays the current polling and event reporting states referred to as the alert monitoring state of the control channels The command displays the control channel name the current alert monitoring state polling of the control channel on or off for modems and polling and asynch reports for multiplexers and the time out interval in seconds for no response from the control channel being polled time out interval is not applicable to multiplexers 3 16 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Display System Poll List dsspl Displays a list of the devices currently on the poll list of a specified channel The list displays the control channel whose poll list is being displayed the device type for each listed device the name and device address of each listed device the system polling status of each device active skipped both and lists t
240. ey displays as black 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System When your NMS is installed a system default color code scheme is in effect The color to priority level mapping is shown in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Default Color Codes Priority Level Meaning Color 1 Major Failure Red 2 Minor Failure Yellow 3 Warning Cyan none Normal Operation Green none Unsupported Device White The System Administrator can change the color codes that display on the Map Monitor and Summary tasks via the Edit Color Code edcc command Also the system administrator can change the priority level associated with alert groups via the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command Both commands are available from the Manager task Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for additional information on these commands Map Monitor and Summary Task Support for Network Devices The Map Monitor and Summary tasks support alert management All three of these tasks provide mechanisms for displaying alerts The following information provides an overview of this support For detailed descriptions of these tasks refer to Chapter 6 Map Task Support The Map task enables you to display devices and their connectivity in the following ways e On the Map as sites and on connections between sites e On Object Lists as devices at each site
241. f distinctions between the communications products addressing schemes recognized by the 6800 Series NMS In addition this appendix provides addressing information for the DATAPHONE II devices ANALYSIS 6510 managed devices and 3400 4400 Series modems DATAPHONE II extended addressing and Series 700 7000 Multiplexer addressing are also discussed Most addressing restrictions are device restrictions and not NMS restrictions The 6800 Series NMS manages communications products devices that communicate in one of two protocol modes depending on the types of devices on the circuit or diagnostic tree A diagnostic tree consists of the control device and all downstream devices connected to it diagnostically Each control device on the control channel along with all its downstream devices represents one diagnostic tree If the circuit is composed entirely of 3400 4400 Series modems 3600 Series DSUs or 3800 3900 Series modems the Advanced Diagnostic protocol can be used If the network contains any DATAPHONE II devices the DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol must be used 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE DATAPHONE II protocol mode can be selected from the front panel of the 3400 4400 Series modem Regardless of the diagnostic protocol used the NMS requires device addresses to obtain and process testing monitoring and historical database information However each protocol supp
242. figured to work with the NMS and the pe ansi terminal type In the SETUP TERMINAL OPTIONS menu for PROCOMM PLUS the following options must be changed to the following A TERMINAL EMULATION ANSI C Soft flow ctrl XON XOFFP ON H BS translation 00 0000 NON_DESTRUCTIVE For PROCOMM PLUS for Windows using the pe wansi terminal type the CURRENT SETUP menu must be changed to the following Terminal ANSI BBS The Port Settings dialog must show that Software Flow Control is ENABLED In other words the box in front of the word Software must have an X The Terminal Settings ANSI BBS dialog must show the following e Destructive backspace is DISABLED i e no X in the box Line wrap is ENABLED i e has X in the box e 8 bit DEC terminal type is DISABLED i e no X in the box 2 42 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Keyboard Mapping The following table shows how keys must be mapped via the keyboard mapping utilities in PROCOMM PLUS and PROCOMM PLUS for Windows The mapping in the two PROCOMM products is similar to the keyboard mapping for VT220 emulation F9 F10 F11 F12 Cursor Up Cursor Down Cursor Left Cursor Right Grey Ins Grey Del Mappin Comments Send ESC OP letter O not digit 0 Send ESC OQ letter O not digit 0 Send ESC OR letter O not digit 0 Send ESC OS letter O not digit 0 Send ESC 15 Send ESC 17 Send ESC 1 8 Send
243. following additional fields are displayed Day s of the week Enter the day s of the week when the command is to execute Valid entries are e The days of the week in abbreviated form e g sun mon tue wed thu fri sat Multiple entries are allowed separated by commas or spaces e Arange of days e g sun thu e The keyword all for all days of the week Time s Enter the time s the command is to execute for each day specified For time s entry parameters refer to the Time s field explanation for delayed command execution 2 68 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Last date Enter the stop date for command execution If you leave this field blank the command will execute indefinitely on a weekly basis For data format refer to the Date s field explanation for delayed command execution The today value is not valid for the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks monthly The command executes on a monthly basis When you enter monthly into the Schedule execution field the following additional fields are displayed Day s of the month Enter the day s of the month when this command is to execute Valid entries are e Multiple days The numbers must be separated by commas or spaces e g 1 4 7 10 Arange of days e g 8 15 e The keyword last to execute the command on the last day of the current month e The keyword all for all days of the month not just current month
244. form and you can never place the cursor on this field e Carried over fields contain information you entered on a previous page in the form series These fields may or may not be changed depending on where you are in the form series which command is selected or the type of information provided in the field Typically you recognize these fields by the carried over information 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 51 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System e Required fields require user input on that form These fields are highlighted Commands cannot be executed if a required field is not filled in e Optional fields request information which is not critical for the execution of the command You may or may not populate these fields depending on how you want the command to execute These fields are highlighted Some field Helps are pop up menus which assist in value parameter selection You can select the entry from the selection list and NMS automatically populates the field with your selection Some field Helps are textual information such as value ranges accepted as input in a field The series of input forms for some commands vary depending on the input given on the initial input form For example if you invoke the Edit Routine edr command and you give a routine name on the initial input form the subsequent command input forms vary depending on the commands used in the routine Confirmer Boxes Some input forms display
245. formation on the File Export feature refer to Appendix H SNMP Trap Export The 6800 Series NMS SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Trap Export feature enhances the interoperability between the 6800 Series NMS and most industry standard SNMP based network management systems This feature exports native 6800 Series NMS alerts as standard SNMP traps All traps are generated as enterprise specific Interface to IBM s NetView via NetView PC and NetCare yy Access to IBM s NetView is achieved via the 6800 Series NMS s ability to support NetCare yy NetCare 9yy provides an alarm transport interface between the 6800 Series NMS and NetView PC NetView PC is an IBM software product that facilitates the transfer of non SNA Systems Network Architecture alerts from non IBM systems to NetView NetView is IBM s host based network management facility used for diagnostics and control of IBM s communications networks You can append problem determination information to the 6800 Series NMS alarms alerts via the user interface program Then codes containing the appropriate information and the alert pass to NetView PC either for local viewing or transfer to NetView for processing along with IBM initiated failure alerts Automatic Trouble Reporting The 6800 Series automatic trouble reporting feature reports alert information in the form of an Automatic Trouble Report ATR to a Paradyne technical support group or to any customer selected ter
246. forms also includes general descriptions of how to enter input how to access field help and the types of field help available selectable menu vs field help text Accessing Help in Fields Help can be accessed from fields on a form by selecting field labels with the mouse or by typing in the input field for which help is needed For tabular fields using a full feature workstation and the mouse supported tasks the column label should be selected For basic feature workstations and the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks type in a field within a column Refer to Figure 2 20 to clarify selecting fields listed in tabular form E Manager CLICK HERE TO OBTAIN HELP FOR THE DEVICES FIELD CLICK HERE TO OBTAIN Appl ication State FIELD HELP FOR THE NER le al APPLICATION FIELD _ a e Help Go ClrFld PrevFld Hainttenu FillForm Defaults Cancel E 493 14263 Figure 2 20 Selecting Fields Listed in Tabular Form Each field that accepts user input has associated field help Depending on the type of field either fixed parameter or variable parameter i e a value within a range of values field help is either a selectable menu of valid field entries or a text message which describes the valid input format s or entries 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 29 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Using Pop up M
247. g of an element in a window using the left button for map users the left and middle buttons on the mouse A set of information used to determine a subset of alerts Selection criteria may consist of such information as device addresses models device types alert types alert groups and alert severities A form containing various fields from the trouble ticket which is used to narrow down the trouble ticket for presentation GL 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Glossary sequential address Service Restoration Carrier SRC Service Restoration Control Unit SRCU session shared DBU Shared Diagnostic Unit SDU site profile short form addressing 6800 Series Network Management System NMS submenu subnetwork Supervisory Data Link SDL supported device supported facility The concatenation of the network addresses of all nodes between two nodes beginning with the control channel address and ending with the node itself See link level address A 4400 Series Carrier that provides the capability to share analog line side application modules among any of up to 64 APL modems residing in the same or different cabinets A module that provides the interface between the NMS and the devices in the Service Restoration Carrier In 3270 terminal emulation a logical connection between your terminal and a mainframe computer A DBU that is not dedicated to a particular circuit and may be used for th
248. g selected users off He she types y in response to the Do you wish to log a user off prompt then enters the selected user User ID and the associated service ID in response to the Please enter the user ID and Please enter the service ID prompts E Machine Name Time Of Login Service ID User ID unix tamt34 9 custom unis 03 26 91 am 10452 admin unix D1 14 28pm tami5224 admin unix 03 28 81 09 38 21 tam15284 helpdesk 04 01 91 08 16 46 04701791 08 42 33 Do you wish to log a user off n y Please enter the user ID helpdesk Please enter the service ID taml5294 Log aff user ID helpdesk with service ID tam15294 n E 493 14290 Figure 9 5 NMS Users Screen 9 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Utilities Printer Functions Two printer functions are available from the Utilities menu Printer Status and Move Print Jobs Printer Status Use the Printer Status function to display the status of one or more system printers Enter the selected printer s or the keyword all for all printers Figure 9 6 The status for the selected printer s appears E cu Enter printer you want status of default is all type for info q to quit all Line Printer scheduler is running system default destination printeri Status for all printer accepting requests since Tue Mar 26 09 01 44 1991 printer printeri is idle enabled since Tue Mar 26 09 01 44 1991 available Queue for all is empty Do
249. ge for multiport circuits Cluster Controller Other Communications Equipment Digital Access Cross Connect System such as DACS Earth Station Front End Processor Host Private Branch Exchange such as System 85 DEFINITY Packet Switch Printer Distributed Processor such as System 36 System 38 Series 1 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 E 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System psw Provider Switch such as 4ESS SESS satl Satellite term Terminal Special device types are unk and und The device type unk is used for devices not classified into managed or unmanaged device types The device type und is used for managed devices that have no device profile in NMS but do have alert or trouble records External System Names External system names can contain up to 15 alphanumeric lowercase characters including the special characters dot and dash The name must be unique Facility Names Facility names are used in the facility profile to uniquely identify a facility A facility is always associated with one or two device endpoints However the facility name cannot be used as input to the Device s field in any command or task Facility names are entered in the following format fac a a Where fac is a required prefix a a is a 1 to 15 alphanumeric character name which can include the 26 alphabetic characters a z the digits 0 through 9 and the special characters dash an
250. gement System Core Command Reference Manual for additional information on these commands 2 70 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration OVerVieW 204 Oks pan eh eder rut PUFERI M eU RI DPA EIE 3 2 Beginning Point for NMS Configuration Activities 3 2 Sequential Steps for Configuration 0 00 e eee eee 3 3 Concepts of Configuration Management esee esses 3 3 Device Addressing and Standardized Naming Conventions 3 3 The Concept of Network Profiles 0 0 cece eee eee 3 4 Device Profiles 2 ERE RE TA RR ERRIDRPDM Pe Tbe ETE 3 5 Automatic Generation of Site and Vendor Profiles Based on Device Profile Input occ ROO RE EXE 3 7 Facility Profiles gire ed ru db E Ee ERU EIER p es 3 8 Site Profiles cepe E WURST ENTER AES 3 8 Vendor Profiles 2 0 0 0 cece nec cette ee 3 9 NMS Port Configuration lseeseeeee eee eee 3 10 External Systems Configuration 0 0 c cece eee eee 3 10 Initiating External Systems Connections 0 00005 3 10 Terminating External Systems Connections 000 3 11 Configuring the NMS for External Systems Interface 3 11 Using the Edit Port Configuration edpc Command to Configure External Systems eee hh hn 3 11 Using the Edit External Systems Configuration edesc Command to Configure External Systems lesse 3 11 Assigning User Access to External Syst
251. ger Administrator Dial Mode dm Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table B 1 7 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Dial Standby ds Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Dial Utilization Snapshot dus All Levels Yes Yes Manager Digital Test dit Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Disable Enable de Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt dsab Administrator Display Address dsa All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Active Alert dsaas All Levels Yes Yes Manager Snapshot Monitor Display Alert Driven dsadrc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Routine Criteria Display Alert Driven dsadrf All Levels Yes Yes Manager Routine Filter Display Alert Information dsai All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt dsfi Display Alert Monitoring dsams All Levels Yes Yes Manager State Display ATR Phone dsatrpd All Levels Yes Yes Manager Directory Display ATR States dsatrs All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Audit Trail dsat Administrator Yes Yes Manager Display Automated dscd All Levels Yes Yes Manager Action Filter Display Call Directory dscd All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Canned dscm All Levels Yes Yes Manager Message Display Channel dscc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Configuration Display Cha
252. gh they were not clustered in the window when it was at its default size The addition or deletion of sites may also change the default site location 6 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Selecting Deselecting Objects Objects on the Geographic Map can be defined as any selectable items on an object list This means that an object can be a site facility device link or composite link All objects are represented by icons on the map To select an object on the map position the mouse pointer on the object and click the left mouse button You see the icon intensify in color You can also use the middle mouse button to select deselect icons however this button does not invoke a menu To deselect an object click on any area of the map free of icons When you deselect an icon you see the icon intensity return to its normal state You can also use the middle button on the mouse to select deselect icons however a menu does not display Window Icons Unique to the Geographic Map The icons on the Geographic Map window that are unique to the Map task are the two scroll bars one located horizontally across the bottom of the window and one located vertically down the right side of the window and a Commands button icon located in the lower left corner of the window Using the scroll bars you can incrementally manipulate the map view in your Geographic Map window as follows Clicking on the boxes
253. gn the port s using the Edit External System Configurations edesc command Using the Edit Port Configuration edpc Command to Configure External Systems Configure a port for external systems use by selecting External Systems for its application type in the Edit Port Configuration edpc command Then set the appropriate port type and speed parameters For dial ports you must allocate the port to a port group All dial ports in the same port group can be used by external systems for port sharing When choosing the port group if you are adding a modem that is not to be shared among other external systems connections choose a unique port group number Any alphanumeric character can be used To add a modem to a modem pool for external systems access use the same port group as the modem pool To add a modem as a backup or a secondary connection to a dedicated line to an external system you want to use the same port group as the dedicated line In this case make sure the dedicated line is on a lower port number as the system uses the first available port with the lowest port number when more than one connection is available for any one port group Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for detailed information on executing the Edit Port Configuration edpc command Using the Edit External Systems Configuration edesc Command to Configure External Systems Complete the Edit Port Configurati
254. gory provides a tally of the specific system wide alerts associated with that category The category is automatically updated as alerts in the network are received or cleared There are 30 categories which map into the 30 cells in the Summary The mapping of the category numbers into the cells is shown in Table 6 4 When editing the categories you enter a category number to identify the cell to be edited Using Table 6 4 as an example Alert Category 1 corresponds to major system alerts If 9 major system alerts occur and none of the alerts are cleared the Summary display the number 9 in cell 1 If 7 DDD warning alerts occur and three of the alerts are cleared the Summary window displays a 4 in cell 26 Initially each of the 30 categories contain system default values discussed later in this section and default row column labels as shown in Table 6 4 for alert selection criteria The categories can be edited via the Edit Category edc command Use this command to define the alerts to be counted for the category by specifying what device s by name address serial numbers network names or by circuit names device type s alert type s and or alert group s alert priority ies or model number s should be included Table 6 4 Alert Category Cell Mapping SYS MUX SWTCH NTWK APL DDD DDS UND RSTRL 6510 Major 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Minor 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Warning 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
255. hannel acpa node ccp node grt node bert node channel cpt node CPU hms node brcc node channel crcg channel group it node channel brcgc channel group cril none Ils node brllc node logical link ddscps node mkcc node channel chcc node channel ddsctc node mkcgc channel group chcg channel group dlog channel group mkllc node logical link chemt node dill node logical link nps node chdcmc node channel dscc node channel nss node chll node logical link dscs node channel nsss node chsdle node link dscg channel group nwcgs node chmcc node dsdbc node ner node chnapc node dsdcmc node DS 1 channel pact node chncs node dsll node logical link rtll node link chncp node dssdic node link times lot rds node channel link chnp node dsnapc node tss node link timeslot chplc node link dsncs none pll node link cgl node link channel dsncp node Imt node link group cgpr node dsrt node tsimt node TSI cgs node dstis node link tspr node cgt channel group dsplc node link vett node channel cl node channel dcs node channel cni node channel dps node CSS node link dcl node DS1 channel cs node channel demt node DS1 channel group cst node epr node 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 63 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Creating ADR Criteria Only system routines can be used as ADRs this means that ADR criteria can be specified for only system routines Any system routine for which ADR criteria is specified can also be execut
256. has sixteen user configurable ports You can configure the following interfaces and hardware components on the IPC 1600 card Each port can be configured as needed to meet unique system requirements An overview of port configuration procedures for these ports is provided in Chapter 3 of this manual For full configuration details refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide NOTE Many of the following interfaces do not need dedicated ports that is one port per interface This can be achieved by using a dial up connection via a shared dial port e Printers alert log printer system printer e Additional system printer e Basic feature workstations up to eleven workstations e Multiplexer event port for Series 700 multiplexers e Multiplexer cut through port external systems port for Series 700 multiplexers e Multiplexer network interface port command port for Series 700 multiplexers e Automatic Trouble Report interface e Dedicated ATR printer interface e Uniform Alarm Interface UAT e DCX Multiplexer interface e 839 Dial Backup cut through e System Controller cut through e VT100 Emulation for cut throughs to external systems e Service Restoration Control Unit interface 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System ANALYSIS NMS Gateway Option e Alternate cut through port to ANALYSIS NMS e File Export Interf
257. he Summary window displayed for all users of the system Execute this command to edit a Summary window category The Summary contains a matrix of 30 cells each of which can show alert totals based on a specific selection criteria The specific selection criteria is stored in numbered categories Each cell is mapped to a category from 1 to 30 You can edit the selection criteria in each category to indicate if this selection category is going to be active or inactive and to specify the device types the model numbers of devices the specific device addresses names or serial numbers and the alert type or alert group to be associated with this category You can also specify alerts by priority for the category Then use the Edit Row Column Labels edrcl command to change the labels of the matrix appropriately Edit User Selection Criteria edusc This command affects the display of the Monitor and the Map on an individual user basis All users of the system can execute this command if the user group to which they belong has the appropriate permissions Execute this command to customize the information displayed when viewing alerts on the Monitor and on the Map The changes made to the selection criteria are activated on an individual basis and are linked to the user ID You are able to specify alert selection criteria based on device type s model number s of devices and by specific device address es name or by a serial number You can specify whi
258. he core subsystem Alarm notification is available from the external relays LEDs and tone generators built into the nodes by inquiry via an NMS command or indirectly as an NMS alarm A status change is reported by a network device when the device detects a change from its normal operating state to an abnormal state Status reports are similar to alarms in that a status report is sent to the NMS when the device changes from its normal operating state to an abnormal state An event is an occurrence in the network reported to the NMS such as a canned message for the COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series APL modems SNMP brouter traps bytex alerts or event 02 00 for 731 742 or 740 741 multiplexers L C New Log Old Log They are reported only once and do not have an associated clear The user can manually clear events from the NMS or specify a duration in the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command after which the event is automatically cleared by the NMS The method of information transfer between a device and NMS for events is product specific and is described in the NMS configuration guides for managing the specific devices 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Events Events are the broadest category of multiplexer health and status information For example events can report changes in the configuration of the network and in the state of a hardware module or they can report trans
259. he number of ports for each device Local control devices are added to a control channel poll list via the acmccpl command described earlier in this section and also by setting system polling in their device profile using the Create Device Profile crdp or Edit Device Profile eddp commands In the device profile the value entered in the System polling field determines the type of polling the device receives from the NMS Activating the NMS Complete the following steps to activate the NMS properly 1 2 Identify and activate all ports see NMS Port Configuration in this chapter Verify or create all necessary device site vendor facility and system profiles Refer to the profile information earlier in this chapter Also refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for creating profiles Execute the Create Network Map cram command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for additional information on executing this command Establish filter management for each device type Refer to Chapter 5 in this document for information on establishing filter parameters for each NMS filter Activate polling For modem networks activate polling by executing the Edit Alert Monitoring State edams command For activating multiplexer polling refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and C
260. ic link down link dwn HW information info HW msg corruption msg cor HW unk event unk evt HW unk device unk dev HW cold start c start HW warm start w start HW neighbor loss n loss HW auth fail au fail HW major major HW minor minor HW link up link_up HW 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 Overview File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator OVervieWw lt eun sk veihbessheivkgiRnuebissRi Sep ed Deed itque H 1 Configuring the NMS for File Export H 1 Modem Settings Luce Apu wes ve Od ei exec e gera Aci uite ades H 2 LOCATION Object Class icem en eme e Rp H 3 EQUIPMENT Object Class seeeeeeeee IA H 4 CIRCUIT Object Class seeseeeeeee III H 6 Deleting NMS Sites on the AMI eee ee eee H 6 NMS Mail Message for a Successful File Transfer H 7 Troubleshooting and Miscellaneous Notes 0000 e eee eee H 7 The 6800 Series NMS File Export feature utilizes the UNIX uucp unix to unix file copy utility to transport configuration files from the 6800 to the ACCUMASTER Integrator AMI These files contain selected information from the NMS device site and facility profile databases The uucp utility is invoked by the Send Export File snef command Two additional NMS commands Create Export File cref and Delete Export File dlef are used to create and delete export files Another new NMS command Export File Configuration efc is used to specify NMS port and connec
261. ice on the Bytex UMS Addressing SNMP Brouter Devices All SNMP and brouter devices are addressed on the 6800 Series NMS through a logical control channel b1 The device address format for the SNMP brouter devices is in the form bl xxxxxxxxxXXXX Where bl is the logical control channel XXXXXXXXXXXXX consists of up to 60 lowercase alphanumeric characters The characters represent the name assigned to each device on the SNMP Manager system In addition a unique valid IP address is required for SNMP and brouter devices The IP address can be entered in any Device s field and in any Device name s field The IP address format for the SNMP brouter devices is in this form XXX XXX XXX XXX Where XXX is a numeric between 1 and 255 inclusive 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 21 Naming Conventions OVERVIEW zt quts Siok RE T n T T EE DRE DR Ot Pt E 1 Characters and Numbers 0 00 cece eee cece eere E 2 Character Case cS M or A IO E see a S Rn E 2 Leading Zeros ic estate Eee maa e eR ee aeta E 2 Special and Wildcard Characters ssleeleeeeeeeeee E 3 DOCG nto eh A oet dac ew tes de ect Ee E 3 Comma C or Space seb ber eI em REESE RI Pe cH PEERS E 3 Slash us eus on ead due RR ero dap oto dae S Red E 3 ASterisk 5 zo men e Rae d E edt d E 4 Question Mark 2 eee RUPEE VERE Eae E 5 Exception Character 2 2 0 cece cece rennene E 6 Dashi 3 Aou scu er ie er deseen read tede dE E 7 Keyword All nea
262. idge for Multipoint Circuits v vhol aago N s brter Brouter clst Cluster Controller comm Other Communications Equipment dacs Cross Connects such as a Digital Access Cross Connect System dbu Dial Backup Unit ddd Direct Distance Dial Modem dds Digital Data Service Unit 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 C 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System JE erth fep host macu mux 56mux in nms pe ntwk E pbx uu pkt sw ea prin B a proc psw em satl snmp Pt srcu Earth Station Front End Processor Host Multidrop Auto Call Unit Non switched Multiplexer such as M24 M44 73x 740 741 740 741 Multiplexers with a 56k aggregate link 74x 56K multiplexers Network Management System such as a System Controller StarKeeper ANALYSIS another 6800 Networking Multiplexer such as 719 Private Branch Exchange such as System 85 DEFINITY Packet Switch Printer Distributed Processor such as System 36 System 38 Series 1 Provider Switch such as 4ESS SESS Satellite Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Service Restoration Control Unit C 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Icons Switching Multiplexer such as 745 or Bytex U30 U50 or UMS swtch system 6800 Series Network Management System this particular instance of a 6800 Network Management System term Termi
263. ields Commands Lists the commands contained in the routine Comments Lists the user specified comments associated with the routine Edit before executing Required field Allows you to specify whether or not you want to edit one or more input forms for the commands contained in the routine Valid entries are yes or no The default is no A pop up menu provides for mouse selection of either entry If you specified no in the Edit before executing field a subsequent input form page displays the common input fields used for specifying results destination and execution scheduling information for the routine refer to Destination for Results for Commands and Routines and Scheduling Execution Commands and Routines later in this chapter for information on these fields You can populate these fields as needed then select Go F2 The routine is executed as requested 2 56 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started If you entered yes in the Edit before executing field the following input form page is displayed Figure 2 37 B Manager ROUTINE NAME Direct all commands in the routine to the following devicels Control devicets Tributary devices s _ Command Edit Command Edit all commands cmdl no cmd2 cmd3 no cmd4 cmd5 na cmd amp Help Go EInFId PreuFId Hainfenu Fil iForn Defaults Cancel zl 493 14268 Figure 2 37 Routine Input Form Page 2 When a routine i
264. ient problems in a node An event is defined by a message generated by the node A multiplexer can store event messages locally in its message log In this case the event message is usually referred to as a message A multiplexer can also forward event messages to three logical destinations event log 1 2 and 3 By configuring an event log you associate the logical destination with a physical Series 700 multiplexer or 719 channel You can direct all nodes in the network to send events to a central location where a 6800 Series NMS or event log printer is located Event log 2 must be configured to be the destination node that is connected to the 6800 Series NMS event port Event logs 1 and 3 destinations can be any other valid node or event log printer port The format of event messages printed on an event log printer are similar to the format used to store messages in a node s message log Figure 5 3 shows the format of event messages in a node s message log When a 6800 Series NMS is present event log 2 at all nodes must be directed to the node whose NAP port is connected to the NMS event port By executing the Change Node Connected to System chncs command you associate this node with the NMS event port Use the Change Node Configuration Parameters chncp command to set this node as the Event Log 2 destination for all other nodes Types of Events The ACCULINK multiplexer is capable of forwarding the following types of event messages t
265. ies Network Management System B L Typing the name of a mailbox will produce a similar list to the one shown in Figure 9 2 allowing you to view previously stored messages Mail can be received from other users or can be received from the NMS Common functions for which NMS sends mail are as follows e Notification of results in a queue e Notification of results sent to a printer e Notification of ADR execution e Notification of queue results overflow e Notification of network Map creation The available mailx commands can be displayed by typing Figure 9 3 Read Mai BuU mailx commands type msglist print messages next goto and type next message edit msglist edit messuges fron msglist give header lines of messages delete nsglist delete messages undelete msglist restore deleted messages save msglist file append messages to file reply maglist reply to the authors of the message Reply message reply to message including all recipients preserve msglist Preserve messages in mailbox mail user mail to specific user quit quit preserving unread messages xit quit preserving all messages header print page of active message headers shell escape ed directory chdir to directory or home if none given list list all commands no explanations top msglist print top 5 lines of messages z display next last page of 10 headers msglist is optional and specific messages by number author subjec
266. iew the set of icons by selecting Form Help F12 or ESC while in any Connectivity Map window Site icons display as solid circles These icons represent individual sites Each site icon on the map also displays its site name Alert site information is displayed for simple site icons when the site contains at least one device reporting an alert Site icons representing non reporting sites display on the map in the unmanaged color system default color for unmanaged is white When alerts are passed to the Geographic Map the site icon associated with the reporting device s changes from its normally displayed color to the color associated with the highest priority alert being reported for the device s at that site System default color for the highest priority alert is red While the alert s remain unacknowledged the site icon is displayed in 100 color saturation Once the alert is acknowledged the color of the site icon remains the same color as before the alert was acknowledged but changes to 50 color saturation An acknowledged icon appears to the user as less bright than an unacknowledged icon 6 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Cluster Icons Link Icons Cluster icons display as open circles These icons represent a set of individual sites that are so closely located geographically they would appear overlapped on the map if not consolidated or clustered into one icon representation
267. iles Use the following commands to delete display list or edit site profiles Delete Site Profile disp Deletes an existing site profile from the profile database If you delete a site profile and it is referenced by device profiles the references to the site in the device profiles are changed to unnamed The next time the NMS is updated via the execution of the Create Network Map crnm command discussed in detail in Chapter 6 the devices with the site name of unnamed or devices at the unnamed site for which geographic information has been updated are moved accordingly on the Geographic Map Display Site Profile dssp Displays site profiles Edit Site Profile edsp Used to change the information in an existing site profile record If you change the name of a site in a site profile the new name propagates to all device profiles that referenced the original site name Vendor profiles maintain inventory information regarding the vendors of network devices or facilities Information stored in these records is used in generating vendor profile reports Use the Create Vender Profile crvp command to create vendor profiles The NMS also creates vendor profiles automatically when a new vendor name is entered in a device profile or a facility profile Use the following commands to delete display or edit vendor profiles Delete Vendor Profile dlvp Deletes an existing vendor profile from the profile database If you delete a pr
268. ill be sent instead 11 Start Time Date and Time mm dd yyyy hh mm ss that the alert was reported to the NMS 12 Clear Time Date and Time mm dd yyyy hh mm ss that the alert was cleared 13 Alert Text The NMS text description of the alert type The default alarm text message is received alert 2 time 11 device 7 circuit 10 The maximum length of the expanded alarm text message is 160 characters If the expanded message exceeds this length the message will be truncated at 160 characters If the basic version of UAI is used the parameters 2 7 10 and 11 MUST be included in the alarm text message in order for the alert information to be properly handled by the receiving network management system NOTE January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Uniform Alarm Interface The NMS user can specify whether a UAI message should be sent to the receiving system when an alert clears via the Edit Uniform Alarm Interface eduai command The clear text message can include user text as well as device network NMS and alert information The message may include variable parameters which are determined from the actual network alert message or provided by the NMS Variables within the message are denoted by number and must be enclosed in braces when specified as part of the message When the message is received by the other network management system the clear text message will be expanded with the numbers variables replace
269. ing a specific type of terminal e g VT100 or 3270 to logically connect your terminal to a mainframe computer A device that enables simultaneous transmission of various independent channels into a single high speed data stream See multiplexer One of the ways in which bandwidth can be specified for multiplexer channel groups Time slots are specified by any number from one to twenty four with each time slot equal to 64 kbps Time slot 1 is the default location for the embedded supervisory data link A term for a digital carrier facility used to transmit a DS1 formatted digital signal at 1 544 Mbps The termination of a facility at a 745 multiplexer node A part of call set up during which modems exchange tones and adjust their receive levels A display that remains on the screen until you make one or more selections from it When selections are made the display is removed A transient display can also be removed by closing the display from which it was invoked These displays are used for cascading menus and word boxes Advanced error correction coding technique for primary data typically used on higher speed modems January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Glossary trending report tributary device trouble ticket undefined device Uniform Alarm Interface UAD unnamed site unplaceable site unsupported device user access user group User Interface Processor UIP upstream The results of a single ne
270. ing and Utilities Most commands use one or more pages referred to as input forms for command parameter input You can request that command results be sent to your terminal screen CRT a local or remote printer or request that NMS send results to the task s associated results queue The tasks with associated results queues are Manager Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking You can execute commands immediately or schedule commands for delayed weekly or monthly execution When entering command execution parameters you can use wildcard characters when specifying a group of devices which have profile relationships See Appendix E of this manual for a detailed description of wildcards and examples of their use The online Help feature includes form field pop up menus and field textual help Form help provides descriptions of a form s input and output requirements Field help provides pop up menus to select field values The textual help feature describes acceptable field entries which cannot be selected from a pop up menu for example a range of values There is also a general Help system available describing usage of function keys In addition to these Help features the NMS automatically populates fields with default values on many input forms User Access Security with Customization Capabilities The 6800 Series NMS System Administrator can control the user s access to particular devices or groups of devices to circuits n
271. ing the AMI s Edit Network utility 2 Unassign each equipment at the old location This is done by clicking on the equipment then selecting unassign from the displayed menu This causes the equipment to be removed from the location display 3 Display the new location to which the equipment is to be moved January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator 4 Select all the equipment from the unassigned equipment list that belongs in the new location and move it to the new location Each piece of equipment that was formerly assigned to the old location must be assigned to a new existing location 5 Delete the old location after each piece of equipment that was formerly at the old location has been reassigned to another location NMS Mail Message for a Successful File Transfer The NMS admin login will receive a mail message from uucp when an export file is successfully sent The format of the mail message is REQUEST machine name gt usr nms RNMS file_export lt filename gt gt lt AMI name gt iadm admin SYSTEM lt AMI name gt copy succeeded The admin login may also receive a mail message if a transfer failed due to a problem e g nuucp login failure no connection that the uucp utility can detect Therefore if a mail message is not received you should 1 Verify that the file was NOT received by the AMI 2 Try to resend the file If the file was an update file do not re exe
272. ins the line number 6 The final segment contains the drop number 15 which is the MACU itself 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Series 700 Multiplexer Addressing A typical Series 700 Multiplexer configuration is shown in Figure D 12 73x 73x 719 M2 211 NODE 215 NODE 212 NODE 214 NODE 216 M2 215 M2 212 M2 216 M2 217 NODE 213 NODE 217 M2 213 494 13825b 01 Figure D 12 Typical Series 700 Multiplexer Configuration Showing Connection from a 719 to a 735 719 72x 731 740 741 742 745 and 740 56K Multiplexer Addressing For the 719 72x NETWORKER the 731 74x ACCULINK multiplexer 74x 56K ACCULINK multiplexer and 7050 NSM the device address uses the following form m2 nnn Where m2 is the control channel number nnn is the node number of the multiplexer Valid ranges are from 1 to 249 Examples of multiplexer addressing are m2 28 m2 16 m2 13 D 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing Addressing Bytex Devices All Bytex devices are addressed through a logical control channel el The Bytex Unity Management System UMS is addressed using the following format el ums The device address format for the U30 and U50 switches is in the form el XXXXXXXXXXXXX Where el is the Bytex logical control channel and XXXXXXXXXXXXX consists of up to 13 lowercase alphanumeric characters representing the Port Name assigned for each dev
273. ions channel with separate transmit and receive pairs dedicated to one user only A device that provides the interface between DCEs or other types of major computer equipment with an input output bus or storage device and a data processing computer A user terminal with bit mapped graphics capability that is connected to a network management system processor via a 10baseT local area network LAN It supports all NMS features in a multitasking environment See basic feature workstation GL 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Glossary full duplex half duplex hold time iconification identity INFORMIX key sequence line signal compatibility link link delay link level address local address local area network LAN long form addressing The capability to transmit in two directions simultaneously The capability to transmit in two directions but not simultaneously An alert indicating a DDD modem repeatedly answers and enters the data mode but drops the connection before a useful exchange of information can take place The transformation of a window into a small rectangular object on the screen caused by clicking on the iconify icon Information about a particular data communications device consisting of serial number model number and software version number The relational database management system used by NMS A combination of keyboard keys which must be selected simultaneously to in
274. iplexer Management and Configuration Guide for information on assigning ports for multiplexers NMS port configuration is the process of identifying the characteristics of the devices connected to each user defined port Use the Edit Port Configurations edpc command for port configuration When you execute the Edit Port Configurations edpc command the first page of the input form prompts for the name of the processor Default processor names are set during installation They represent the host and UNIX Interface Processor UIP if configured Once the processor name is entered the assigned ports are automatically identified by the system based on the hardware circuit cards installed Refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for a detailed description of the edpc command External Systems Configuration Access from the NMS to external systems is provided through either the External Systems or Map task From either of these tasks you can bypass the NMS and enter into real time control access of the selected external system Initiating External Systems Connections To initiate an external systems connection select its entry from the External Systems menu A window opens If not it may be necessary to press Enter or Delete followed by Enter to establish the connection You access the External Systems task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu The external systems menu that displays depen
275. isplays a pop up Help screen explaining the function keys and how to invoke the Help feature On a full feature workstation it defines the Task Menu screen functions Tasks Help and Logoff Go F2 Instructs the system to execute a command CIrFld F3 Clear Field Clears the information from the selected field and positions the cursor at the first character position of the field PrevMenu F4 Previous Menu Displays the previously displayed menu MainMenu F5 Main Menu Displays the main menu of the task PrevForm F6 Previous Form Displays the input form of the command last executed Quit F7 On a full feature workstation Quit F7 closes the current task On a basic feature workstation Quit F7 closes the task and displays the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu This key is displayed only at the main menu level Cancel F8 Cancels any command in progress and brings up the previously displayed menu Key Descriptions for Input Forms The function keys available when using input forms are described as follows Help F1 Displays a pop up Help screen explaining the function keys and how to invoke the Help feature 2 34 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Go F2 Instructs the system to execute a command If you click on Go or press F2 but the input on a command form is incomplete or incorrect the command is not executed You receive a validation error message describing the error
276. it A system routine is a routine that is available to many users Alert driven routines ADRs are system routines that can be triggered by pre specified alerts or alert clears You can direct ADRs to one or more network objects This ADR feature includes the following capabilities e To execute a routine on the object device facility or channel channel module channel group etc reporting an alert or clearing of an alert or execute a routine on other user specified objects e To associate a single routine with multiple objects e To associate multiple routines with a single object ADR execution logic is based on the alert type alert duration and alert reporting object 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Command Execution Scheduling The command execution scheduling capabilities of the NMS permit users to schedule commands to execute immediately to execute at delayed times and dates or to execute weekly or monthly The 6800 Series NMS supports execution scheduling for commands in the Manager Performance Reports Trouble Tracking and Trouble Inventory Reports tasks Command Results Destination Routing You can request that command results be sent to your CRT a remote or system printer or your results queue Separate results queues are associated with the commands issued in the Manager Trouble Tracking and Trouble Inventory Reports tasks Up to 50 command results
277. ject List Windows section later in this chapter You use the Queue Results selection to open a Map Manager window to display the Queue Results submenu Queue results commands are available to Display List or Delete queue results items 6 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Routines Scheduled Items From site facility and device command menus selecting the Routines selection causes a Map Manager window to open The initial menu displays the Routines submenu enabling you to Create Display List Delete or Edit a routine From site facility and device command menus selecting the Scheduled Items selection causes a Map Manager window to open The initial menu displays the Scheduled Items submenu enabling you to Display List or Delete scheduled items Geographic Map Selections Based on Icon Selection Table 6 1 summarizes the selections of each of the Commands menus when an icon object is selected The table is based on the selection of a site icon a simple link icon a link containing one facility a cluster icon and a composite link icon a link containing more than one facility For a review on the definition of the icons refer back to the discussions in the Site Icons Cluster Icons and Link Icons sections earlier in this chapter Geographic Map Window Operations Based on Icon Selection Table 6 1 Window Selections Site Icon Simple Link Icon Cluster Site Icon C
278. l device profiles transactions The Monitor is updated automatically as alerts in the network are reported and cleared Alerts display in order of the time of occurrence with the most recent alert placed at the top of the list Alerts are automatically deleted from the list once they are cleared The Monitor task is available on both the full feature and basic feature workstations by selecting the Monitor task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu Selecting the Monitor task opens a window Figure 6 16 containing column titles and a three line textual description for each of the currently active alerts Monitor functionality differs between a full feature workstation and a basic feature workstation See Chapter 2 for a description of these differences i Z Hetwork Monitor Device Model Hetwork net Date Time Alert Type node244 745 net node244 02 25 10 18 13 60 00 m2 244 All zeros received Active Red carrier Link 5 HRCENOLLEDGED nade244 T45 net nodez44 02 25 10 18 12 54 06 m2 244 Clock source changed Old TS O Ti Derived 5 New TSI O T node244 745 net nade244 O2 25 10 10 10 67 00 m2 244 TS1 1 lost synch with clock from 05 1 module 3 UNACKMOWLEOGED nadez44 745 net node244 02 25 10 18 10 87 00 m2 244 TSI last synch with clock from D5 1 module 5 LHR KHOHLEDGED nade22 740 net node22 02 25 10 17 48 85 00 ma 22 P CPU can t communicate with channel module UNACKMOULEOGED L J 493 14282 Figure 6 16 Mo
279. l duration line speed of the call and the reason the call was disconnected Call Duration Distribution Report Use the Call Duration Distribution Report to obtain a sorted listing of 3800 Series device calls based on their durations You specify up to 10 different duration periods Calls are sorted according to the duration periods you specified The duration distribution is displayed in both tabular and bar chart form The tabular display also includes the average call duration the total number of calls and the standard deviation of the call durations Call Occurrence Distribution Report Use the Call Occurrence Distribution Report to obtain a display of the average number of calls that occurred for a selected group of 3800 Series devices for each hour of the day over a user specified time period The report also includes the average number of daily calls and the total number of calls included in the report Information is retrieved from the call statistics summary database Daily Historical Utilization Report Use the Daily Historical Utilization Report to obtain the percent utilization of a group of 3800 Series devices for each hour of the day for a user specified time The report also lists the average number of calls which occurred for each hour of the day Information is retrieved from the call statistics summary database Managing Call Statistics Using the Manage Call Statistics mcs command you can specify whether call statistics
280. le the user interface features such as on line help command line entry and command function keys Also the Manager task access via the map provides the following capabilities e Context sensitive access to Network Control commands Based on device type classification of a selected device selection of the Network Control options from the device s command menu displays a submenu of commands applicable to the selected device Context sensitivity applies to Network Control submenus of the Manager task These menus contain commands for modem DSU and multiplexer control diagnostics and performance reports Selecting Network Control opens an external system window if the device profile specifies an external system name e Access to Network profiles can be accomplished via the Manager task from the map window You can traverse the complete Manager task menu structure request and execute subsequent Manager commands e Access to routines scheduled items and queue results commands Selection of one of these options from an object s command menu displays the appropriate submenu of commands Used here the term object refers to facility site or device As within the Manager task window you can send command results to the CRT a remote or local printer and or the Manager results queue Accessing the Manager Task From the Map task you can access the Manager task in two ways 1 From the Map task command menu see Geographic Map Commands M
281. leared The message indicates the alert type or clear device reporting the alert and the time of the report ATR Remote Printer The ATR remote printer is a dedicated serial printer connected directly to the host processor or connected via a modem Command results and reports can be sent to this printer if remote is requested for the results destination This is the printer to which ATRs are sent if port is specified as the ATR destination When the Altos System 5000 is configured as a UNIX Interface Processor UIP it can be configured with the following cards e One optional Proteon Token Ring Network Interface Card e One optional IPC 1600 Ports card with 16 user defined ports Two UNIX Interface Processors must be configured in an Altos 15000 system One of the UIPs can have an IPC 1600 Ports card installed Host Cards and Ports The Altos System 5000 can be configured with the following ports cards Many of these ports are optional and are used only if required by the customer s configuration e Three system ports two serial ports and one system printer parallel port One IPC 1600 Ports card with 16 user defined ports e One optional dedicated IPC 900 Ports card for ANALYSIS NMS interface e One optional Emulex DCP 286i card for 3270 Terminal Emulation e One DCP MUXi 8 512 card for modem control channel interface A second DCP MUXi 8 512 card is optional however if installed the system cannot have the option
282. lection MAJ 3 MIN 0 HAN D Hew Mail Tue Feb 19 09 33 1991 Help Go CleFld Preultenu Hainllenu PrevForm Quit Cancel 491 13176 01 Figure 2 28 Manager Task Window on a Basic Feature Workstation 2 44 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started The following information is displayed above the function keys MAJ The total number of currently active major alerts priority 1 alerts MIN The total number of currently active minor alerts priority 2 alerts WRN The total number of currently active warning alerts priority 3 alerts New Mail Indicator Displays if new mail arrived in your mail queue To read mail you may either click on the New Mail icon or select the Read Mail option from the Utilities task date time Displays the system date and time The menu form functions labeled across the bottom of the window are invoked by pressing the associated function key The function keys on a basic feature workstation operate the same as the function keys for the Manager task on a full feature workstation Refer to the Manager Task User Interface section earlier in this chapter for a description of these function keys 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 45 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Monitor Task User Interface D d On a basic feature workstation the Monitor task window appears as shown in Figure 2 29 Hetwork Monitor enice Hodel Hetwork naet Date Time Alert Type
283. lert types and alert groups For these fields NMS always echoes the lowercase equivalent for characters you enter on the forms In all other fields NMS is sensitive to the case of the entered characters Any zero entered directly after a slash in any device address is ignored by NMS except on a multiplexer control channel where the multiplexer link number can be just 0 zero Refer to Appendix D for more information on multiplexer addressing E 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Naming Conventions Special and Wildcard Characters Special characters non alphanumerics can be used within device names refer to Device Names later in this appendix Wildcard characters are special characters that may be used to expand certain names and fields The following special characters are available Dot Ex Comma SPACE Blank Space i Asterisk Question Mark Exclamation Point Slash Dash all Keyword none Keyword Dot The dot may also be used as a level separator in the device fields device name network name circuit name serial number or facility name For example nyc atm reg Comma or Space Either the comma or a blank space can be used as field delimiters You can specify multiple device names by separating each one with a space or comma These device names can be of any allowable form For example 1 34 56 3 43 80 1 99 5 This example translates to three addresses
284. les and user groups filter values and channel group tables are transferred The following hardware components can be migrated e System printers and fault alert log printers can be re used e The host processor can be converted for use as a full feature workstation e Any 6386 full feature workstation can be updated with Release 4 0 NMS software and then connected to the Ethernet LAN for use in Release 4 0 NMS Release 3 X to 6800 Series NMS When you migrate the database from Release 3 X NMS to Release 4 0 6800 Series NMS all device profiles site profiles facility profiles vendor profiles historical alerts trouble tickets user profiles and user groups filter values and channel group tables are transferred 1 28 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction The following hardware components can be migrated e System printers and fault alert log printers can be re used e The host processor can be converted for use as the host processor or UIP for Release 4 0 e The basic feature workstation can be re used e The full feature workstation can be converted for use in Release 4 0 Release 4 X to Release 4 2 When you migrate the database from Release 4 X NMS to Release 4 2 6800 Series NMS all device profiles site profiles facility profiles vendor profiles historical alerts trouble tickets user profiles and user groups filter values and channel group tables are transferred The following hardware components can
285. les in Chapter 5 Filter Administration and Alert Processing in this manual ADR filtering does not apply to alert clear messages Therefore you cannot define delays for ADRs which are triggered by alert clear conditions ADRs are executed immediately on reception of an alert clear when triggered for such events ADR Filter Transactions Two NMS commands are provided for administration of ADR filter parameters e Display ADR Filter dsadrf command e Edit ADR Filter edadrf command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for detailed information and use of these commands 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 65 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Destination for Results for Commands and Routines All commands have a Destination for results field In some commands the entry in this field is protected meaning the user cannot change the destination Use of this field is also explained in this section Refer to Chapter 1 Introduction in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for specific information Use this field to specify the destination of the output from the command execution Valid options are crt remote Ip printer queue Multiple destinations can be specified Destinations are described as follows crt Causes the command results to display on your workstation screen You cannot schedule execution of the command
286. locating devices or facilities appearing on vendor invoices These reports are described as follows Connectivity Report Use the Connectivity Report to produce a tabular view of the connectivity information of devices and their connecting facilities based on your selection criteria This report is used to display information found on the Connectivity Map of a full feature workstation if you are a basic feature workstation user Device Inventory Report Use the Device Inventory Report to obtain a detailed listing of device information Device Report Summary Use the Device Report Summary to list the selected sort sequence fields in tabular columns with counts of the number of devices purchased and the number of devices leased as well as the sum of the two It also has subtotals of the number of devices per the selected sort fields You specify the records to be included in the report and order of sorting on the data by your selection criteria on the input form Facility Inventory Report Use the Facility Inventory Report to obtain a detailed listing of facility information You specify the records to be included in the report and order of sorting on the data by your selection criteria on the input form Facility Report Summary Use the Facility Report Summary to obtain the selected sort sequence fields in tabular columns with counts of the number of facilities Trouble Tracking Reports The Trouble Tracking Reports provide information
287. log Bridge AB and Dial Backup Unit DBU Configuration If you have modems DSUs and SRCUs installed in your NMS network you must configure these devices before NMS can interact with them Modem DSU and SRCU with associated ABs and DBUs support is an NMS software application package option Since some customers may not have these devices in their network configuration all information on configuring and managing these devices in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual Establishing the NMS Poll List The network reports alerts to the NMS through the NMS polling process Polling Modems DSUs The polling of modems or DSUs is an ongoing two step process whereby NMS first establishes a poll list of all control channel connected control modems or DSUs All DCE control devices with the exception of the ANALYSIS devices can be acquired for the NMS poll list The acmccpl command enables you to use the control channel s field to indicate which control devices are to be acquired for the NMS poll list When you execute this command and a device profile does not already exist for a local control device the NMS creates a basic device profile automatically for that device Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for details on this command Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support
288. luded to uniquely identify the NMS software installed for the customer The serial number of the software is assigned by the customer The current NMS software version number is supplied automatically during installation To facilitate remote access dial in maintenance service the maintenance telephone numbers for dialing into the maintenance port of the NMS can be stored as a part of the NMS configuration information When jobs are sent to the system printer the outputs include a one page printer banner showing date and time of the command execution and the User ID requesting the command You can control whether or not the printer banner is printed by setting the appropriate option in the NMS configuration record Updating the NMS Configuration Record The System Administrator updates the NMS configuration record via the Edit NMS Configuration ednmsc command When you invoke the command an input form is displayed for entry of NMS configuration information Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for details on executing this command Use the Display NMS Configuration dsnmsc command to display the NMS configuration record NMS Workstation Configuration The workstation configuration records are administrative records that identify all work stations physically configured on the NMS This information can be used by the System Administrator to aid in workstation troubleshooting maintenan
289. m help is accessed by entering ESC or pressing the F12 function key and field help is accessed by entering a NOTE The Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks do not support the F8 function key Cancel within their main menus but do support this F8 key function on their submenus and results forms Once a transaction is executed from an input form F8 Cancel does not work Pressing F8 during execution cancels the results form once the transaction completes In addition to access form help for forms associated with the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks you must use the F1 function key 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 37 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Trouble Inventory Reports ain Menuk 1 Alert History Reports 2 Inventory Reports 3 Trouble Tracking Reports 4 Results Queue Management 5 Scheduling Queue Management enter select ion ij is i FisHelp F2 Go F3 ClrFld F4 2Preullenu F5 llainllenu Fo PreuvForm Fr Quit j 493 14348 Figure 2 24 Trouble Inventory Report Task Window on the Full Feature Workstation Trouble Tracking Tain Menut 1 ditt Delete Trouble Tickets 2 dstt Display Trouble Tickets 3 edtt Edit Trouble Tickets 4 lett List Trouble Tickets 5 optt Open Trouble Tickets 5 Results Queue Management T Scheduling Queue Management enter se lect jons ee i FisHelp F2 Go F3 CIrFld F PrevMenu F5
290. m using the left mouse button to draw a box around any area in the displayed map When you release the left button the NMS automatically zooms to the delineated area The submenu selections are described in the following text NOTE Every zoom operation causes the Map to recalculate site clusters Occasionally you may notice unexpected clustering behavior when using the zoom options For example when you zoom out it is possible that two previously separate sites are now clustered Zooming causes the map to recalculate internally its gridding system Sites previously in separate grid boxes the size of a grid box is four site cluster icon diameters on a side can become grouped into a single grid box when zooming in only a slight amount Zoom In By 2x When you click on the Zoom In By 2x selection using the left mouse button the selection is executed immediately This selection doubles the magnification factor of the map view resulting in more detail but less overall area on the mapview The new map view midpoint remains the same as the previous map view with less geographic area displaying in your window Whenever possible the NMS changes cluster icons to individual site icons if appropriate This zoom operation does not work if your current map view is at maximum magnification showing only tens of square miles Zoom Out By 2 This selection causes the new map view to reduce in size by a factor of two if compared
291. menu Use the mouse on the basic feature workstation only when using window control functions supplied by the Microsoft Windows software The mouse is not supported on the basic feature workstation within NMS tasks Looking at the mouse with the mouse cord away from you use the buttons as follows left button Performs 6800 Series NMS functions For example use this button to select items from menus icons in the Map task window icons etc You can also use this button to move windows Once you release the button the operation is immediately executed middle button Used most often in the Map task available only on a full feature workstation Use this button to select and deselect icons and to define a boxed area of a Geographic Map this action is referred to as creating a candidate subview Once you release this button the box you defined remains on the screen without any operation being executed 2 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started NOTE You must use the left mouse button to select and execute an option to affect the area defined using the middle mouse button right button Used to restore lower or close a window This is done by selecting this button over a window title bar and dragging to the desired function NOTE The full feature workstation should be operated with the Num Lock key in the On position The Num Lock key enables the numeric keypad at the far right of the keyboar
292. minal or printer NMS generates an ATR based on user defined filtering and authorization criteria when an alert is reported A single alert can trigger up to four ATRs sent to four separate destinations including remote printer s or terminal s If you subscribe to NetCare Support one of four possible destinations for an ATR is a remotely located NetCare support center At this center support personnel can receive the ATR and begin to troubleshoot diagnose the problem NetCare support personnel can also dial into the NMS for the purpose of diagnosing the problem 1 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Standard and Customized Reports With INFORMIX relational database capabilities you can generate standard database reports These reports can help track network alarms detect potential problems within the network and obtain inventory reports NMS provides a standard set of Alert History Reports Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking Reports An optional INFORMIX SQL Reports Customization software package enables you to create custom reports You can tailor reports in both content and format to meet your specific needs Also you can integrate your customized reports into the NMS menus and scheduling system NMS can route reports to a user s CRT a remote or system printer or a user s results queue You can schedule reports for immediate delayed and or repeated execution Audit Trail Tool Providing Usage and Security
293. missions to NMS users to cut through to the external system Access to an external system can be granted to a user by specifying the name of the external system or the keyword all in the External Systems field on the user profile form 4 For brouter SNMP devices specify the cut through name in the External System field on the device profile form This will allow cut through from the 6800 Series NMS network map For details on the edesc edup crup crdp and eddp commands refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual I 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 6800 Series NMS X Window Cut Through Network Configuration 6800 Series Full Feature Workstations Running X One Server On each 6800 Series NMS full feature Sun Workstation Altos 486DX 33 Altos SX 20 or generic 386 486 PC from which cut through to a TCP IP external system will be allowed add the external system s host name and IP address to the XONE HOSTS file Note that the full feature workstations must have a 1 Mb video card supporting 256 colors For more information see the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide Network Configuration 6800 Series NMS Sun Workstations On each 6800 Series NMS full feature Sun Workstation from which cut through to a TCP IP external system will be allowed perform the following steps 1 Log in as root on the Sun Workstation 2 Add the exte
294. mit network control monitoring and testing information between devices in the network and the network management system It shares the same physical transport facilities as the primary data network A network of devices distinct from the primary data transmission network that originates with a local device on the control channel and extends to the remote termination points See control channel A method of restoring service for data communications during a private line failure by switching the data traffic to the public telephone network A device used to establish a data channel on the public telephone network and to switch data traffic there during a failure of the private line data channel See Dual Call AutoAnswer A cross connect device for T1 facilities allowing for the establishment of cross connects between individual DSO channels in different T1 circuits 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 GL 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Direct Distance Dialing DDD Digital Data Service DDS digital signal level 0 DS0 digital signal level 1 DS1 downstream Dual Call Auto Answer DCAA Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF elastic store event event log printer facility facility profile 4 wire private line front end processor FEP full feature workstation The DDD network is also known as the public switched network See APL Within AT amp T and the Bell Operating
295. mmunications automatic backup of the leased line is not supported DATAPHONE II Direct Distance Dialing DDD Modems These modems are capable of full duplex synchronous or asynchronous data transmission over the switched telecommunications network at speeds up to 9 6 kbps The DDD modems collocated with the 6800 Series NMS have a control channel interface that allows monitoring by the 6800 Series NMS These modems interface with the 6800 Series NMS through the Shared Diagnostic Units SDUs Each SDU oversees up to eight switched network modems and are fully addressable by NMS NMS Supported Data Service Units DSUs NMS supports the following DSU products DATAPHONE II 2600 and 2700 DSUs These DSUs are designed for multipoint and point to point applications The 2600 Series DSUs provide digital full duplex network data transmission over the DATAPHONE Digital Service DDS and the ACCUNET Switched 56 Service and do not have diagnostic capabilities The 2700 Series DSUs with a secondary channel capability provide digital full duplex synchronous data transmission over DDS facilities plus full nondisruptive diagnostic capabilities COMSPHERE 3500 Series DSUs These DSUs are capable of speeds up to 64 000 bits per second on the DATAPHONE Digital Service network or equivalent Digital Data Services network The primary channel characteristics of these DSUs are identical to 2500 Series and 2600 Series DATAPHONE II DSUSs therefore you c
296. mulates direct workstation connectivity from the 6800 Series NMS to the target system Cut through access to external systems can also be achieved via the Map task 3270 Terminal Emulation Providing Access to SNA Based Hosts and Software for Altos 5000 Systems Only NMS supports a 3270 Terminal Emulation option to provide access to SNA based mainframes and software from both full feature and basic feature workstations The External Systems and Map tasks support the 3270 Terminal Emulation by initiating a cut through to start the 3270 Terminal Emulation process VT100 Terminal Emulation The 6800 Series NMS supports a DEC VT100 terminal emulation for cut through to external systems requiring a vt100 interface VT100 support will be limited to only the full feature workstation For more information on VT100 support see Chapter 3 1 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Asynchronous Terminal Support The 6800 Series NMS asynchronous terminal support increases the number of terminals and terminal emulators that can be used as basic feature workstations For more information on asynchronous terminal support see Chapter 2 Sun Workstations Generic X Terminal Support The 6800 Series NMS supports Sun Workstations and X Terminals as full feature work stations with full software support Sun Workstations must be running Sun OS and OpenWindows Generic X Terminals must be running MS DOS Version 5 0 or above and either the GrafPoi
297. n An additional 16 ports are optionally available using the UIP On the Altos 15000 System two UIPs must be configured For an illustration of the UIP configuration refer to the Host Cards and Ports description in this chapter Network Printer Support Support for printers connected to processors over a 10BaseT Network is available to NMS users through the UNIX Remote Line Printing RLP feature and modifications to NMS which interface with RLP The user must define the remote printer to the UNIX operating system and then send print jobs from NMS to the newly defined printer 1 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction System Capacity Table 1 1 lists the system capacities for the 6800 Series NMS NOTE Although Table 1 1 lists the maximum capacities for individual system features these capacities may vary depending on system load and network configuration Table 1 1 1 of 2 6800 Series NMS System Capacities Cin gst toe System System Capacity Capacity Capacity Number of Simultaneous Users 12 42 Full feature Workstations 6 241 Basic feature Workstations 11 18 User Profiles 250 250 250 Control Channels 8 82 16 Total Facility Profiles 10 000 10 000 10 000 Total Site Profiles 7 500 7 500 7 500 Total Vendor Profiles 500 500 500 Total Device Profiles managed and unmanaged s 10 000 10 000 15 000 Total Device Groups 50 50 50 Local 3800 Series Mo
298. n in a windowing environment This is the standard terminal type used by the 6800 Series NMS The cs10 and scx terminal types are provided to allow customers upgrading from an older system to continue using their existing terminals Other terminal types may also be used The cs10 refers to the Colorscan 10 terminal manufactured by Datamedia This type of terminal was used with early versions of the AT amp T System Controller product and was referred to as the DATAPHONE II terminal The scx terminal types are the System Controller workstations These are software packages similar to the NMW that allow the PCs to emulate a Colorscan 10 terminal These terminal types were used with Release 1 and Release 4 System Controller NMS as a replacement for the Colorscan 10 and have both standalone and Microsoft Windows based versions Any terminal type listed in the terminfo database may be used to communicate with the system console on the host computer 8 To select the terminal type TYPE the appropriate terminal type number PRESS Enter The COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Login window appears Figure 2 9 If using Windows 3 0 you can enlarge the window by clicking on the mouse button twice If you are using Windows 2 1 you can enlarge the window if you PRESS Alt F10 2 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Session Configure Comsphere G amp 00 HMS Login Password 491 13106a Figure 2 9 CO
299. n on establishing system security assigning each user to a functional access user group creating user profiles updating the NMS configuration record and updating the workstation configuration records Establishing System Security Introduction NMS security provides the NMS System Administrator with control over user access to network devices commands alerts the Network Map Monitor and Summary tasks via the network partitioning feature The NMS System Administrator is able to restrict the user s access to groups of specifically defined devices circuits networks or control channels In addition an individual user or groups of users may be restricted to specific commands or sets of commands against those customized groups of devices Lastly the NMS System Administrator can restrict users viewing to specific alerts on their Monitor display and to device groups and alerts on their Map display 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 4 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System This ability to flexibly grant or deny specified users access to devices or NMS commands is accomplished through the definition of device groups user groups and user profiles Device groups identify sets of devices defined either by name address circuit network or control channel User groups identify sets of NMS commands which are executable by users who are assigned to those groups User groups will be discussed in a later section Lastly the reporting
300. nager Tech Manager Administrator Channel Network cnl Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Loopback Tech Manager Administrator Channel State Summary css All Levels Yes Yes Manager Channel Summary cs All Levels Yes Yes Manager Channel System Test cst Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator Circuit Loss Inbound cli Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Circuit Loss Outbound clo Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Circuit Quality cq All Levels Yes Yes Manager Clear Call Directory clcd Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Clear Event No No access level No No Monitor abbreviation assigned No No Map Compare Control ccp Manager Yes Yes Manager Processors Administrator Configuration Change ccn All Levels Yes Yes Manager Notification CCN Enable Disable ccned Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Connect Time Utilization ctu All Levels Yes Yes Manager Connectivity Report cr All Levels No Yes Trouble Inventory Reports Control Processor Test cpt Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator Copy Routine rpc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Indicates what is shown on the screen 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table B 1 5 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine S
301. nal IZ ink Any device that cannot be classified under one of the other device types Map Icons The following icons are used on the Map Certain aspects of these icons may vary slightly from the ones displayed on your workstation e site e cluster link soos acknowledged link Window Icons Single site Multiple sites in a single icon Single or multiple facility Indicates an acknowledged alert on the facility The window manager uses the following symbols with the standard 6800 Series NMS iconify Ir resize Menu bar m maximize minimize Transforms the window into a small rectangular shape on the screen Resizes the window Present for all windows although some may not have the resize capability Displays the window manager menu from which either Lower or Close may then be selected Toggles the window to the largest allowable size and back again Available only form Map and Monitor windows 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 C 3 Overview Device Addressing OVELVIEW gt Luna edat web REI tes oh ES ee UOS Seb OE PE D 1 Addressing Schemes 5 AV ds hate A a dts b AI eed ao D 2 Link Level Address 00 2 eee eect eee nee D 2 Short Form Addressing 0 0 cee D 3 Address Management sees D 3 DATAPHONE II Mode Addressing 000 000 eee eee D 4 DATAPHONE II Mode APL and DDS Addressing D 4 DATAPHONE II Mode DDD Addressing
302. nation of the two separators dash and dot NMS finds any name that matches the given string with the question mark replaced by any string that does not contain either a dash or dot The question mark is only allowed in the following fields e Device address e Network name e Circuit name e Facility name e Device name e Serial number e P Address A typical use of the question mark could be 1 12 101 This means all the devices that have a network address of 101 that are exactly two levels below 1 12 If the following are the sequential addresses device A 1 12 201 204 101 device B 1 12 201 101 device C 31 12 201 101 201 101 then 1 12 101 would address all three devices whereas 1 12 101 would only address device B If you entered the following net atm 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 E 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NMS would translate any network of the form net anything atm where anything is a set of alphanumeric characters without a dash or a dot You can also use the question mark as the first character in a field before a separator For example 2 2 has NMS search for all devices on all control channels with an address of 2 Only one question mark per device naming group is allowed You cannot use the question mark and asterisk in the same device naming group Exception Character An exclamation mark is an exception character Use this character if another wil
303. nctions for ATRs e Initializes the ATR ports e Enters the phone numbers or port numbers and call retry information in the ATR phone directory e Enters the ATR authorization and automatic trouble ticket generation authorization in the profiles e Administers the automated action filters e Administers ATR states e Enters ATR report header information in the system configuration database Use the Edit Port Configurations edpc command to define the ports to be associated with ATRs This command is accessed from the Manager task and is discussed in Chapter 4 You can define the ATR port as either a dial or dedicated port Authorize ATRs To authorize ATRs you must change the AUTHORIZATIONS ATR field from off to the ATR phone directory for the specified device via the Edit Device Profile eddp command You can enter more than one ATR phone directory via this field An ATR will be sent to the destination specified in the named directory for the alert group appropriate to the alert reported 7 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Trouble Tracking Automated Action Filters The automated action filters are used to filter alerts for ATRs and automatic trouble tickets There is an automatic action filter for each alert group of every device type Each of these filters is a duration filter You can display and edit the automated action filters See the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual
304. nd close will be suspended until Num Lock is toggled on again The Screen input operations are not affected by the Num Lock setting Full Feature Workstation Window Icons and Command Buttons The full feature workstation provides task windows menus and symbols to help manage windows The Map and Monitor task windows pop up menus and form helps also utilize scroll bars described later in Chapter 6 Figure 2 19 shows the labels for the window menu and symbols 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 25 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System ICONIFY SYMBOL SYMBOL RESIZE SYMBOL LI MENU BAR MAXIMIZE MINIMIZE SYMBOL RESIZE RESIZE SYMBOL SYMBOL 493 14262 Figure 2 19 Windows Menus and Symbols on a Full Feature Workstation The windows menu and symbols are described as follows Symbols Resize Symbols You can resize the Map Monitor Summary task windows and some pop up menus using the resize symbols These symbols are located in each of the four corners of the window To resize a window position the mouse pointer on one of these symbols Then press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse This causes the window to move in the direction of the selected corner Releasing the mouse button repositions the window on the screen If you drag the diagonally opposite corner of the window in or out you change the size of the screen accordingly In the Geographic Map the view of the
305. nd formatting information and for results forms This information is used to determine what data to display or print The reports available from this menu are described as follows Alert and Trending and Exceptions Reports NMS provides two types of management reports for examining alert records and alert activity in the network 8 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Reports Trending Reports Use Trending Reports to analyze the performance of a specific device by formatting the results of repeated network tests into a tabular display A Trending Report runs a single test a specific number of times then presents both detailed and summary statistics on the test results Trending Reports assist in analyzing data for short term testing to determine the failure rates of problem devices or for long term testing to determine device degradation over a longer period of time Trending Reports can be run on the following tests Automatic Network Test ant Call Fault Read cfr Circuit Loss Inbound cli Circuit Loss Outbound clo Circuit Quality cq Device Test det Digital Test dit End to End Test eet Modem Bit Error Rate Test mbert Offline Test ot Receive Signal Level rsl Receive Signal Quality rsq Signal Profile sp The COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual describes these commands in detail 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 8 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Se
306. nd label as requested Insert a new tape Please mount next tape and press Return to continue PRESS Enter 9 When the backup is completed the following messages are displayed Level 0 archive is 100 percent completed date date time displayed Tapes required to restore the system to the state at the beginning of this archive Archive level 0 Archive date date time displayed Logical log unique id at the beginning of the archive xx Program over Verify tape readability please wait Wait until the following message appears Press RETURN to continue PRESS Enter 10 If backup was performed with the NMS stopped you will need to start the system up again by selecting Start the system from the 6800 NMS Menu TYPE PRESS Enter 11 To return to the 6800 NMS Menu TYPE 11 PRESS Enter 12 Wait until the light on the tape drive goes off then remove the tape This completes the procedure for system database backup 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 4 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Restoring the System Database The Database Restore procedure is recorded in the TMPFILE usr tmp restorelog file This file stores detailed information concerning database restore activities The NMS cannot be running when you perform a restoral Perform the following steps to restore the system database 1 From the 6800 NMS Menu select Restore system database TYPE 5 PRESS Enter The following message app
307. nes for the 3600 Series DSUs in one of two methods described as follows Method 1 This method uses three options commands Change Options cho Change Port Speeds chpsp Change Port Options chpo commands a Execute all three commands to the model and configure the model as necessary for your template in the order shown b Create a routine and place the three commands in the routine using the model s device address c Execute the routine to the target device supplying the device address at the time of routine execution Method 2 This method uses only a single option command within the routine saving performance and network traffic at the time of the routine s execution a Execute all three commands Change Options cho Change Port Options chpo and Change Port Speed chpsp to the model and configure the model as necessary for the template b Create a routine and place the Change Port Speed chpsp command in the routine with the model s device address c Execute the routine to the target device supplying the device address at the time of routine execution The reason Method 2 works is as follows Although the Change Port Speed chpsp command only displays the port speed options it is actually retrieving all the device options i e port options device options and port speeds and sending them back to the device Therefore the routine has actually stored all these options from the model and is downloading
308. netuork View aa Zoom em zl zl 493 14273 Figure 6 7 Map Command Menu Select this menu item and a window labeled Map Manager opens This window initially displays the Manager task main menu See Figure 6 8 You can access network test command submenus from the Network Control submenu as you would in the Manager task 6 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks i Manager mn oO Hain Menu System Management 2 Network Control 3 Routines Queue Results 5 Schedule Items enter selection EBENEN Maintenu 4983 14259 Figure 6 8 Manager Window Invoked from Map Command Menu 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Network Test Access from a Selected Object You can access the set of NMS supported network tests for a specific managed network object Select either the object icon or the object name from a displayed Object List When the object icon name for a managed object is selected the command menu for the object appears The menu includes the item Network Control as shown in Figure 6 9 For devices managed by external systems see the External Systems Configuration section in Chapter 3 tap Manager Hetwork Control 1 Device Diagnostics and Fault Isolation 2 Network Configuration and Administration 3 Performance Reports enter selection aS
309. ng selection criteria and formatting information and results forms Results forms are displays or printouts of information you requested on the input forms The following sections discuss each selection listed on the Trouble Tracking menu These sections do not provide detailed descriptions of the commands See the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for command descriptions 7 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Trouble Tracking Trouble Tracking Tain Menut 1 ditt Delete Trouble Tickets 2 dstt Display Trouble Tickets 3 edtt Edit Trouble Tickets 4 latt List Trouble Tickets 5 optt Open Trouble Ticket 5 Results Queue Management T Scheduling Queue Management enter select cr ij is i Fi Help F2 Go F3 ClrFld Ft2Preullenu FS 2llainllenu Fo PreyvForm Fr Quit J 493 14350 Figure 7 1 Trouble Tracking Menu Delete Trouble Tickets The Delete Trouble Tickets function is used to delete old or unnecessary trouble tickets from the database You can only delete those trouble tickets with a closed status You delete trouble tickets using the Delete Trouble Tickets dltt command You can also access the Delete Trouble Tickets function from the Trouble Tickets menu Display Trouble Tickets Use the Display Trouble Tickets function to obtain a complete list of the trouble tickets in their entirety available in the database that meet the selection criteria you enter on
310. nia 165 29 E 21 34 S 64 New Zealand 172 16 E 42 128 9 Auckland 174 47 E 36 55 S 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 F 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table F 1 8 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 3 Christchurch 172 40 E 43 33 S 4 Wellington 174 47 E 41 17 S 505 Nicaragua 85 58W 12 52N 555 Granada 85 59 W 11 58 N 531 Leon 86 52 W 12 24 N 2 Managua 86 18 W 12 06 N 234 Nigeria 9 50 E 10 16 N 1 Lagos 3 28 E 6 27 N 47 Norway 10 23 E 63 36 N Bergen 5 20 E 60 23 N Oslo 10 45 E 59 56 N Stavanger 5 45 E 58 58 N 968 Oman 57 30 E 22 22 N 92 Pakistan 66 38 E 29 01 N 51 Islamabad 73 08 E 33 40 N 507 Panama 79 54 W 9 21 N 675 Papua New Guinea 142 32 E 6 40 S 595 Paraguay 57 40 W 25 15S 21 Asuncion 51 Peru 74 15 W 13 10 S 54 Arequipa 71 32 W 16 25 S 14 Lima 77 03 W 12 06 S 63 Phillipines 124 35 E 12 29 N 2 Manilla 120 58 E 14 37 N 48 Poland 19 28 E 51 49 N 351 Portugal 8 05 W 40 31 N 1 Lisbon Lisboa 9 08 W 38 44 N F 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 International Dial Codes Table F 1 9 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 974 Quatar 51 36 E 25 15 N 40 Romania 22 55 E 45 33 N 0 Bucharest Bucuresti 26 07 E 44 25 N 670 Saipan 145 45 E 15 12 N 39 549 San Marino 12 26 E 43 56 N 966 Saudi
311. nitor Task Window 6 32 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Each alert entry contains common fields labeled from left to right across the top of the window The network address for the device and the text description correlating to the alert code are shown respectively on the subsequent two lines The first of the three lines contains information correlating with the common labels displayed across the top of the Monitor window These fields are described as follows Device A mnemonic device name is assigned to the device by the user in the device profile If an alert is displayed with no name there is no device profile for the device associated with that alert This alert can therefore not be stored in the historical alerts database when the alert is cleared To store the alert use the Create Device Profile crdp command to create a device profile for the device Model The model number of the reporting device is supplied automatically by the NMS from the device profile for that device Network net The network name is assigned by the user in the device profile for that device Date Time This is the NMS date time of alert occurrence Alert Type This is the NMS alert type of the alert For ACCULINK multiplexers the alert type is the major minor code reported by the multiplexers For other devices the alert type is a mnemonic used to classify the alert The second line of information fo
312. nnel Group dscg All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Control Signals dscs All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display User Group dsug Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Display Device Group dsdg Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator Indicates that an existing command was modified for this release B 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Command Access Levels Table B 1 8 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Display Device Profile dsdp All Levels Yes Yes Manager Map Monitor Display Display Filter dsdf All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display DSOB Base dsdbc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Channels Display DS 1 Channel dsdcmc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Module Configuration Display Exception dsert All Levels Yes Yes Manager Reporting Thresholds Display External Leads dsels All Levels Yes Yes Manager States Display External System dsesc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Configuration Display Facility Profile dsfp All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Line Designator dsld All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Logical Link dsll All Levels Yes Yes Manager Display Multiplexer dsmcc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Component Configuration Display NAP dsnapc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Configuration Display NMS dsnmsc All Levels Yes Yes Manager Configuration Display Node dsncp All Levels Yes
313. nnel group schedule this report to run once every 24 hours DDS Channel Performance amp Status ddscps Use the DDS Channel Performance and Status Report to obtain network errored seconds loop errored seconds loop side signal losses and loop side signal status for each DDS channel This report is generated by executing the DDS Channel Performance and Status ddscps command When intermittent problems occur on the DDS channels schedule this report to run every 24 hours DDS Channel Trouble Codes ddsctc Use the DDS Channel Trouble Codes Report to obtain the number of multiplexer out of sync abnormal station test unassigned multiplexer condition and DSOB out of sync codes received for each channel This report is generated by executing the DDS Channel Trouble Codes ddsctc command When intermittent problems occur on the DDS channels schedule this report to run every 24 hours DSOB Performance amp Status dps Use the DSOB Performance and Status Report to obtain the errored seconds frame losses and framing status for each DSOB base channel configured on a node This report is generated by executing the DSOB Performance and Status dps command When intermittent problems occur on the DSOB channels schedule this report to run every 24 hours Equipment Performance Report epr Use the Equipment Performance Report to obtain the number of each type of node alarm event that occurred at a node since the last statistical
314. nor warning and the columns relate to the device types APL DDD etc NOTE If multiplexer or ANALYSIS NMS support is not installed some columns to the right side of the default Summary window are not labeled and their cells are inactive Hetwork Summary SYS MUS SHTCHATHE APL OOO OOS UND ASTRAL 6510 4938 14284 COLOR REPRESENTATION Figure 6 18 Sample Network Summary Window The default Summary window appears as follows Each column represents a category while each row represents a priority level within that category Thus for example the second column first row cell a cell is a row column intersection in Figure 6 18 represents the number of major alerts on multiplexer devices currently active Each cell contains a numeric representation of the number of alerts meeting the category s selection criteria and the cell background color associated with the highest priority level alert recorded for that cell Inactive cells assume the background color of the window and do not reflect any numeric information If you change the Summary s color code scheme via the Edit Color Code edcc command the changes take effect once you close and then reopen the Summary window 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 37 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Customizing the Summary The Summary consists of a 30 cell matrix 3 rows by 10 columns with each cell representing a category Each alert cate
315. nt X One software product or another manufacturer s X11 R4 server package Management of Unsupported Devices Using NMS you can view access and manage unsupported devices via external system cut throughs such as VT100 and 3270 initiated from the Map task or External Systems task to the management systems controlling the unsupported devices You create device profiles for these devices to store pertinent device information Token Ring Network Interface for Altos 5000 Systems Only The Token Ring Network Interface enables users to use the NMS with an existing Token Ring Local Area Network LAN When using this feature the Ethernet card must be disabled and an additional Token Ringer Interface Card must be installed for communications between the host UIP and full feature workstations The Token Ring feature also supports importing SNMP traps and cut through to X11 based applications Interface to the ANALYSIS NMS The NMS interface to the ANALYSIS 6510 enables NMS to receive and store alert and configuration data from the devices managed by an ANALYSIS NMS The 6800 Series NMS provides alert management functions such as alert filtering alert storage trouble tickets and management reports for these devices The ANALYSIS NMS device alerts are displayable on the Monitor Summary and Map tasks To send commands to the ANALYSIS devices you must open a cut through session from the 6800 Series NMS to the ANALYSIS system Two different methods
316. nt system to ensure that the NMS sends the message as frequently as the receiving system expects it If the UAI connection is dropped and then re established the user can specify that the NMS send information about currently active alerts that occurred before the connection was re established Alternatively the user can specify that the NMS send information only for alerts that occurred after the UAI connection is established This option is specified in the Send active alerts on restart field in the Edit Uniform Alarm Interface eduai command In order for alert information to be sent UAI authorization must be turned on for the device reporting the alert and the alert must pass both the NMS processing filters and uniform alarm filters Depending on how the user has administered the UAI connection in the Edit Uniform Alarm Interface eduai command the NMS will send alert information only or both alert occurrence and alert clear information Alarm Text Message and Clear Text Message The NMS user can specify the content of the UAI alarm text messages to be sent to the receiving system via the Edit Uniform Alarm Interface eduai command The alarm text message can include user text as well as device network NMS and alert information The alarm text message may include variable parameters which are read in from the actual network alert message or provided by the NMS Variables within the message are denoted by number and must be enclose
317. nventary Reports El Hain Menu 1 Alert History Reports 2 Inventory Reports 3 Trouble Tracking Reports 4 Results Queue Management 5 Scheduling Queue Management enter selection Fl Help Fe Go F3 ClpFld F4 PrevNenu Fo Naintenu Fo PrevForm Fr Quit 491 13174 01 Figure 8 1 Trouble Inventory Reports Task Menu All reports commands display input forms for entering selection criteria and formatting information and for results forms This information is used to determine what data to display or print The reports available from the Trouble Inventory Reports menu are described as follows Alert History Reports The Alert History Reports are used to locate devices that have experienced an unusual amount of alert conditions or to discover alert trends over a period of time These reports are described as follows Alert Report Summary Use the Alert Report Summary report to obtain a summary of historical alerts based on your entries on the input form Detailed Alert Report Use the Detailed Alert Report to obtain a list of all selected alerts 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 8 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Inventory Reports The Inventory reports are used to provide an inventory of devices facilities or the connections between the two types of hardware as specified by your selection criteria The usage of these reports depends on your sort criteria In general these reports assist you in
318. o NMS e Transient problems within a node e A change in the state of a hardware module e Channel group connects or disconnects e Changes in the configuration of the network e Status of calls made through a 719 NETWORKER e Statistics that are accumulated by a node By executing the Change Node Configuration Parameters chncp command you can configure the classes of events forwarded from event log 2 By using the Monitor and Map tasks you can view events accumulated by NMS The format of events that can be displayed on the Monitor are described in the Monitor task section earlier in this chapter and in detail in Chapter 6 5 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Modem Events B oom T45 54 01 245 fr ratby gt CPU D State Change 02 24 01 17 14 ans 7T45 54 01 245 CPU D State Change 2 24 91 17 26 fr 100g 3 145 54 07 245 stby PC Bus O State Change T45 541 07 245 PC Bus 1 State Change 0224791 17 34 fr vatby gt T45 53 12 245 act DS 1 0 Frame Slips maint 027 25 91 05 26 fr act gt T45 31 07 245 stbu PC Bus State Change 745 54 07 245 PC Bus 1 State Change 02 25 91 05 40 Warning 7T45 54 01 245 CPU D State Change 02 25 91 05 41 fr istbu gt T45 54 D1 245 act CPU O State Change 02 25 81 08 50 fr act gt 745 50 02 245 stbu Control Mode Entered 745 50 06 245 Reconfiguration menus 02 25 91 09 05 fr istby gt T45 50 02 245 ons Control llode Entere
319. o SNA Based Hosts and Software for Altos 5000 Systems Only VT100 Terminal Emulation 0 0 0 0 e eee eee ee Asynchronous Terminal Support 0 0 00 02 eee eee Sun Workstations Generic X Terminal Support Management of Unsupported Devices 0000000 Token Ring Network Interface for Altos 5000 Systems Only Interface to the ANALYSIS NMS 0 00 00 e eee Interface to Bytex Unity Management System Uniform Alarm Interface to StarKeeper NMS and to ACCUMASTER Integrator eese File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator 04 SNMP Trap Export eese s ee e ere be ee ee ES Interface to IBM s NetView PC and NetCare NVI Automatic Trouble Reporting ssseeeeeeeeeee Standard and Customized Reports 0 00 00 esses Audit Trail Tool Providing Usage and Security Violation Information 4b uve oo eM au use e ene sca ade akut Automated Trouble Tracking System for Network Problems with Customization Capabilities lel eese Personal System and Alert Driven Routines Command Execution Scheduling 000 000 0000005 Command Results Destination Routing selle esses Online Database Backup lsseeeeeeeeeeeeeee Automatic Database Backup and Restore 0 000 User Mall eueiesseuetbesneri tete e d eii b User Interface Processor UIP 2
320. o reflect alert activity The Geographic Map provides a site level view of the network By selecting site icons on the Geographic Map you can display device level views of the network These device level views are referred to as Connectivity maps The map displays only the sites and facilities to which you have access 1 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Key features of the NMS maps include e Automatic generation of maps from device facility and site profile information e Context sensitive access to profile and network control commands only those commands applicable to the device site or facility selected are presented to the user Also command input forms are automatically populated with identification information for example device addresses obtained from the selected object s device facility and site profiles e Cut throughs to external systems Monitor Real Time Textual Notification of Alerts NMS dynamically updates the network monitor to reflect current alert activity The Monitor task provides color coded text indications of these alerts You can select an alert entry on the monitor and perform a variety of functions such as acknowledge the alert clear events obtain reports on active alerts and execute device profile commands Each NMS user can customize his her network monitor to display selected subsets of alerts based on his her area of responsibility or interest The map displays only the sites
321. o remains the default if you open a new Geographic Map window or select the Zoom To Default View selection using the Zoom selection Once you set the default view it is not affected by closing the map window terminating the Map task logging off the system or system shutdown This default view can be altered only when you again execute the Set Default View selection on a new map view When Subnetwork View is selected the Geographic Map only displays what is selected using the edesc command After selecting the Subnetwork View you can return the display to its original view by choosing the Full Network View selection on the command menu Zoom Option The Zoom selection invokes the Zoom Options submenu Figure 6 3 The options on this submenu provide the following selections i Zoom Bc Zoom In By 2x Zoom n To SubWiew Zoom Out By 2x Zoom Dut To World View zoom To Default lieu Zoom To Network Wiew Zoom To Previous Wiew 493 14272 Figure 6 3 Zoom Submenu e Increase the magnification of the current map view Zoom In By 2x e Decrease the magnification of the current map view Zoom Out By 2x e Change the current map view to a previously established map view Zoom Out To World View Zoom To Default Network or Previous View e Change the current map view to a newly defined subview using the subview function Zoom In To SubView 6 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks You can also zoo
322. oad the stored options from model to the target device simply supply the target device s address Your target device should now be optioned correctly 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 59 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Considerations for Creating Routines as Options Templates Depending on the device you must be aware of certain considerations especially when dealing with CHANGE commands For example the COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs and the 3600 Series DBMs make use of options banks These are special storage areas within the firmware which hold the option straps The DSUs have three separate banks of options the DBMs have a single bank for options and a second bank for their local phone numbers Different NMS options commands affect different portions of the DSU and DBM option banks However internally some commands may affect more banks than you actually see Specifically the Change Port Speed chpsp command only displays the port speeds options yet the command first retrieves all three banks of options from the device displays only the speeds then sends all the options back to the device Thus those options not displayed are erased Because of this anomaly you must be careful when using the chpsp command within the options template You can use it to your advantage if you understand its application An example of this is described in the following paragraphs You can configure options template routi
323. of alerts is customized by defining which devices reporting which alerts will be displayed on the Monitor and Map windows The network summary customization is handled separately from that for the Monitor and Map displays Logical Network Partitioning Procedures Prior to executing any NMS commands the NMS System Administrator must establish which devices circuits or networks will be grouped together These groups will define those parts of the total network which individual users will access or affect The System Administrator should examine how naming these devices circuits or networks will assist in defining the groups through the use of wildcard characters when making entries in NMS commands fields The number of device groups allowed in the NMS is fixed at 30 The NMS System Administrator should next establish the various levels of NMS command access The Logical Network Partitioning feature is delivered with four levels of command access predefined Administrator Manager Data Technician and Help Desk These levels are incorporated in the NMS as user groups 1 through 4 Groups 5 through 30 are available for any other level of command access desired by the NMS System Administrator Once the device groupings and user command access levels are determined the System Administrator can enter them in the NMS using the Edit Device Group eddg and Edit User Group edug commands respectively Groups can be displayed using the Display Device G
324. of connection for cut throughs are available Interface to the Bytex Unity Management System The NMS interface to the Bytex Unity Management System UMS enables the NMS to process alerts received by the UMS from the Bytex Matrix Switches connected to the UMS The NMS will provide alert filtering alert management and storage automated trouble reporting trouble tickets and UAI reporting for the alerts 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Uniform Alarm Interface to StarKeeper NMS and to ACCUMASTER Integrator The 6800 Series NMS Uniform Alarm Interface UAT feature allows transfer of alert information to a StarKeeper SK or ACCUMASTER Integrator AMI With the UAI feature you can specify on a per device basis whether alert information should be sent The 6800 Series NMS supports both basic and enhanced versions of UAI Basic UAI is used when transferring alert information to older versions of the AMI or SK Enhanced UAI is used when transferring alert information to new versions of the AMI or SK For more information on the UAI feature refer to Appendix G File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator The 6800 Series NMS supports a File Export feature to transfer device site and facility profile information to the AMI Once information has been transferred from the 6800 Series NMS the AMP s File Import Export Utility is used to load the received information into the AMI database For more in
325. of the action The mail message includes the following information e The routine name and list of commands contained in the routine e Time date of the routine execution e Triggering condition alert type or clear e Object whose alert report caused the ADR to be executed e Object s on which the ADR was executed e ADR results destinations remote printer system printer and or user queues An example of the mail format is as follows ADR routine name executed on targeted objects Triggered hh mm ss mm dd yy by alert or alert clear from reporting trigger object trigger object Commands list of command included in the routine ADR results have been sent to lists those that apply system printer name remote printer at phone number dedicated ATR remote printer User queues list of logins NMS uses separate ADR filters for determining how long the alerts must persist before an ADR triggered by them is executed These filters allow selective filtering on a per device type and per alert group basis of alerts for ADR execution ADR filter settings determine the amount of time an alert must persist before an ADR is triggered As with other alert filters you can modify the filter values associated with each defined alert group for a specified device type You can also specify exceptional filter values used for individual devices or device groups Default ADR filter parameters are defined in the alert filter parameter tab
326. ofile for a vendor that is referenced in a device profile or a facility profile that profile is automatically updated accordingly to reflect a null blank value in the Vendor name field Display Vendor Profile dsvp Displays vendor profiles Edit Vendor Profile edvp Used to change the information in an existing vendor profile If you change the name of a vendor in a vendor profile the new name will be automatically reflected in the device profiles and facility profiles that referenced the original vendor name 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NMS Port Configuration When your NMS is installed the printers terminals and basic feature workstations representing your network configuration are connected to the ports in the NMS processor The actual ports available for these connections are dependent on the hardware ports cards installed in your system For a review of these port cards refer to the 6800 Series NMS Hardware section in Chapter 1 Port usage on the IPC 900 IPC 1600 cards and on the parallel Ipt and serial COM A and COM B ports on the NMS is user defined while port usage for the connection of the 3270 Terminal Emulation option DCP 286i card and for the ANALYSIS NMS option dedicated IPC 900 card is fixed within the system Ports for ACCULINK multiplexers are assigned during NMS installation Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Mult
327. ol of that system s environment Refer to Chapter 3 in this manual for notes on external system interfaces to external systems supported by NMS via cut through sessions Performance Reports User Interface The Performance Reports task provides access to alert and trending reports call statistics and multiplexer performance reports Functionally this menu is the same as the Performance Reports menu under Network Control in the Manager task The function keys available for use in this task are the same as those used by the Manager task Refer to the section Manager Task User Interface for more information Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking Tasks User Interface You interface with the Trouble Inventory Reports task and the Trouble Tracking task via the keyboard These tasks do not support the use of the mouse When you select the Trouble Inventory Reports task the window appears as shown in Figure 2 24 When you select the Trouble Tracking task the Trouble Tracking window appears as shown in Figure 2 25 The function key options shown at the bottom of the windows are identical to the function key options used in the Manager task except Cancel F8 is not available and you must use the keyboard to select the option Refer to the previous discussion of these function keys under Manager Task User Interface You access all Help features form and field help from within these tasks as you would from a basic feature workstation For
328. oma 719 t0 735 sosse tL be c Meet etes D 20 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 v COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System List of Tables Table Page 1 1 6800 Series NMS System Capacities sleeeeeeee ee 1 13 1 2 6800 Series NMS Base Application Package Software 1 22 1 3 Optional Software Hardware Packages 0 0 00 e eee eee ee eee 1 23 2 1 Non Routinable Commands in NMS 0 0 00 eee eee eee 2 55 2 2 Object Identification Information for Multiplexers 0 0 2 63 5 1 JDefaultColorCodes 2 la esa Ee OGLE ES aus Hates eee gs 5 10 5 2 Communication Products Alerts 0 0 00 eee eee 5 18 5 3 ANM Generated Alerts Events 0 0 0 c ccc cece nee eens 5 23 5 4 ANM Generated Alerts Events 0 0 0 0 eee eA 5 24 5 5 ANM Generated Alerts Descriptions Corrective Actions 5 24 23 6 Bytex Alerts S cca eee Side te ek ode Rei ee LIS NONE EU GE tm 5 25 27 System Alerts 2 renlkee EPA WIL M EE ENCENEXS NECK 5 25 6 1 Geographic Map Window Operations Based on Icon Selection 6 15 6 2 Object List Window Operations Based on Object Selection 6 17 6 3 Connectivity Map Window Operations Based on Icon Selection 6 19 6 4 Alert Category Cell Mapping 0 00 eee eee eee 6 38 6 5 System Default Category Assignments 0 0 00 02 ee 6 39 7 1 ATR Phone Directory 1 fo
329. omposite Link Icon Alert Management Selection Available only when selected object is reporting an alert Invokes submenu Available only when selected object is reporting an alert Invokes submenu Available only when selected object is reporting an alert Invokes submenu Available only when selected object is reporting an alert Invokes submenu Connectivity Map Selection Never available Always available Never available Never available Network Control Selection Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Never available Never available Network Profile Invokes Map Never available Never available Never available Selection Manager submenu Object List Displays device list Displays facility list Displays site list Displays facility list Selection Queue Results Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Routines Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Scheduled Items Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Object List Windows O
330. on edpc command input forms before working on the Edit External Systems Configuration edesc command input forms Every entry added to the edesc command input form will indicate an external system to which you can connect When you add an entry for an external system you must enter the port group you used during Edit Port Configuration edpc command input to let the NMS know how to connect to that external system There is one exception When the external systems interface is to hosts through telnet you specify port group as 0 When adding another modem to an existing modem pool it is not necessary to add another entry to edit the external systems configuration For only one modem or one modem pool to be connected with multiple external systems each external system must have a separate entry and must reference the same port group Use the Display External Systems Configuration dsesc command to display the external system configuration Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for detailed information on the Edit External System Configurations edesc and Display External Systems Configuration dsesc commands 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Assigning User Access to External Systems You can give users access to each external system by assigning the system in each user s user profile See the Edit User Profile edup comm
331. on the Utilities main menu This selection provides a submenu listing the Manage Routing Utility selection Refer to your COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Management and Configuration Guide for information on this utility 9 10 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Model Numbers Overview Overview This appendix provides a list Table A 1 of device model numbers that can be entered into the Model number fields of certain NMS commands e g Create Device Profile crdp command Table A 1 1 of 2 Device Numbers ANALYSIS Controller 86510 ANALYSIS DMC Device Types adc vhs168mx 3430 00m 3460 10m mpx2400 vhs168sm 3432 00 3460 20 mpx4800 vhs19200 3440 00 3462 10 mpx48mx vhs192mx 3440 00m 3462 20 mpx9600 vhs192sm 3440 05 3465 13 mpx96mx emudmc 3440 05m 3470 00 mpx96rp macu 3440 20 3478 05 mp144dmc mmss 3442 00 3478 05m mp144dmx 2656 3442 20 3480 10 mp144dsm 2656sc 3450 00 3480 10m vhs14400 2696 3455 00 3480 20 vhs144mx 3420 00 3456 in 3482 10 vhs144sm 3422 00 3456 ni ddsin vhs16800 3430 00 3460 10 ddsni ANALYSIS RD Device Types acu mp9600 mp144mx mpx9600rd Idmrd mp96mx mp144rsm mpx96mxrd Isi2400 mp96rp mpx2400rd mpx96rprd mp4800 mp14400 mpx4800rd 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table A 1 2 of 2 Device Numbers COMSPHERE 3400 4400 APL Modems 3430 02 4464 12 4444 19 3480 22 3431 02 34
332. onal set of list messages the default being the current message Read Nall ta Altos UNIS System U Mail version 3 2 Type for help usn spool mail admin 30 messages 28 new 30 unread N 20 nms on Jun 28 15 42 9 267 Mail from Manager Scheduler H 19 nms on Jun 28 15 42 9 267 Mail fram Manager Scheduler H 18 nms on Jun 28 15 42 98 287 Mail fram Manager Scheduler H 17 nms on Jun 21 10 54 17 897 ATA Feedback Messages N 16 nms on Jun 21 10 53 16 649 ATA Feedback Messages H 15 nms on Jun 21 10 42 98 289 Mail fram Manager Scheduler H 14 nms on Jun 21 10 42 98 287 Mail from Manager Scheduler H 13 nms on Jun 21 10 42 12 365 Alert Log Feedback Messages N 12 nms on Jun 21 10 35 19 485 system printer job status H 11 nms an Jun 21 10 35 8 280 Mail fram Manager Scheduler H 10 nms on Jun 21 10 35 89 287 Mail from Manager Scheduler HO 9 nms on Jun 21 10 35 97267 Mail from Manager Scheduler N nms on Jun 21 10 34 9 287 Mail from Manager Scheduler N 7 mms on Jun 21 10 34 97 287 Mail from Manager Scheduler N 6 mms on Jun 21 10 34 9 287 Mail from Manager Scheduler H 3 mms Hon Jun 21 10 34 9 267 Mail from Manager Scheduler N 04 nms on Jun 21 10 34 9 287 fail from Manager Scheduler NH 3 mms on Jun 21 10 34 11 346 Dedicated ATR Printer Feedb U 2 mms Fri Jun 18 03 04 12 426 CRHI U 1 nms Thu Jun 17 03 04 12 325 CRAM amp zi 493 14287 Figure 9 2 Initial Read Mail Screen 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 9 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Ser
333. onfiguration Guide For activating modem polling refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 17 System Administration OVELVIEW Lvl wp We ERR PE Ux eS EFC Ep VELIM P E 4 1 Managing the NMS User Database lsseeeeeeeee 4 1 Establishing System Security 2 1 0 0 0 0c ee eee eee eee 4 1 Logical Network Partitioning Procedures 00 00 ee eee 4 2 NMS Configuration Information 00 cee eee eee eee ee 4 3 Updating the NMS Configuration Record 00005 4 3 NMS Workstation Configuration 0 0 c eee eee eee 4 3 Updating Workstation Configuration Records 4 3 Backup and Restoring the System Database 0000 4 4 Automatic Backup and Restore 00 c eee ee eee eens 4 4 Disk Storage Requirements 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 4 4 Manual Backup and Restore 0 00 c eee eee eee ee 4 5 Performing System Database Backup 00 005 4 5 Restoring the System Database 00000 eee eee 4 8 Overview This chapter provides information for administering the NMS Most procedures and commands referenced in this chapter must be performed by a System Administrator with sufficient system knowledge of INFORMIX UNIX and the NMS Managing the NMS User Database The following sections provide informatio
334. ontrol channel identification which is al It can be in the range from al a6 B This segment is the line The line value can range from 1 to 150 except when the address is for an ADC refer to Addressing Analysis Data Concentrators C This segment is the drop The drop value can range from 1 to 255 Each ANALYSIS has its own control channel Similarly the link level address for Drop 14 in Figure D 10 would take the form a1 6 14 where the control channel identification is al The value 6 in the second segment represents the line and the value 14 in the final segment represents the drop Note that the MACU is not included Also note that the facility itself can have a link level address Therefore the link level address for Line 6 would be a1 6 The segment representing the drop is omitted Addressing ANALYSIS Data Concentrators The link level address for ADC 2 shown in Figure D 10 would take the form al 2 where the control channel identification is al which is followed by two slashes This convention alerts the NMS to recognize an ADC rather than a line The value 2 in the final segment identifies the specific ADC The value range for this segment is 1 to 50 D 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing Addressing Multidrop Auto Call Units MACU The link level address for the MACU shown in Figure D 10 would take the form a1 6 15 where the control channel identification is al The second segment conta
335. or a list of all valid international country and city codes recognized by the NMS The system uses the concept of grid boxes to decide when to aggregate site icons into cluster icons a grid box is four site cluster icon diameters on a side NMS considers all sites located in the same grid box on the map close enough to require clustering thus they all become components of the same cluster 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The name of a site or a cluster appears below its icon on the map Many clusters may display without names because their component sites have no common prefix based on their naming scheme refer to Appendix E Naming Conventions NMS does not adjust the placement of icons to prevent overlapping of icon names So it is possible for some icons and or icon names to be obscured by others You can adjust these placements by executing the Edit Site Profile edsp command to manipulate the information in the Longitude Latitude Country code or City code fields accordingly Placement of Unnamed Site on the Map If you do not specify a name in the Site name field in the device profile NMS assigns the device to the unnamed site If you do not explicitly update the site profile for the unnamed site with location information and the site contains one or more devices NMS handles it as an unplaceable site and places the unnamed site at the default site location see Defaul
336. or channels hardware modules logical links channel groups and network connectivity e State summary displays for channels time slots nodes and supervisory data links SDLs 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System e Statistics reporting e Multiplexer management reports e ACCULINK Disaster Recovery Support e New polling process and alert handling of multiplexer devices Modem DSU SRCU Support NMS provides the following capabilities for managing Paradyne and DATAPHONE II modems and DSUs e Centralized alarm and event reporting e Diagnostic test and command support e Configuration management e Callstatistics for COMSPHERE 3800 Series modems NMS provides the following capabilities for managing Service Restoration Control Units SRCUs e Configuration and alert management for SRCUs Analog Bridges ABs and Dial Backup Units DBUs e Cut through access to SRCU s ASCII interface for diagnostic test command support External Systems Access The 6800 Series NMS External Systems task allows cut through to the ANALYSIS Network Management Systems DPII System Controllers SCs multiplexer terminal interfaces DATAPHONE II 839A Dial Backup Unit DBU Control Units Bytex U30 and U50 Matrix Switches and Unity Management System UMS SNMP Brouter devices and DCX 850 Multiplexers Cut through support is also available for 3270 sessions The External Systems task si
337. orms are automatically populated with the information about the selected alert where applicable The input forms are also automatically populated with information about the device reporting the alert You can then execute the command or edit the input form parameters as needed Network Control Option You can also access Network Control commands from the Monitor using the same method as when accessing Network Control from the Map task Acknowledging Alerts from the Monitor Use the Acknowledge Alert selection to acknowledge a selected alert displayed on the Monitor When you select the Acknowledge Alert selection from the Monitor s task menu all audible and visual alert indications are turned off for that alert If other Monitor sessions are active in the system and are displaying that alert the audible and visible indications for the acknowledged alert are turned off for those displays The indicators are also turned off on the Map displays If other unacknowledged alerts are still being reported to your workstation the audible indicator will continue Alerts can be acknowledged automatically by the system based on the audible and visual indication time out parameters set via the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command as discussed in Chapter 5 under Customizing Alert Attributes and Criteria Clearing Events from the Monitor Use the Clear Event selection to delete events from the active alerts list Events are informational messages thus
338. orra 1 30 E 42 30 N 54 Argentina 59 30 W 34 42 S 1 Buenos Aires 58 30 W 34 40 S 51 Cordoba 64 11 W 31 25S 41 Rosario 66 41 W 61 Australia 133 52 E 23 42 S Melbourne 144 58 E 37 45 S Sydney 151 10 E 33 55 S 43 Austria 14 39 E 47 44 N 222 Innsbruck 11 25 E 47 17 N 22 Vienna 16 22 E 48 13 N 973 Bahrain 50 50 E 26 00 N 32 Belgium 5 07 E 50 41 N 3 Antwerp 4 25 E 51 13 N 2 Brussels 4 21 E 50 50 N 501 Belize 88 30 W 170 00 N 8 Belmopan 88 48 W 17 13 N 3 Orange Walk 88 31 W 18 06 N 591 Bolivia 64 48 W 17 128 2 La Paz 68 10 W 16 30 S 55 Brazil 50 25 W 10 26 S 61 Brasilla 47 57 W 15 45 S 21 Rio do Janeiro 43 17 W 22 53 S 11 Sao Paulo 46 39 W 23 33 S 237 Cameroon 13 05 E 5 12 N 56 Chile 72 10 W 36 37 S 2 Santiago 70 40 W 33 30 S F 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 International Dial Codes Table F 1 8 of 11 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States Country City or Area Code Code Location Longitude Latitude 32 Valparaiso 71 40W 33 05 S 57 Colombia 72 16 W 3 38 N 58 Barranquilla 74 50 W 11 10 N 1 Bogota 74 05 W 4 38 N 23 Cali 76 30 W 3 24 N 59 Cartagena 75 33 W 10 24 N 506 Costa Rica 83 52W 9 50 N 357 Cyprus 33 10 E 34 59 N 2 Nicosia 33 21 E 35 09 N 42 Czechoslovakia 17 07 E 49 29 N Brno 16 40 E 49 13 N Prague 14 26 E 50 06 N 45 Denmark 9 34 E 56 10 N 8 Aalborg 10 00 E 57 00 N 1 Copenhagen 12 34 E 55 43 N 2 Copenhagen 12 34 E 55 43 N 593 Ecuador 78 26 W 1 30 S
339. ort to obtain the number of errored seconds and failed seconds on each serial synchronous time slot at a 740 741 node Serial synchronous time slots are used to connect to 756 terminations When intermittent problems occur on serial synchronous connections schedule this report to run once a day 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 8 13 OVERVIEW Lo ute WEN ER Bao RE ONCE PAESE CRI IA bee 9 1 UNIX ACCESS x statu Sal ek PAA e p edad aS 9 2 INPORMEX AGceSS 45 eds der eoe oO a e eee tt Dea 9 2 Mail Functions ee rx RDUM PT E TQCUru Re PE E 9 2 Read Mall 5 five Be lees eae so tea ees eee ete dein n 9 3 Send Mail pisses e ceti tolus aco bat Mass ges havo kaye S 9 7 NMS Users List eeiam r ner eea semi let Seb ok tle BAY ook gus 9 8 Printer Functions A A B A E A A E EE E hae 9 9 Printer Status oii pir heats e AA E QA aa aA ERE 9 9 Moye Print Jobs eei a Bike A VR E aara EDS 9 10 User Interface Processor UIP 2 0 0 0 ccc cece eens 9 10 Multiplexer Utilities 0 eee 9 10 Overview To list the utilities available from the NMS select Utilities from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu The Utilities task menu appears as shown in Figure 9 1 E oom Utilities Unix Informix Read Mail Send Mail HNS Users Printer Status Nowe Print Jobs UIP Multiplexer Utilities L adi 494 14264 01 Figure 9 1 Utilities Task Menu 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 9 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management
340. orts a different addressing scheme Addressing Schemes The DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode addressing scheme applies to DATAPHONE II devices 3600 Series DSUs and 3400 4400 Series modems operating in the DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode It consists of DATAPHONE II local addresses DATAPHONE II port addresses and DATAPHONE II network addresses The Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode addressing scheme applies only to 3400 4400 Series modems 3600 Series DSUs and 3800 3900 Series modems operating in the Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode It consists of 3400 4400 Series modems network addresses The DATAPHONE II and Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode addressing schemes differ significantly in the following aspects e Link level address concatenation e Address range e Short form addressing e Address management Link Level Address Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary s network address However when devices communicate across links the link level or sequential network address must be used The link level address for a particular device is a concatenation of addresses It begins with the control channel and the address of the local control modem and continuing along the diagnostic tree adds each device s address and ends at the particular device This address which is stored by the NMS permits each modem in the network to have a unique path over the diagnostic
341. otally eliminates alerts or eliminates transient alerts from displaying on the NMS workstations or alert log printer When an alert passes the display filter a message is printed on the alert log printer and each user s alert selection criteria is checked to determine if the alert is to be shown on the user s Monitor and Map displays User selection criteria can be customized via the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc command If a category in the network summary is defined for the alert it is tallied in the corresponding cell in the Summary window You can change the display filter values via the Edit Display Filter eddf command You can display the filter values via the Display Display Filter dsdf command Audible and visual attributes are administered via the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command When the alert passes the display filter and is enabled for audible acknowledgment all full feature workstations that display the alert generates a beep indicating that the alert is a new unacknowledged alert When the alert has been automatically or manually acknowledged the workstations stop beeping due to that alert However if there are other unacknowledged alerts being sent to the full feature workstation the beeping continues 5 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Visual Filter When the alert passes the display filter and is enabled for visual acknowledgment the Monitor displays
342. ou do either function by entering specific schedule Queue Management commands discussed in the following sections You can access the Scheduling Queue Management from Trouble Tracking task menu which is displayed as shown in Figure 7 3 Trouble Tracking oO a Scheduling Queue Management 1 disi Delete Scheduled Items 2 desi Display Scheduled Items 3 lssi List Scheduled ltems enter selection ij is i Fi Help F2 Go F3 ClrFld Ft2Preullenu F3sMaintenu Fo PreyvForm Fr Quit Fo Cancel i 4983 14352 Figure 7 3 Scheduling Queue Management Submenu Use these commands to Delete Display or List scheduled items Trouble Ticket Escalation When a trouble ticket is not resolved by the time the escalation date is reached a mail message is sent automatically to the user specified in the Assigned to field of the trouble ticket If this field does not contain a valid User ID the mail is sent to the user specified in the Opened by field Customizing Trouble Tickets You can customize trouble tickets to meet your network s needs If you have the optional INFORMIX 4GL software package you can customize trouble tickets by adding modifying and or deleting fields in forms or by creating tables in the database For more information on customizing trouble tickets refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Reports and Trouble Tracking Customization Guide 7 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Trouble Tra
343. ouble Tracking ATR Reports There are two types of reports e Reports automatically generated and sent to a service center or a user specified ATR destination e Standard reports generated through the Trouble Inventory Reports task An ATR sent to a service center is comprised of the alert description and information extracted from the NMS database records Figure 7 4 shows typical information in an ATR report AUTOMATIC TROUBLE REPORT Customer Address Data Communication Mgr Mgr Telephone No Trouble Device Information Alert Type Alert Group Alert Date Alert Time Device Name Device Address Network net Device Serial Version 4 H Model Device Type Site Name dsab apl service 10 09 90 16 27 17 apl 22 1 11 1 14 2024a apl unnamed Device User Contact Information User Name Telephone No Address Alert Driven Routine Information ADR Authorization ADR Routine Name ADR Destination ADR User ID NMS Information NMS Serial NMS Version Remarks Figure 7 4 Automatic Trouble Report off ID VERSION 491 13534 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 7 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The information in this report is described as follows e Customer Data data provided by the System Configuration database Customer Name Customer Address Customer Contact Name Contact Telephone Number NMS Serial Number Soft
344. ough 8 inclusive or by pressing the F8 function key if the function keys are available 2 40 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Terminal Type To access the Pg Up Page Up key type the following three keys in sequence one at a time ESCpp To access the Pg Dn Page Down key type the following three keys in sequence one at a time ESCnp The following limitations apply to asynchronous terminal support Trouble Tracking Task and Trouble Inventory Reports Task The Trouble Tracking task and Trouble Inventory Reports task do not support the three key sequence for the function and paging keys They require terminals with eight numbered function keys and with correctly programmed termcap descriptions to operate properly Paging for these tasks is available by pressing one of the following CTRL N for next page CTRL P for previous page Hold the CTRL key down and then press n or p Manager Task If your terminal does not have color only the text will distinguish between major minor and warning counts in the summary display The color chart for the Edit Color Code edcc command will be all black on non color terminals Asynchronous terminals do not support the following commands Trending Reports tr graphical portion only Edit Color Code edcc External Systems Task Cut through from a terminal other than an NMW SCX R1 SCX R4 or CS10 is not supported To find or develop a suitabl
345. ow control condition caused by too much command traffic to the ACCULINK network Temporary flow control conditions will automatically clear Otherwise possible solutions include reducing the rate of polling and or decreasing the number of concurrent NMS com mands routines that send commands to the network 00 04 Device Agent Protocol Error This alarm occurs if the device cannot interpret poll commands sent to it by the ANM application or if the ANM application cannot interpret poll responses received from the node The alarm may occur briefly if a rare garbled command or response is processed by the device or the ANM application In this case the alarm should clear automatically on the next poll cycle If the alarm does not clear then it is likely that polling of the device is not supported Turn off polling of the device by editing the device profile 00 06 Cannot route commands to device This alarm occurs if no SDL path to the node exists Establish an SDL path to the node and the alarm will clear on the next poll cycle 00 128 Device Database Mismatch This event occurs if the device profile indicates that the device is of one type but the device itself indicates that it is of another type Edit the device profile and make the device type and firmware version match the actual device Then manually clear the event For information on how to clear the event manually see Chapter 6 Alert Group Assignments With ANM Release 3 2
346. owing steps to back up the system database 1 From the 6800 NMS Menu select Backup system database TYPE 4 PRESS Enter The system displays the following prompt The database backup consists of files directories used with the INFORMIX database and the INFORMIX database itself To perform a database backup the NMS can be running or stopped Checking NMS system please wait Wait until the following message appears Check for database index errors before performing backup y n y 2 To continue TYPE y yes PRESS Enter The following message appears Performing database error check Database error check is continuing please wait Database error check is continuing please wait Database error check is continuing please wait 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 4 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Wait until the following message appears Database error check has been completed Please insert cartridge tape Type Vc to continue or q to quit and then press Enter 3 Insert a cartridge tape TYPE c To continue PRESS Enter The following message appears Backing up files directories please wait Wait until the following message appears Verifying tape readability please wait Wait until the following message appears Backup of files directories completed Please remove tape and label it Database Files Directories Backup DO NOT USE THIS TAPE TO BACKUP THE IN
347. own in Figure D 3 4 31 1 66 D C B A network address a port address local address SS control channel 490 11940 Figure D 3 Typical 3400 4400 Series Modem DATAPHONE II Mode Address A This segment is the control channel on which the device is located The control channel identification can be a number from 1 to 8 for the 6800 Series NMS B This segment is the control device s local address There can be up to 256 addresses on a single control channel NOTE In DATAPHONE II addressing local addresses range from 11 to 328 The values 0 and 9 are not permissible for the last digit D 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing C This segment is a port address For COMSPHERE devices in DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode this is a dummy address that always bears the value of 1 A null port address is permissible and is defined as 1 NOTE Because 3400 4400 Series modems do not use a port address in their link level addresses a default port address can be assumed by the NMS only when the address is clearly a DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode address The NMS identifies the address as such only when the local address is in the range of 257 to 328 which is an illegal range in Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode D This segment represents the network address of any device on the secondary or diagnostic channel Tributary devices on a multipoint ci
348. p down arrow keys to highlight the name and then pressing Enter 2 Entering the number of the command in the enter selection field on the menu display 3 Entering the command abbreviation in the enter selection field of the menu display The following sections discuss command abbreviations command input and output forms and the common fields on these forms Command Abbreviation Conventions As previously mentioned you can request a command by entering its abbreviation in the enter selection field in a menu display For example you would type eddp to request the Edit Device Profile command In this manual all command abbreviations are shown italics Command abbreviations have a simple syntax Typically the first part of the abbreviation is an abbreviated verb the second part is the abbreviated object of the command If an object name is more than one word the first letter of each word is used for example Create User Profile is crup The abbreviated verb prefixes are as follows ac acquire br break cp copy cr create ch change dl delete ds display ed edit ls list mk make op open S set sn send Some commands do not have initial verbs These commands use the first letter of each word to form their abbreviation for example dar for Detailed Alert Report and ccn for Configuration Change Notification Some exceptions exist where if the aforementioned rules were applied the result wo
349. parameters of the Digital Test dif command e Tone frequency input parameter of the Circuit Loss Inbound cli and Circuit Loss Outbound clo commands e Connection conditions states input parameters of the Channel Group Summary cgs command 2 A parameter that does pertain to identification of the object s devices on which the command is executed For example device addresses channel group names link numbers etc You must specify the required input parameters of both Types 1 and 2 defined above during the creation of the routine If the routine is executed as an Alert Driven Routine however the user specified Type 2 parameters may be functionally replaced with system provided parameters The term system provided refers to the ADR and alert subsystems which provide the capability to import parameter values obtained from incoming alert messages into ADR command input forms For information on ADRs refer to Alert Driven Routines later in this chapter You create a system routine by copying a personal routine to a system routine using the Copy Routine cpr command In copying a routine you do the following e Identify the routine to be copied e Assign a name to the routine copy e All system routines names require sys prefix System routines can be displayed by a user but can only be executed by users with the permission to execute all the commands in the routine NMS allows up to 500 system routines 2 54
350. pe alert duration and the alert reporting object Also the ADR feature provides flexible user notification which includes sending ADR results to selected users Only a system routine can be used as an ADR and only the System Administrator can create or modify ADR criteria The System Administrator establishes an Alert Driven Routine by specifying execution criteria for a routine using the Edit ADR Criteria edadrc command For details on this command refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual Object Identification for ADRs The ADR subsystem uses incoming alert information to determine the objects devices to which ADRs should be directed Each alert report from network devices contains information identifying the device reporting the alert Some alert reports contain additional information identification such as a specific link or module to which the alert applies This identification information is generally referred to as object identification information Based on the information the ADR can be directed to a specific device link or module Depending on the source and type of alert reported one or more objects may be identified in the incoming alert message Also depending on the commands included in the ADR the object identification information for one or more of the objects may be used as input to the ADR You should ensure that the commands included in a routine to be used as an ADR
351. per left hand corner of the screen Button Window Help Click on the Help button to display general help information Tasks Click on the Tasks button to display the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu Logoff Click on the Logoff button to terminate the NMS session NMS prompts for confirmation before terminating the session Workspace Menu Shuffle Up Selecting Shuffle Up changes the order of the stacked windows by moving the window to the top The new window on top becomes the active window 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Shuffle Down Selecting Shuffle Down changes the order of the stacked windows by moving the active window i e the top window to the bottom and the second window in the stack to the top The new window on top becomes active Refresh Selecting Refresh redraws the entire screen including the active and inactive windows Print Selecting Print initiates a screen capture The captured screen is printed on the local copy printer This option is only available if a printer port has already been configured Quit Selecting Quit allows you to quit the NMS A confirmation prompt will appear before you can quit Note that XONE remains up and running Help Feature NMS provides online Help to assist you in command input and execution You can access help from windows forms and from fields on a form Accessing Help in Windows Help can be accessed
352. please wait Database error check has been completed The AT amp T Paradyne NMS system has been successfully started Press RETURN to continue PRESS Enter to redisplay the 6800 Series NMS Menu 7 To select Return to Console login from the 6800 Series NMS Menu TYPE 11 PRESS Enter The following prompt appears Console Login 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 8 9 At the Console Login prompt TYPE ffw PRESS Enter at the Password prompt TYPE the password defined for the ffw login PRESS Enter The login window for the full feature workstation appears Figure 2 2 i CONSPHERE 6800 HIS i Login Password Ba Figure 2 2 Login Window 493 14258 TYPE admin the System Administrator s login and PRESS Enter TYPE the password defined for the admin login PRESS Enter If you enter an incorrect login or password and want to retry an Error window appears Click on the OK button using the left mouse button This clears the window and you are again prompted for the login A successful login causes two windows to display the 6800 Series NMS Button window and the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu Figure 2 3 For information on how to open task windows from this menu refer to Opening Task Windows later in this chapter 2 6 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Manager Nap Monitor Summary Ex
353. pose the routine Subsequently NMS displays the input forms for each command listed in the routine so that you may identify the input parameters required for each command to execute Each user has a set of personal routines Likewise NMS has a set of system routines that are accessible to anyone with the proper permissions Only the creator and System Administrator have display and access privileges to a personal routine A personal routine cannot be directly copied to another user s set of personal routines To transfer personal routines from one user to another the personal routine must first be copied to a system routine then the other user must copy the routine to his her personal set You can also edit delete display and list personal routines using the appropriate command see the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for execution information on each command Each User ID can have up to 30 personal routines Specification of Routine Input Parameters System Routines When NMS displays the input forms for each command included in the routine you specify values for the command input parameters Each input parameter to a routine command is classified as either one of the following parameter types 1 A parameter that does not pertain to identification of the object s devices on which the command is executed For example e of test blocks to be transmitted and duration of network test input
354. quest Automatic Trouble Reporting ATR and automatic trouble ticketing The Trouble Tracking task and its features are described in this chapter Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual for detailed information on trouble tracking commands 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 7 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Trouble Ticketing Using the NMS Trouble Tracking task you can manually open create display edit list and delete trouble tickets You can view trouble tracking command results that were sent to the results queue via the Results Queue Management selection You use the Scheduling Queue Management selection to view manipulate scheduled trouble ticket commands Trouble tickets can also be generated automatically if automatic trouble ticket generation is authorized in the device profile database Trouble tickets provide a way to keep track of a problem from the time it occurs to the time it is resolved A trouble ticket can be opened for problems in the network or problems with equipment You can generate trouble tickets for any types of devices reporting problems alerts multiplexers APL modems DSU devices DDS devices bytex devices and SNMP brouter devices You can also generate trouble tickets for devices not directly managed by NMS and for any type problem For example you can generate a trouble ticket for a user s terminal that does not work properly
355. r Backup Node Database bkupnd Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Bit Error Rate Test bert Help Desk Data Yes Yes Manager Tech Manager Administrator Indicates what is shown on the screen B 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Command Access Levels Table B 1 2 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Break Channel brcc Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Connection Administrator Break Channel Group brcgc Manager Yes Yes Manager Connection Administrator Break Logical Link brllc Manager Yes Yes Manager Connection Administrator Calibrate Tributary ctt Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Transmitter Administrator Call Detail Display cded All Levels Yes Yes Manager Performance Reports Call Duration Distribution cdud All Levels Yes Yes Manager Performance Reports Call Fault Criteria DDD cfc All Levels No No Manager Call Occurance cod All Levels Yes Yes Manager Distribution Call Fault Read DDD cfr All Levels Yes Yes Manager Call Message DSU cm All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt cdr Call Test ct Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Change Address cha Data Tech Manager No No Manager Administrator Change Call Directory chcd Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Change Canned chem Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Mes
356. r and Summary Tasks Creating the Map You use the Create Network Map crnm command to create the map for the Map task NMS uses the information it derives from the device facility and site profiles as input to the Create Map command With this information the NMS determines the following e The appropriate icons to use on the Geographic Map and the Connectivity Maps e The correct connections or links between devices on the Connectivity Maps The geographic placement of icons and their connections on the Geographic Map e The contents of the object list for any associated network element Every time you make changes to your network by creating new profile records or by deleting existing records or if you update profile records to change your network configuration you must execute the crnm command so that the changes are reflected in the Map task If the Map task window is open when the changes are made the Map must be closed and reopened Accessing the Map Task The Map task is accessed from the main 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu When you select the Map task a blank window opens with the window title displayed as Geographic Map INITIALIZING This display remains on your screen until the system displays the Geographic Map in the window All windows opened from any Map window belong to the Map task The system does not allow you to invoke a second Map task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu until you terminate the current Map t
357. r Device Type APL 000000 7 9 7 2 ATR Phone Directory 2 for Device Type MUX 0 000000 7 10 A 1 Device Numbers c s bee ee ves ie ha a eura eeu A 1 B 1 Commands and their Access Levels 1 1 0 0 00 0 2 B 2 F 1 Dial Codes Beyond Continental United States 0 0 0 0 0 F 1 G 1 Number Mapping sese cee ene ee G 4 G 2 UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping lessen G 7 G 3 NMS Alert Type to UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping G 10 G 4 NMS Alert to UAI Alert Type to Fault Type Mapping For the SNMP Manager G 11 H 1 att2224ceo Modem Option Settings llle H 2 H 2 att2224ceo Switch and Option Settings 0 0 H 2 H 3 LOCATION Object Class s cole ake eee eek eee ee ES H 3 H 4 EQUIPMENT Object Class sees H 4 H 5 Mapping for Equipment ID Alias and Endpoint Names H 4 H 6 Mapping for Device Type and Equipment Type 02 eee eee H 5 H 7 CIRCUIT Object Class isses Etre Soe x evENues Dalene op Wane glee NE a H 6 vi January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Preface Objectives and Reader Assumptions Abstract The COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide provides an overview of the 6800 Series NMS and instructions for the use of the system s functions Users should have operational knowledge of the devices to be supported by the 6800 Series NMS within th
358. r Yes Yes Manager Filter Edit ATR Phone edatrpd Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Directory Administrator Edit ATR States edatrs Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Edit Automated Action edaaf Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Filter Administrator Edit Category edc Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Color Code edcc Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Device Group eddg Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Device Profile eddp Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Edit Display Filter eddf Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Edit External System edesc Administrator Yes Yes Manager Configuration Edit Facility Profile edfp Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Edit NMS Configuration ednmsc Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Port Configurations edpc Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Processing Filter edpf Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Routine edr All Levels No Yes Manager Edit Row Column Labels edrcl Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Site Profile edsp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Map Indicates what is shown on the screen 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table B 1 11 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Edit Storage Filter edsf Administrator Yes Yes Manager Edit Trouble Tickets
359. r pe OE dates 5 4 StordPe Filter veto ov AIA get g bo Ate feted nae Ate E Av es 5 5 Automated Action Filter 2 0 0 0 2 cee eee 5 5 Alert Driven Routine Filter ADR Filter 0005 5 5 Uniform Alarm Interface Filter UAI Filter 0 5 6 Customizing Alert Attributes and Criteria 5 6 Alert ProCeSsing coe soph ous ete eer ed ove eR NE 5 7 Device Alerts esce ynAIe Du PURIS E NEP Seb dire e 5 8 Alerts on Undefined Devices seeleeeeeeeeeee 5 8 Facility Alerts ccce tne ERE EXER A PRU AE dub W er punt 5 8 System Alerts c vLencekncesctestersurv v ERE ENS PUER 5 9 Alert TYPES a meer eri ren pere ek ET 5 9 Alert Gro ps 4c gue E eere me ERR UNE ER er E LEE 5 9 Alert Management Tools 0 0c ee 5 9 Color Coding and Priorities llle cee eee eee eee 5 9 Map Monitor and Summary Task Support for Network Devices 5 10 Customizing Alert Displays on Network Devices 5 12 Printers 0540 36 sg mer DC epu ees in etes es 5 12 Alert Processing within NMS 2 0 0 cece eee eee 5 13 Alarms Bie Gaile Barbies Deed he tes UT DEP E 5 13 Sr eee DUE xn PLE 5 13 Eyentss Mese due MAD eee edes tue da rrr 5 13 Bytex Switch Events eech se pee eats eee RISE ve A 5 15 SNMP Device Brouter Events leeeeeeeeee 5 15 Acknowledging Alerts Alarms and Events 5 16 Clearing Alerts Alarms and Status Reports 5 16
360. r the alert contains the link level address of the device The link level address appears directly below the device name and represents the diagnostic location of the device reporting the alert The third line of information for the alert provides the text associated with the alert For ACCULINK multiplexers the text may contain parameters that identify specific objects reporting the alert e g channel group link channel For other devices the text is a predetermined text string associated with the alert type The third line also provides an unacknowledged indicator On the second line just above unacknowledged are ATR ADR TT and UAI indicators for Automatic Trouble Report Alert Driven Routine Trouble Ticket and Uniform Alarm Interface respectively As new alert indicators are added to the top of the list the display in the window shifts downward As alerts are cleared they are deleted from the list and the display shifts upward On a full feature workstation if the list of existing alerts exceed the screen line limit in the Monitor window you can scroll through the complete set of alerts by using the scroll bar located to the right on your window This scroll bar operates the same as the vertical scroll bars used in the Map window On a basic feature workstation paging through the alerts is accomplished using the up and down arrow keys Note that the up and down arrow keys may not be available on asynchronous terminals If
361. racters except commas spaces and asterisks A site name cannot be the keywords all or none 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 E 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Network Names A network name can be used in the Device s field indicating to NMS to expand the network name into its individual devices Network names are entered in the following format net a a Where net is a required prefix a a is a 1 to 15 alphanumeric character name which can include the 26 alphabetic characters a z the digits 0 through 9 and the special characters dash and dot net all and net name are not valid network names An example of a valid network name is as follows net nyc net atm net atm nyc Vendor Names Valid vendor names are alphanumeric and may contain special characters except the comma space and asterisk Vendor names cannot be the keywords all or none Routine Names A routine name can be up to 10 lowercase alphanumeric characters The following rules apply 1 Personal routine names cannot begin with a number e g 123 is invalid 2 The following special characters are not allowed comma space pipe backslash double quotation marks 3 System routine names must be prefixed with sys IP Address All SNMP brouter devices use an IP address to match an imported SNMP trap to a device profile on the 6800 Series NMS All SNMP brouter devices are identified with a
362. rcuit are restricted to network addresses in the range 1 to 256 for 3400 4400 Series modems and 1 80 for 3600 Series DSUs DATAPHONE II Mode COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs Addressing The COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs require unique addresses so that they can be recognized by the network diagnostic system for command and test execution Device addressing is also used by the 6800 Series NMS to access the device Operating in DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode with this addressing scheme the 3600 Series DSUs are diagnostically compatible with DATAPHONE II devices The 3600 Series DSUs can have two separately addressable units in the same housing One unit the DSU is restricted to odd network addressing The other the V 32 DBM modem must have even addresses with the address always 1 greater than the DSU address Both the DSU and the V 32 DBM modem are at the same diagnostic level The tributary DSU and V 32 DBM modem are considered tributaries of the control DSU A typical COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSU Address is shown in Figure D 4 2 254 2 66 tL D tributary network address C port address B control device local address 1 256 odd DSU even DBM V A control channel 1 4 491 11941a 01 Figure D 4 Typical 3600 Series DSU Address in DATAPHONE II Mode 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System A This segment is the control channel on which the device is lo
363. re to display and access other Manager submenus and commands Each counts as one Map Manager window towards a limit of two The Alert Management selection provides a menu that displays all current alerts associated with the selected object Selecting an unacknowledged alert or All Alerts opens a menu providing selections for acknowledging the alert s or clearing the event s based on whether the alert s selected represent an alarm s status report s or event s See Chapter 5 Filter Administration and Alert Processing for more information on acknowledging alerts and clearing events This item is not selectable dimmed on the menu if there are no current alerts 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 13 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Connectivity Map Network Control Network Profile Object List Queue Results The Connectivity Map selection displays a graphic representation of device or facility connections You can access the Connectivity Map by selecting one of the following items e A specific device from a device Object List e A single facility from a Facility Object List e A single link icon from a Geographic Map e A device or facility on another Connectivity Map The Connectivity Map displays the following information e Icon representation for the selected object e Directly adjacent devices e Facilities connecting the selected device to adjacent devices The icons on the
364. remote modem to which the local was connected for the call and the reason for call disconnect NMS stores call information in two forms 1 Call Summaries These summaries contain condensed call information Call summary data stored for each local device includes e The total number of calls received for each hour of the day The total duration of calls received for each hour of the day The total number of calls received for each of 10 6800 Series NMS defined call duration periods 8 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Reports 2 Call Details These detail reports include more explicit detailed information about each call For each call to from a local device the following detailed call information is retrieved e The mnemonic name of the remote device involved in the call e The date and time of day the call occurred e The reason for call disconnect or failure The duration of the call e The line speed of the call Four reports are available for retrieving information from call statistics databases The Manage Call Statistics mcs command sets to frequency for gathering call statistic information These reports are briefly described as follows Call Detail Display Report Use the Call Detail Display Report to obtain the following information for each call device name of the local modem device name of the remote modem only available if the call was placed in maintenance mode connect time for the call cal
365. reset This report is generated by executing the Equipment Performance Report epr command To generate a 24 hour summary of the number of node alarms that occurred at a multiplexer schedule this report to run once every 24 hours 8 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Reports Facility Errors Report fer Use the Facility Errors Report to obtain the number of each type of facility error that occurred since the last statistical reset This report is generated by executing the Facility Errors Report fer command When intermittent facility problems occur schedule this report to run once every 24 hours and relay the information to the facility vendor if the problem persists Facility Performance Report fpr Use the Facility Performance Report to obtain in tabular or graphical form the number of errored seconds and failed seconds that occurred on a specified facility during the last 24 hours This report is generated by executing the Facility Performance Report fpr command When intermittent T1 facility problems occur run this report once a day Node Errors Report ner Use the Node Errors Report to obtain the number of each type of node error that occurred since the last statistical reset This report is generated by executing the Node Errors Report ner command When intermittent node problems occur schedule this report to run once every 24 hours Time Slot Performance Report tspr Use the Time Slot Performance Rep
366. reshold th 1 Parameter threshold exceeded dds time out time 1 Tributary time out dds truncate trnc 3 Subtree truncation dds x leads el 1 External lead alarm 5 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Table 5 2 4 of 5 Communication Products Alerts ee A ede Alert Group Alert Type Priority Alert s Textual Display MACU Paradyne macu device md 1 MACU failure Multidrop Auto Call macu facility di 1 Dial line lost Unit ANALYSIS nr Diagnostic failure macu service mm 3 Maintenance mode tm Test mode NMS Alerts nms device rs Reset nms facility nr Diagnostic failure nms service tm Test mode SRCU srcu bridge bf1 1 BSU 1 failure COMSPHERE bf2 BSU 2 failure Service Restoration bf3 BSU 3 failure Control Unit bf4 BSU 4 failure bf5 BSU 5 failure bf6 BSU 6 failure bf7 BSU 7 failure bf8 BSU 8 failure srcu device df 1 Device failure nr Diagnostic failure srcu message ccn 3 Configuration change srcu service dsab 3 Device Disabled tm Test mode 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 21 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 5 2 5 of 5 Communication Products Alerts ES aia Alert Group Alert Type Priority Alert s Textual Display UND Undefined und alerts am 1 Access module alarm Devices Devices as 1 Abnormal operating speed reporting alerts but ccn 1 Configuration change have no device dc
367. ries Network Management System Exception Reports Call Statistics Use the Exception Reports er command to list network test results that exceeded preset failure thresholds The failure thresholds for these tests can be set temporarily within the fields on the input form for the Exception Reports er command or set permanently with the Change Exception Reporting Thresholds chert command These commands are discussed in detail in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual The Exception Reports allow you to analyze selective results from certain network tests making it easier to monitor and troubleshoot large networks for specific problems Exception Reports can be run for the following tests Automatic Network Test ant Circuit Loss Inbound cli Circuit Loss Outbound clo Device Test det Digital Test dit End to End Test eet Offline Test ot Receive Signal Level rsl Receive Signal Quality rsq Report Terminal Power rtp Signal Profile sp Exception reports are applicable only to certain DATAPHONE II APL DDD models The COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual describes these commands as well as the er command in detail NMS supports the collection of call information from local COMSPHERE 3800 Series DDD devices Call information retrieved includes time and duration of each call the
368. rmance Reports Task Menu 00 0 0c cece eee eee 8 6 8 3 Performance Reports Task Menu 00 0 0 c eee ee eee 8 11 9 1 Uuhtnes Task Meit sic cegustelse sf sed hie skeet eee aes REEE er UE 9 1 9 2 Initial Read Mail Screen 0 eee ee 9 3 9 3 Read Mail Commands Screen 0 0 e eee eee 9 4 9 4 Send Mail Screen ose edo DESEE ES Meares seine sly ates edo fna 9 7 9 5 NMS Users Screening oei rene db EE basen 6 PET Deb ER FERE RETE e Enn 9 8 9 6 Printer Status Screen 23 0504 edd slew eke bs eb ep MERE MERE ERE 9 9 9 7 Move Print Jobs Screen 0 eee eee 9 10 D 1 Typical APL or DDS Address 0 00 0 0 eee eee eee D 4 D 2 Typical DDD Address seo RR enni eee eden bb eee bee tg D 5 D 3 Typical 3400 4400 Series Modem DATAPHONE II Mode Address D 6 D 4 Typical 3600 Series DSU Address in DATAPHONE II Mode D 7 D 5 Extending Addressing leleeeeleeee e D 10 D 6 Typical COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Modem Advanced Mode Address D 11 D 7 Typical COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSU Advanced Mode Address D 12 D 8 Typical COMSPHERE 3800 3900 Series Modem Advanced Mode Address D 14 D 9 Comparison Addressing of Types 0 0 0 cece D 16 D 10 Sample ANALYSIS Network 00 0 cece eee eee D 17 D 11 Typical ANALYSIS Device Link Level Address 0 0 D 18 D 12 Typical Series 700 Multiplexer Configuration Showing Connection fr
369. rmats are displayed as the results of the Change Address cha command If the link level address is changed both of these formats are displayed and the address header is displayed with the serial number format for the device If you are restoring an address or changing only the alternate mode address the address display remains the same In the DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode when you change the local address the results displayed show the DATAPHONE II and Advanced mode address formats The results header displays the original address NOTE While in the DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode the Change Address cha command cannot be used to restore an address in the device profile For more information on these commands refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System DATAPHONE Il Mode Addressing This addressing scheme applies to 3400 4400 Series modems operating in the DATAPHONE II diagnostic mode and DATAPHONE II devices It consists of the following elements e Control channel e Local address e Port addresses e Network addresses A link level address takes the form CC la pa nal na4 Where CC is the control channel identification la is the local address pa is the port address nal na4 is the up to 4 additional network addresses that may b
370. rnal system host name and IP address to the etc hosts file 3 Add the following command to the usr bin Startup file xhost lt sm100host gt This command must be inserted on a line by itself before the line containing the rsh remote shell command 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 r3 Glossary active alert ACU adaptive rate control ADC ADR Advanced diagnostic protocol ADp mode aggregate link aggregate link module aggregate link interface module alarm alert An alarm abnormal status condition or event occurrence that is currently being reported to the NMS Once the alert is cleared it becomes a historical alert and is no longer considered active by NMS Automatic Call Unit A feature of certain 3400 Series modems that allows a pair of modems in point to point applications to adjust their signaling rate automatically based on current line conditions The highest signaling rate possible is maintained without operator intervention ANALYSIS Data Concentrator Alert Driven Routine a routine that is triggered for execution by the arrival of an alert to the NMS The network management protocol used by the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS It provides diagnostic communication to the network The logical termination of a facility at an ACCULINK 740 multiplexer The ACCULINK 740 multiplexer hardware that provides aggregate link interface control Aggregate link modules are on the front card in the
371. roup dsdg and Display User Group dsug commands A List Device Group sdg command is also available The System Administrator can assign users to the device groups and user groups using the Create User Profile crup and Edit User Profile edup commands Access to the Summary window is also granted or denied using these commands The Map and Monitor windows are accessible to all users however what is displayed is determined by the user profile Users can use the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc command to determine which alerts or devices an individual user will see Please refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Core Command Reference Manual for detailed descriptions of the device group user group user profile and user selection criteria commands Information on user groups and user profiles can be found in subsequent sections 4 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 System Administration NMS Configuration Information The NMS configuration information identifies the NMS customer and the customer s software version This information is included as part of an Automated Trouble Report ATR The NMS configuration information is stored in a single NMS database record and identifies the name of the organization or company that is managing the NMS provides its location address and provides the name and telephone number of the data communication manager who should be the contact point for service An NMS ID serial number is inc
372. rt names or codes which identify the alert To simplify filter administration alert types for a specific device type are grouped into alert groups Alert types from the same alert group use the same filters See Alert Processing later in this chapter for more discussion on these terms Alerts from all DATAPHONE II devices and COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series modems are detected through the 6800 Series NMS polling process Alerts from devices in the ANALYSIS NMS network are not detected by the 6800 Series NMS polling but rather through a transfer of alert information from the ANALYSIS NMS to the 6800 Series NMS Alerts from multiplexers are detected through polling and asynchronous alert reporting Alerts from bytex devices brouters and SNMP devices are received through asynchronous alert reporting When the 6800 Series NMS receives an alert that alert passes through a series of filters The filter processing flow is described in the following section NMS Filter Processing Flow There are six types of filters that make up the filtering system within NMS These filters are the processing filter the display filter the Uniform Alarm Interface UAI filter the automated action filter alert driven routine filter and the storage filter The audible and visual filters are sub filters of the display filter The processing filter processes all alerts coming into the system Only alerts that pass this filter go on to other filters and processes A common u
373. s release A diamond at the beginning of the command name in the COMMAND column indicates that an existing command was modified for this release No indicator at the beginning of the command name means that the command was not modified e ABBREVIATION defines the command abbreviation and the alternate abbreviation Gf applicable for the command Alternate command is prefaced by alt All command abbreviations within the system are unique e USER ACCESS defines the user group assignment for the command at installation These user group assignments are defined by the system and cannot be changed by the user In the order of increasing command permission the system defined default user groups are as follows Help Desk Data Technician Data Tech Manager Administrator This level currently includes the System Administrator NOTE In addition to the four default user groups the NMS System Administrator can create up to 26 other user groups for each command in this manual It is the responsibility of the NMS System Administrator to inform all the users of their system 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System When the phrase All Levels appears in the column the command can be accessed by any user group level The asterisk indicators in this column are defined as follows Indicates that the component to which the command is directed mus
374. s channel rates from 1 2 kbps to 768 kbps Migration You can transfer or migrate the NMS databases and file information from each of the following systems to Release 4 0 of the COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS e DATAPHONE II System Controller e COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS 6820 or 6830 Release 1 e COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS 6820 Release 2 e COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Release 3 x e ANALYSIS NMS e COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Release 4 x File migration is discussed in detail in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Installation and Maintenance Guide Briefly the 6800 Series NMS provides migration for the following DATAPHONE II System Controller to 6800 Series NMS When you migrate from the DATAPHONE II System Controller to NMS all device profile and historical alarm information is transferred to the appropriate databases in NMS Facility profiles are automatically created for multiplexer links based on link profiles and node connectivity data in the System Controller Channel group tables and node connectivity data are transferred Trouble tickets and routines cannot be transferred 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 27 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System The DPII system controller system printers AT amp T 477 AT amp T 583 local copy printers AT amp T 473 AT amp T 570 and the optional alert log printer AT amp T 475 AT amp T 572 can be re used as system printers and the alert log printer However s
375. s from the NMS to the ASCII terminal interfaces of the multiplexer nodes is provided through the External Systems task The External Systems task allows you to bypass the NMS interface and enter into real time control access of a 718 719 731 735 740 741 742 745 or 74x 56K ACCULINK multiplexer via the multiplexer s own menudriven command system The External Systems task is a useful feature but it should be used judiciously because improper use could cause problems in the network Using an external system cut through session you can do the following e Read a node s message log e Change the node s common Level I password e Access certain diagnostic features of the multiplexers that are not supported by the NMS For details refer to the user s manual that came with your ACCULINK multiplexer e Gain control access to any 724 735 or 719 multiplexer in the network Notes on External Systems Interface to DBU The 6800 Series NMS provides cut through access to device tests and commands that are available at the DATAPHONE II 839A B Dial Backup Unit Controller You can open a separate window to a terminal emulation session that connects the 6800 Series NMS directly to the ASCII terminal interface of the DBU All tests and commands available at this terminal are then available through the NMS Notes on External Systems Interface to SC The 6800 Series NMS provides cut through access to device tests and commands that are available from th
376. s in the network If there is a single facility configured on the appropriate interface port or line the display object corresponding to the facility visually indicates the alert However if there are multiple facilities configured on a given interface and a determination cannot be made as to the exact facility the display object corresponding to the device reporting the facility alert visually indicates the alert Usually the exact facility can be determined for line side facility alerts on multiplexers the display object representing that facility visually indicates the alert 5 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing System Alerts Alert Types Alert Groups The 6800 Series NMS software alerts can be reported and displayed on the Map the Monitor and Summary and stored in the alert database An alert type briefly identifies the alert and is associated with a textual description of the alert For communications products it can be one to seven letter abbreviation of the alert s descriptions such as DF for Device Failure or TM for Test Mode See Table 5 2 for the alert types associated with communications products For multiplexers alert types are major minor codes such as 50 00 See Table 5 3 for major minor codes for ANM generated events and Table 5 4 for major minor codes for ANM generated alarms An alert group is the logical grouping of alert types for filtering and display purposes
377. s no longer displayed in the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu The task name is not redisplayed until you close one or more of the task windows NOTE the maximum allowed instances of a task that task 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NMS Task Descriptions This manual describes the NMS tasks listed on the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu in separate chapters The user interface considerations when using these tasks based on the type of workstation are described later in this chapter NMS tasks are described as follows Manager Task This task provides System Management Network Control Routines Queue Results and Scheduled Items functions for NMS Information on these functions is provided in this chapter as well as Chapter 3 Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 of this manual Descriptions of the commands in System Management Routines Queue Results and Scheduled Items are provided in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual Commands under Network Control are described in their device related reference manuals i e COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual or COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Multiplexer Command Reference Manual Map Monitor and Summary Tasks The Map task provides Geographic Map and Connectivity Map displays and textual equipment Object lists and
378. s previously mentioned one layer can be added to a DATAPHONE II network extended to its normal diagnostic limit Once the end point tributary marking the limit of DATAPHONE II service is entered in the link level address only one extended layer can be added This includes networks that have not expanded to four levels of addressing The advantage of extended network polling is that it increases the complexity of networks supported by the 6800 Series NMS Extended polling permits a four layer point to point network a multipoint behind a multipoint network located behind a backbone extension and also a one modem to many network followed by another one modem to many network January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing Advanced Diagnostic Protocol Mode ADp Addressing The Advanced Diagnostic protocol ADp mode addressing scheme applies only to COMSPHERE modems operating in Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode The Advanced mode addressing scheme consists of network addresses A link level address takes the form CC nal na2 na3 na10 Where CC is the control channel number from 1 8 NOTE 3800 3900 Series modems cannot extend the network beyond two levels ADp Mode COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Modems Adaressing Each COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series modem on the 6800 Series NMS poll list has a unique address which is composed of a string of numbers This address can be up to five levels deep Figure D 6 shows a t
379. s requested input forms allow you to do one or both of the following 1 Redirect all commands in the routine to the control tributary devices specified 2 Select one or more individual commands whose input parameters are to be modified prior to execution of the routine The Routine Input Form Page 2 contains the following fields Control device s Specifies alternate control device s NMS directs applicable commands to these devices You can enter either control device IDs for communications products commands or node IDs for multiplexer commands This field may not be applicable depending on the commands included in the routine Tributary device s Specifies alternate tributary device s NMS directs applicable commands to these devices You can enter either tributary device IDs for communications products commands or remote node IDs for multiplexer commands This field may not be applicable depending on the commands included in the routine 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 57 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE By specifying device ID s in the Control device s and if applicable Tributary device s input fields you can redirect all commands in the routine to the device s indicated without having to edit the individual command input forms Specifying devices in these fields directs commands to those devices for this execution of the routine only Thus the new addresses do not repl
380. s task supports the use of the mouse on the full feature workstation When you select the Manager task from the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu the window appears as shown in Figure 2 23 DE 7 ML Hain Henu 1 System Nanagement 2 Network Control 3 Routines 4 Queue Results 5 Schedule Items enter selection aS E CleFld Preutlenu BEIM PrevForm Cancel L 493 14259 Figure 2 23 Manager Task Window on a Full Feature Workstation Map Monitor and Summary Task User Interfaces The Map and Monitor tasks provide user interface support via the mouse In the Monitor task the Monitor scrolls as new alerts are reported Descriptions of these tasks and the user interface considerations when using these tasks are provided in Chapter 6 The Summary task is a non interactive display which provides dynamic counts of active alerts Refer to Chapter 6 for additional information on this task 2 36 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started External Systems Task User Interface The External Systems task provides cut through access to other systems You can establish cut through sessions from either the 6800 Series NMS Task menu by selecting the External Systems selection or from the Map task by selecting a device managed by a supported external system and then selecting the Network Control selection from the device object list Once you access the selected system you are under the contr
381. s the Monitor window and returns to the 6800 NMS Tasks menu External Systems Task User Interface The External Systems task window is shown in Figure 2 30 This figure shows some of the external systems available for NMS The contents of this menu varies depending on the external systems names configured for your network Session dit Print Configure External Systems 3270 Emulation analysis dex system control 491 13179 Figure 2 30 External Systems Windows on a Basic Feature Workstation To select an external system use the up down arrow keys to highlight a selection and press the Enter key Once you access the selected system you are under the control of that system s environment Two functions are available at the bottom of the window These operations are described as follows Help F1 Displays a pop up Help screen explaining the functions and how to invoke help Cancel F8 Cancels the External Systems window request and returns you to the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 47 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Performance Reports Task User Interface The Performance Reports task provides access to alert and trending reports call statistics and multiplexer performance reports Functionally this menu is the same as the Performance Reports menu under Network Control in the Manager task The function keys available for use in this task are the same as those us
382. s to read Pause The background color of Pause changes to blue and the previously displayed message no longer appears If you do not manually resume display of alerts within a minute after suspending the display of alerts the system automatically resumes alert display after one minute has elapsed Individual User Customization of Monitor Displays You can control what information is displayed in your own Monitor window by specifying selection criteria parameters which then act as viewing filters This criteria acts on the alerts that have passed the NMS display filter Refer to Chapter 5 for additional information on NMS filters You specify selection criteria via the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc command available from the Manager task window The edusc command was also discussed earlier in the Customizing Alert Attributes and Criteria section in Chapter 5 You can specify alert selection criteria based on device type s model number s of devices and by specific device address es site serial number network name or circuit name You can specify which alert type s or alert group s display as well as what alert priority levels should be displayed This same criteria determines what alerts display on your Map windows Once you establish the selection criteria the selection criteria is associated by the system with your User ID Each time you open a Monitor window the system uses the last specified selection criteria to initializ
383. sage Administrator Change Channel chcc Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Configuation Administrator Change Channel Group chcg Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Change Channel Module chcmt Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Type Administrator Change Directory DDD chd All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt chdir Change DS 1 Channel chdcmc Manager Yes Yes Manager Module Configuration Administrator Change Exception chert Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Reporting Thresholds Administrator Change External Leads chels Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager States Administrator 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 B 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table B 1 3 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Change Line Designator chld Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Change Logical Link chil Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Change Multiplexer chm Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager alt chmx Administrator Change Multiplexer chmcc Manager Yes Yes Manager Component Administrator Configuration Change NAP chnapc Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Configuration Administrator Change Node chncs Manager Yes Yes Manager Connected to System Administrator Change Node chncp Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Configuration Administrator Parameters Change Node chnp
384. se of the processing filter is to reduce the number of alerts that are managed by the NMS eliminating the alerts as specified by the user that are of little interest to the user or that are transient lasting only a short time in terms of seconds The duration of each alert is timed and the processing filter passes the alert to subsequent filters if it exceeds the filter value If the alert does not pass the processing filter it is removed from the system If the alert passes this filter it is concurrently passed through the other filters in the system Figure 5 1 The filtering system can be customized and set up for individual network needs Filtering Exceptions Filtering exceptions can be identified for specific devices of the device type associated with each alert group These specific devices are given individual filter values and are processed as exceptions to the filter parameters set up for their associated alert group 5 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Filter Administration and Alert Processing Alert Processing Filter wi 7 ON jw Display Automated UAI Storage Alert Filter Action Filter Filter Driven Filter Routine Y Filter StarKeeper or ACCUMASTER Integrator Y NVI Network Map Alert Log Printer Network Summary O EHE Network Monitor OFFI Audible FF visual Device Model Network net Date Time Alert Type Filter Filter OFF Audible 2E Visual Filter Filter
385. seeeeeeeee e mmn 2 5 Network Management Workstation Copyright Window sss 2 6 Network Management Workstation Main Window Window Frame 2 7 System OptionsMenu eos sooi sus pee als Ee ER Reg eg heces 2 8 Port 1 6800 Series Screen Window Frame 0 00 eee eee 2 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series NMS Login Window 020005 2 10 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu Shown for Basic Feature Workstations 2 1 NMS Lbogoff Window i anit UR ee RA oak LS eee 2 12 Portn 6800 Series Window 0 eee ee eee 2 13 Session MENU 2 566 cto ee eed hee eS Gas Sa eh a 2 14 Network Management Workstation Main Window 2e eee eee 2 15 Closing Warning Message Box Shown for Windows 30 2 16 The End Session Message Box 0 0 c eee eee ee eee 2 17 Exit Windows Message Box 0 cece eee eee e 2 18 Microsoft Windows 21 Window Frame with Icons 000005 2 19 Windows Menus and Symbols on a Full Feature Workstation 2 20 Selecting Fields Listed in Tabular Form 00 00 0002 0000 2 21 Sample Pop Up Menu for Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking Tasks 5 epe UP ERU TS oh RPEHP EDU 2 22 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu Window on a Full Feature Workstation 2 23 Manager Task Window on a Full Feature Workstation 4 2 24 Trouble Inventory Report Task Window on the Full Feature
386. sent to the NMS 1 34 56 3 43 80 and 1 99 5 Slash The slash is a link level address separator Use of this character is restricted to link level addressing only When two slashes appear together with no intervening characters or spaces it is assumed you mean 1 for modems only the default port address for DATAPHONE II devices The only instance where two slashes may appear consecutively in an address is to identify a default port address of 1 in a DATAPHONE mode address 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 E 3 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Asterisk The asterisk is a wildcard character which can be used to specify any character string The can be used in any of the following fields when the input form allows for multiple devices to be entered e Device address e Network name e Circuit name Facility name e Device name e Serial number IP Address The can also be used in database transactions where permitted in the transaction specification Some examples of where the can be used in database transactions are as follows e Site name e Vendor name User ID Trouble number s Model number One use for this wildcard could be 1 12 101 This example indicates all the devices that have a network address of 101 that is at least two levels below 1 12 Some more examples 4 would translate to all devices on control channel 4 m2 would translate to all multiplexer nodes
387. set up for the nms login PRESS Enter 2 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started 3 To select Stop the System from the 6800 Series NMS Menu TYPE 2 PRESS Enter The following message appears The following processes are running They will be shut down y n n To stop the system TYPE y The following message appears Shutting down the AT amp T Paradyne NMS The AT amp T Paradyne NMS has been shutdown Press RETURN to continue 4 To continue PRESS Enter The 6800 Series NMS Menu appears 5 To select Return to Console login from the 6800 Series NMS Menu TYPE 11 PRESS Enter The Console Login prompt is now displayed Powering Down the 6800 Series NMS Host Computer The system powerdown procedures bring down both the 6800 Series NMS applications software and the UNIX system software To power down the system you must power down the system console and all other full feature or basic feature workstations as applicable To power down the host computer perform the following steps NOTE If you are currently in an active X window session proceed to Step 1 If the Console Login prompt is displayed proceed to Step 2 1 Select Quit from the workspace menu and confirm OK If you logged in as ffw you should be at the Console Login prompt At the Console Login prompt 2 TYPE nms PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System
388. signments determine which NMS commands can be accessed by a user Access to network devices is assigned on a per device group basis 30 for Altos 5000 Systems and 50 for Altos 15000 Systems and for multiplexer nodes a subnetwork basis For more information on network partitioning see Chapter 4 For information on user group assignments see Chapter 3 Alert Filters with Customization Capabilities An alert is categorized as an alarm fault abnormal status condition changes or event message The 6800 Series alert management subsystem filters incoming alarms status and events that are reported from network devices Filtering allows NMS to store and take action on only those alerts specified by the user The Alert Filter Subsystem determines which alert records are reported to the 6800 Series users stored in the alert database cause trouble tickets or automatic trouble reports to be generated or trigger alert driven routines ADRs Based on the type of device you can specify how long an alert must persist before the NMS displays or takes action on it You can also specify exceptions on a device by device basis for every filter enabling special filtering for those devices experiencing abnormal conditions problems or usage Map Dynamic Graphic and Textual Representations of the Network The Map task provides both geographic and topological views of your network Devices and sites are represented by map icons that are color coded t
389. sion or changes A January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Safety Instructions IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual This product is intended to be used with a three wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adaptor Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a three wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cables are provid
390. sor must be unique across the network to eliminate the possibility of scheduling restores to the same origination processor from multiple destinations Alerts and events are generated by the Automatic Backup and Restore feature Ten minutes before a backup or restore is started an alert is sent to the alert subsystem to indicate that the automatic backup restore is pending This alert is cleared when the backup restore starts If the user has specified that the backup restore is to begin now or if it is scheduled to begin within ten minutes this alert is not generated Other alerts are generated when the backup starts Events are generated when the backup completes and when it fails to complete Messages stating the start of the backup restore are sent to the system log along with a message indicating the completion of the backup job During the restore process messages cannot be sent to the system log nor can alerts or events be generated for the alert subsystem to handle because the NMS is stopped Messages from the backup or restore procedures themselves are stored in special log files named user tmp backuplog and usr tmp restorelog respectively and may be viewed by the user Disk Storage Requirements The backup procedure creates the backup files on the origination host processor before transferring them to the destination processor Sufficient disk space must therefore be available on the origination host processor to hold both the opera
391. ssion on extended polling for DATAPHONE II devices in DATAPHONE II Extended Polling and Addressing later in this chapter Figure D 1 under DATAPHONE II Mode APL and DDS Addressing shows the link level addresses for a sample circuit Address Management The Display Address dsa and Change Address cha commands are available for 3400 4400 Series modems 3600 Series DSUs and 3800 Series modems only Note that these commands require that serial numbers be contained in the device profiles Also note that the results returned from these commands differ depending on the diagnostic protocol mode The Display Address dsa command can be sent to multiple devices In Advance Diagnostic protocol mode the results header shows the serial number format and the results show a 1 to 3 digit address with carrier and slot numbers In DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode the address header displays the original address When the address displayed is the local address the DATAPHONE II and advanced mode formats are shown The Change Address cha can be sent to only one device at a time You have a choice of selecting either one or all associated device profiles for an update and the link level and or alternate address will be updated You can use this command to restore a device s address to the address in the device profile and the link level and or alternate address will be updated In the Advanced Diagnostic protocol mode the original and new address fo
392. station software has a keyboard based interface These workstations can be directly connected to the NMS or used as remote workstations There are three types of printers The system printer alert log printer and ATR remote printer are associated with the central processor These printers are briefly described as follows System Network Printer The system printer is a high speed microprocessor controlled dot matrix printer capable of producing text and color graphics The system printer is a central shared utility connected to the host processor It prints command results and screen displays You can send reports and command results to a system printer rather than to the workstation CRT thereby leaving the workstation free for other tasks Any screen display can also be printed from the full feature workstation These printers can also perform as network printers A network printer is a printer that can be located at any site serviced by the NMS LAN A print server running UNIX System V or Berkeley UNIX is required The network printer can receive the same print jobs as the system printer 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 15 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System UIP Cards Alert Log Printer The alert log printer is a dedicated 80 column printer used for automatically logging alerts sent to the 6800 Series NMS The printer prints a message when an alert occurs when an update to an alert occurs and when an alert is c
393. stores communication to a remote location when service is interrupted due to a faulty APL The MACU provides automated dial backup support for both point to point and multipoint circuits supported by NMS with cut through sessions and ANALYSIS Gateway or by ANALYSIS 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 1 25 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System COMSPHERE 4400 Series Service Restoration Control Unit SRCU Analog Bridge DSUs The SRCU provides 4 wire dial backup of faulty leased lines for both point to point and multipoint circuits enabling a restoral resource for up to 64 leased lines and simultaneous restoral of up to 16 drops on point to point or multipoint circuits SRCU multipoint dial backup capabilities are expanded with the use of the Service Restoration Expansion Carrier SREC enabling restoral of up to 8 circuits with 16 locations on each circuit The SREC accommodates up to 16 Analog Bridges or 32 Dial Backup Units The SREC can also be used without the SRC Service Restoration Carrier to provide dedicated dial backup for modems For these dedicated applications a modem is connected to a single Dial Backup Unit for point to point backup or to an Analog Bridge for multipoint backup Eight DBUs can be connected to a single Analog Bridge and if two Analog Bridges are daisy chained together up to 16 DBUs can be connected to the Analog Bridges The SRCU interfaces with the 6800 Series NMS via cut through access to the SRCU s
394. t Site Location on the Map later in this section on the map If the unnamed site does not contain any devices NMS ignores the site and it is not displayed on the map If you update the unnamed site s site profile with location information NMS handles the site as a normal placeable site Unplaceable Sites on the Map Unplaceable sites are those sites which cannot be placed in a geographic location by NMS because the site s city country codes are missing or not usable by the system for some reason These sites are always placed in the default site location on the map see Default Site Location on the Map for a description of the default site location Default Site Location on the Map The system assigns a default site location to unnamed and unplaceable sites each time the Create Map crnm command is executed NMS automatically calculates the placement so that the default site location is horizontally centered in the network view with respect to the other sites being displayed The vertical placement of the site on the map is 85 degrees north of the equator Because of the way NMS internally determines placement it cannot ensure that the default site location is not clustered in the network view the view of the entire network on the map network view is explained later in this section Also the sites at the default site location may cluster with other placeable sites on the network view as the result of resizing the Map window even thou
395. t be out of service only if your user group level is the one indicated If your user group level is a higher level group the component does not need to be out of service when the command is executed Indicates that you must have access to the entire multiplexer network to execute the command ROUTINE specifies whether the command can be placed in a routine SCHEDULE specifies whether the command can be scheduled for execution ACCESSED FROM specifies the NMS Task under which the command resides Table B 1 1 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User i Accessed Command Abbrev AGcoss Routine Schedule From Abort Test abort Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Acknowledge Alert No No access level No No Monitor abbreviation assigned Map Acquire Channel Groups accg Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Acquire Device Poll List acpl Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Acquire Logical Links acil Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Acquire Modem Control acmcopl Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Channel Poll List alt acccpl Administrator Acquire Physical acpa Manager Yes Yes Manager Attributes Administrator Alert Report Summary ars All Levels No Yes Trouble Inventory Reports ATR Report atrr All Levels No Yes Trouble Inventory Reports Automatic Network Test ant Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrato
396. t law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes A January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System User s System Administrator s Guide 6800 A2 GE26 20 2nd Edition January 1997 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release or a Technical Update Memo TUM to this manual Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use on
397. t or type The default is the current message amp zl 493 14288 Figure 9 3 Read Mail Commands Screen 9 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Utilities These commands are defined as follows type msglist Prints the message s whose index numbers you specify next Prints the next message edit msglist Enables editing of the specified message s using the UNIX line editor ed from msglist Prints the header summary from each specified message delete msglist Deletes the specified message s from the mailbox undelete msglist Restores the specified deleted messages save msglist file Saves the specified message s in the named file If the file does not already exist a file is automatically created The message is then deleted from the new mailbox reply message Replies to the specified message s including all other recipients of the message s Reply msglist Sends a response to the author of each specified message preserve msglist Preserves the specified message s in the mbox mail user Sends a message to the specified user and records a copy of it in a file named after that user quit Exits from the mail function storing messages that were read in the mbox file 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 9 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System xit Exits from the mail function without changing any files header Prints the page of
398. t the first system archive tape and press Return to continue The tape labeled Database File Directories Backup is currently in the drive Remove this tape and insert the tape labeled INFORMIX database backup PRESS Enter The following message appears Restoring system control information please wait The following message then appears Press ESC to return to the Archive menu Use arrow keys to move the cursor Press F3 or CTRL B to continue CHUNKS THAT WILL BE RESTORED Full Pathname Of The Chunk Offset Size dev rdsk rootdbspace 16 79990 These values may vary To continue PRESS CTRL B If there are any logical logs presently on disk you are asked if you want to back them up as in the following example statement Would you like to backup log 22 23 y n To continue TYPE n PRESS Enter The following message appears Restoring dbspaces BLOBSpaces please wait Wait for the following message to display Do you have another level of tapes to restore y n To continue TYPE n PRESS Enter The following message appears Initializing please wait Press Return to continue 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 4 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 11 14 To continue PRESS Enter The following message appears Initializing please wait Wait for the following message to display Is there a logical log tape to restore y n Roll forward shoul
399. table the Device s column indicates 1 2 etc as appropriate These notations reflect device naming conventions with wildcard usage indicating all devices on control channels 1 through 8 For example 1 indicates all devices with an address beginning with 1 etc Table 6 5 System Default Category Assignments Category Device Types Device S Model Alert Priority 1 System all all all 1 2 mux 56mux all all all 1 3 swtch all all all 1 4 ntwk all all all 1 5 apl 1 2 8 all all 1 6 ddd 1 2 8 all all 1 7 dds 1 2 8 all all 1 8 und all all all 1 9 ab dbu srcu 1 2 8 all all 1 10 all a1 all all 1 11 system all all all 2 12 mux 56mux all all all 2 13 switch all all all 2 14 ntwk all all all 2 15 apl 1 2 8 all all 2 16 ddd 1 2 8 all all 2 17 dds 1 2 8 all all 2 18 und all all all 2 19 ab dbu srcu 1 2 8 all all 2 20 all a1 all all 2 21 system all all all 3 22 mux 56mux all all all 3 23 swtch all all all 3 24 ntwk all all all 3 25 apl 1 2 8 all all 3 26 ddd 1 2 8 all all 3 27 dds 1 2 8 all all 3 28 und all all all 3 29 ab dbu srcu 1 5 2 5 8 5 all all 3 30 all a1 all all 3 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 39 Trouble Tracking OVerVieW Sethe caua se REDU UP UNRRI NER Ue ooking eet IE Pd 7 1
400. tal number of alerts that meet specific user defined criteria This task and the default alert categories displayed on the Summary are discussed in detail in Chapter 6 Customizing Alert Displays on Network Devices Printers The System Administrator can customize the alert handling system using the following commands Change the priority visual audible and timeout values by executing the Edit Alert Attribute edaa command Execute the Edit User Selection Criteria edusc command to individualize the information displayed on the Map Monitor and Summary Execute the Edit Color Code edcc and Edit Category edc commands to change alert displays system wide There are two printers available for use in monitoring the network the alert log printer and the event log printer Alert Log Printer ALP This printer prints messages when a fault is reported or cleared or when an automatic trouble report is generated The ALP can be dedicated when defining ports When the printer is disabled the port is out of service You can change the status between enabled and disabled to take the port in or out of service To temporarily stop alert log printer jobs you need to disable the printer port When a printer is disabled printer jobs are queued until the printer is enabled Event Log Printer This printer is directly attached to a Network Administration Port NAP of a multiplexer node Refer to the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management Syst
401. tations e Alert log printer They also support the following interfaces e Automatic Trouble Reporting ATR interface e Uniform Alarm Interface UAT e External system cut throughs e Interfaces to ACCULINK9multiplexers e File export These ports can be configured during initial NMS installation or reconfigured later at any time without disrupting the NMS operation However multiplexer ports cannot be reconfigured after installation The NMS system provides a total of 18 serial ports two provided by the Altos System 5000 or 15000 and 16 on the IPC 1600 card that is installed in the Altos System An additional 16 ports are available if the UIP configuration is installed For better system performance it is recommended that the two serial ports on the UIP not be used Integrated Device Support Database Management and Network Control An integrated approach for device support database management and network control is made possible via the INFORMIX relational database system This allows effective and efficient management of your integrated network Using relational database capabilities the 6800 Series NMS presents four separate views of network configuration data e Device view e Facility view e Site view e Vendor view 1 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction NMS documentation refers to these views as profiles These profiles make use of the relational database which forms data relationships eliminating th
402. ted to at least one supported device NMS associates alert state information with supported facilities 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 GL 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System synchronous transmission system administrator system printer system routine terminal emulation time division multiplexer TDM time slot T1 T1 link training transient display trellis coded modulation Transmission in which the data characters and bits are transmitted at a fixed rate with transmitter and receiver synchronized This eliminates the need for start stop elements thus providing greater efficiency The person whose profile was created at system initialization and who is initially responsible for administrator type activities in the system The NMS user access structure allows the system administrator to grant other logins privileges to use specified commands and tasks A central shared printer connected to the 6800 Series NMS processor via a dedicated port used to print test command results reports and full feature workstation screen dumps A group of 6800 Series NMS tests and commands for delayed or repeated execution that has been created by a particular user and copied to the system library It may be accessed by anyone who has a user profile on the network management system and the required command access for the commands in the routine Software that allows a session to work as if it was runn
403. ternal Systems Performance Reports Trouble Inventory Reports Trouble Tracking i Utilities gt J 493 14346 Figure 2 3 6800 Series NMS Task Menu Window 11 Move the mouse to highlight Manager on this menu and click the left mouse button to open the Manager task window Figure 2 4 E Manager m oO Hain Menu ystem Management 2 Network Contral 3 Routines 4 Queue Results 5 Schedule Items enter selection aS Maintenu BR PreuFarm Cancel 493 14259 Figure 2 4 Manager Task Window 12 To change the system time if needed in the enter selection field TYPE sdt which is the command abbreviation for the Set Date Time command PRESS Enter 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System An input form appears in which you can enter the date and time Input forms are described later in this chapter 13 TYPE the date and time Where the date is in mm dd yy format and the time in hh mm ss format PRESS F2 Go The results of the sdt command appear on a results form For additional information on the Set Time Date sdt command refer to the COMSPHERE 6600 Series Network Management System Core Command Reference Manual For information on setting up your databases and port configurations refer to Chapter 4 Full Feature Workstation Start up The full feature workstation should be installed and running MS DOS and connected via Ethern
404. the Unacknowledged string The Map displays icons undimmed and the object list names with double asterisk preceding and following the names When the alert has been automatically or manually acknowledged from the Monitor the unacknowledged text automatically disappears from the Monitor In the Map task acknowledged alerts are shown in half tones on the displays Map icons are displayed with less saturation and the double asterisk is removed from the object list names Storage Filter The storage filter determines which alert records are to be stored in the historical alert database once they are cleared Storage filters are on off filters You can change the storage filter via the Edit Storage Filter edsf command You can display the storage filter values via the Display Storage Filter dssf command Automated Action Filter Each alarm that passes the automated action AA filter can trigger to initiate Automatic Trouble Reports ATR and or generate Automatic Trouble Tickets TT For ATRs authorization must be set up in the device profile of the device reporting the alert the alert must pass the AA filter and it must be authorized by the control channel in the Edit ATR States edatrs command For automatic TTs authorization must be set up in the device profile of the device reporting the alert the alert must pass the AA filter and it must be authorized by the control channel in the Edit ATR States edatrs command
405. the Monitor and Summary tasks use the device address device name circuit name and subnetwork name fields The summary information displayed depends on the summary categories To determine the proper filter values for each incoming alert the Filter subsystem uses the device address device type device name circuit name and subnetwork name fields For reports the Trouble Inventory and Performance Reports tasks use the device profile fields The Site Profile uses the site name field The Vendor Profile uses the vendor name field To identify the endpoints of a facility the Facility Profile uses the device address device name device type site name and model number fields External Systems uses the External System name field to cut through to the appropriate external system when a device is selected from the Network Map To determine the network devices a particular user can access the User Access subsystem uses the device address and device name fields 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 5 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Device profiles maintain information for both supported and unsupported devices in the network A device is referred to as supported or managed if NMS can receive alert information from the device and it can send commands tests to the device Examples of supported devices are the ACCULINK 700 Series multiplexers the COMSPHERE devices the DATAPHONE II devices Bytex devices and ANALYSI
406. the system to recognize a 3 rather than a page down instruction Pressing the Pause Break key a second time changes the function keys back to their original meanings 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 39 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System D c ont 1 6800 pies D MA COMSPHERE 6800 NMS Tasks 1 Manager 2 flanitor 3 External Systems 4 Performance Reports 5 Troubles Inventory Reports 6 Trouble Tracking 7 Utilities enter selection MAJ 10 MIN 1 WRN 1 New Mail Tue Apr 19 22 56 1991 Help ClrField Tasks Refresh Logoff Cancel 491 13532 01 Figure 2 27 6800 Series NMS Tasks Menu on a Basic Feature Workstation Asynchronous Terminal Support The asynchronous terminal support feature provides an increase in the number of terminals and terminal emulators that can be used as basic feature workstations The following sections describe how the user interface features have been adapted to allow for this support Color If you are using a monochrome monitor basic feature workstation applications will use reverse video to achieve the same effect as a color monitor Function Keys If function keys and other keyboard keys such as Pg Up and Pg Dn are not available on your keyboard you can still access these keys To access the eight numbered function keys type the following three keys in sequence one at a time ESC f lt n gt Where lt n gt is a number from 1 thr
407. tion Management is the storage management administration and synchronization of configuration information There are some basic concepts that are used within the NMS in regard to the management of configuration data These concepts are device addressing using standardized naming conventions and the concept of network profiles Device Addressing and Standardized Naming Conventions All managed devices that are in service in the network must be identified with a unique device address The term managed device refers to a device that can report alerts to the NMS and or a device to which the NMS can send tests and commands Device addressing enables the NMS to communicate diagnostically with all network devices Within the 6800 Series NMS network device addressing is linked to protocol mode NMS supports three protocol modes These protocol modes are as follows Advanced Diagnostic Protocol ADp Mode The ADp mode can only be used with COMSPHERE devices When ADp mode is used all devices on a diagnostic circuit must be COMSPHERE devices and the devices must all be configured for ADp mode DATAPHONE II DPII Protocol Mode The DPII mode also referred to in previous releases as Mixed mode is used for all DATAPHONE II devices When DPII mode is used the devices on the diagnostic circuit can be all DATAPHONE II devices all COMSPHERE devices or a mix of DATAPHONE II devices and COMSPHERE devices where all devices must be configured for DPII
408. tion information needed to establish an NMS to AMI file export connection Configuring the NMS for File Export Steps required for configuring the 6800 Series NMS for file export are outlined below 1 Specify an NMS ID in the Edit NMS Configuration ednmsc command input form The name specified in the command form must correspond to the EMS name used for provisioning on the AMI 2 Specify file export connection and port information in the Export File Configuration efc command input form The user must specify The 6800 port number to be used for the file export connection The type of connection direct or ddd to be used The modem type if a dial up connection is used The operating speed of the port or modem The name of the receiving AMI this must be the AMI host name not an AMI workstation name The password of the nuucp login on the AMI The telephone number of the remote modem if a dial up connection is used 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 H 1 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Modem Settings For a dial up connection the AMI side modem must be optioned for auto answer the NMS side modem must be optioned for auto dial Other option settings e g speed error control must be compatible between the two modems Listed in Table H 1 are att2224ceo modem option settings for a dial up file export connection Table H 1 a
409. tional applications packages containing sets of network management features which can be purchased separately depending on your network support needs Base 6800 Series NMS Application Package Table 1 2 lists the base application package software provided with a 6800 Series NMS Software Package Base Package Table 1 2 6800 Series NMS Base Application Package Software Tasks Supported Manager Task Map Task Monitor Task Summary Task External Systems Task Trouble Inventory Reports Task Performance Reports Task Trouble Tracking Task Utilities Unix Informix etc Software Uniform Alarm Interface UAI Software Modem Management COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series APL Modems COMSPHERE 3900 Series APL Modems DATAPHONE II APL Modems DATAPHONE II 2600 2700 DSUs DATAPHONE II DDD Modems COMSPHERE 3500 Series DSUs COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSUs with and without LPDA COMSPHERE 3800 Series DDD Modems COMSPHERE 3600 Dial Backup Modules 4400 Series Service Restoration Unit SRCU Alarms only Dial Backup Unit Single and Dual Alarms only Analog Bridge Alarms only Multiplexer Management ACCULINK 731 740 741 742 74x 56K 745 Multiplexers AT amp T 719 NETWORKER Alarms only 1 22 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Optional Software Hardware Packages Table 1 3 identifies the optional software hardware packages and the devices supported by each package based on specific network
410. tional database files and directories and their backup The Automatic Backup and Restore feature will require a dedicated third 520 Mb hard disk on both the origination and the destination host processors Attempting to execute the mab or mar commands when the third hard disk is not present will result in an error message 4 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 System Administration Manual Backup and Restore The following procedures describe how to backup and restore the system database for the 6800 Series NMS To perform backup or restore you must be logged in as nms under UNIX the nms login is not within the NMS application Database backup can be performed while the NMS application is running however database restoral can only be performed when the NMS is stopped If you attempt to perform the restore procedures while the application software is running you are prompted to stop the system You will lose scheduled items in the Trouble Tracking and Trouble Inventory Reports tasks if those items have been scheduled to execute while a database backup or restore is being performed NOTE Performing backup while NMS is running can lead to a loss of data For example databases are locked sequentially during backup and thus alerts can be lost Performing System Database Backup The backup procedure is recorded in the usr tmp backuplog file which stores detailed information concerning the backup activity Use the foll
411. to NMS to expand the circuit name into its individual devices Circuit names use the form cir a a Where cir is a required prefix and system generated in the circuit name field a a is a 1 to 25 alphanumeric character name which can include alphabetic characters the digits 0 through 9 and the special characters dash and dot For example cir model2 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 E 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Device Addresses Device addresses which indicate the diagnostic location of the device can be entered in the Device s field When the device type protocol mode and model number are known NMS checks the address entered for proper format When only an address is entered NMS validates the address using the address validation process explained earlier in this appendix Refer to Appendix D for more information on addressing devices Device Names When a Device s or Node s field is used within a task you can supply any of the following device identifications as the device name Device address e Device name e Circuit name e Serial number e Network name e P address Multiple entries separated by commas or spaces and the special wildcard characters asterisk exception character and question mark are allowed NMS expands all values you enter to individual device records as found in the current device profile database This expansion is performed ind
412. to the extended devices another modem pair can be added to the chain and monitored by the 6800 Series NMS When network devices are added beyond the three layers normally supported by the 6800 Series NMS the modem directly interfacing with the extended level must be re optioned and a device profile must be created for the extended control modem The system polling status field in the device profile of the extended control modem as well as its local control modem must be set to active The 6800 Series NMS then accesses extended network devices diagnostically as part of the 6800 Series NMS poll list by issuing the device health and status poll command to the extended control devices Extended control modems poll their tributaries and transmit fault and status information back to the 6800 Series NMS Tests and commands can be directed to extended control modems in a way exactly analogous to other devices in the network Extended Addressing The limits of extended polling are defined by network addressing Extended polling allows up to four levels of network addressing four network addresses can follow the local address in the link level addressing scheme refer to Figure D 4 The last one or two addresses represent the extended network devices To communicate with these devices you must add the address of the tributary modem directly preceding the extended control device in the link level address The tributary modem marks the limit that the 68
413. to the previous map view The new mapview has the same midpoint as the previous map view with more geographic area displayed This zoom selection does not work if the current map view is at maximum magnification world view If appropriate the NMS changes site icons to cluster icons NOTE Increasing or decreasing the map magnification can result in changes to the aggregation of sites For example when you magnify a portion of the map that contains a composite site cluster icon the composite site may change to multiple single sites Zoom In To SubView This selection requires you to define a subview called a candidate subview Functionally you create a candidate subview the same as a subview previously explained in the Set Default View selection section However zooming in on a candidate subview is a two step process NMS does not create a new map view until you select the Zoom in to Subview selection 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System To create a candidate subview do the following steps 1 Press and hold the middle mouse button with the mouse pointer at a point on the map where the box outline should begin With the button down drag the mouse in the direction that encompasses the new subview Dragging the mouse expands the box in the direction of the mouse When the new candidate subview is boxed release the mouse button The box remains on your screen Rep
414. tt2224ceo Modem Option Settings Modem 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 5 6 S1 7 1 8 07 012 034 051 NMS end D D D DUD D D n y 1 y AMI end D D D DUD D D y y 1 y Listed in Table H 2 are the att2224ceo switch and option settings Table H 2 att2224ceo Switch and Option Settings 1 1 D CTS and CD follow DTR U CTS and CD follow EIA RS 232 C standard 1 2 D Option changes enabled U Option changes disabled S 3 D Enter command mode with carriage return U Enter command mode with at or atz sequence 1 4 5 6 Control speed and mode DUD is 2400 async operation 1 7 D Modem interprets commands sent by DTE U Modem ignores commands sent by DTE 07 Auto answer enabled 012 Transparent data mode enabled 034 034 1 operate as standard modem without error control 051 CTS controlled by RTS January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 File Export to ACCUMASTER Integrator Location Object Class Data from the NMS site profiles will be mapped into the LOCATION object of the AMI File Import FI data as shown in Table H 3 Table H 3 LOCATION Object Class NMP Corresponding Corresponding File Message Element NMS Information Import Information Location ID Site Name Site Name Location Type CUSTOMER 0 Customer Location Details Site Contact Name when present Site Contact Name when present Site Contact Number when present Site Contact Phone Number when present Site Contact Address when present NULL when neither present NULL
415. tton twice in quick succession reopens the iconified window 2 24 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Up Down Arrow Icons Maximize and Minimize Icons The Up maximize and Down minimize Arrow icons enlarge or reduce the size of the open window Full Feature Workstation Windows The X Window System is the windowing environment on the full feature workstation You can open multiple windows into a single task or into different tasks Although multiple windows can be open simultaneously on a workstation only one window can be active at any given time that is accepting keyboard input When you first open a task window it automatically becomes the active window A window can be activated manually by clicking on the title bar NMS automatically updates the contents of all open windows whether they are inactive or iconified A Sun Workstation when used as a full feature workstation uses the OPEN LOOK Graphical User Interface This manual describes the OSF Motif Graphical Interface For information on OPEN LOOK see the your OPEN LOOK documentation NOTE The full feature workstation should be operated with the Num Lock key in the On position The Num Lock key enables the numeric keypad at the far right of the keyboard This key is automatically placed in the correct state when the workstation is started If after workstation start up Num Lock is toggled Off window control functions like iconify resize a
416. twork Management System Reports and Trouble Tracking Customization Guide Mail Functions You can send and receive mail based on the UNIX mailx command There are minor differences among task windows on how you are notified of new mail e g between a full feature workstation and a basic feature workstation between the Trouble Tickets function and the System Management function etc 9 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Utilities Read Mail From a full feature workstation you can select Read Mail by clicking on the Mail Notification icon in the upper left hand corner From a basic feature workstation select Read Mail from the Utilities task Incoming mail files are stored in a standard mailbox for each user The user can then read save delete and respond to messages As new messages are read they are moved to a secondary file with the default name of mbox However other secondary files for mail storage can also be created by the user Messages remain in the secondary file until explicitly removed by the user On selecting the Read Mail function from the Utilities menu the following query appears Enter a mailbox name or press Return key to read new mail If you press the Enter Return key a screen listing all new N messages received and unread U messages Figure 9 2 appears Each message is assigned a sequential number and the current message is marked by a greater than sign gt A message list msglist is an opti
417. twork test repetitively performed and packaged into one concise graphic or tabular form rather than numerous separate forms It allows the review of the performance of specified devices through scheduled network testing The user specifies the test the number of tests and the interval between tests as well as the form the results will take either graphic or tabular display A modem or DSU that is for diagnostic purposes at a logically subsidiary level in a hierarchical network Tributary devices in a network receive data from the control device as well as from any network management system present in the network A 6800 Series NMS feature by which specific device problems are detailed The ticket includes a tracking log that automatically lists changes made to the ticket when the changes were made and who made them thereby providing a continually updated account of the repair process Trouble tickets can be user created or automatically generated when an automated action filter is exceeded A supported device with no device profile A 6800 Series NMS alarm protocol that can be configured to transfer alerts and alarms from the NMS to other network management systems that might accept it The NMS defined site that contains those devices for which the user does not assign a site name A site whose city and country code or the city and country codes cannot be mapped to a geographic location and whose longitude and latitude fields
418. ty display profile A device that permits the expansion of the StarLAN network by connecting workstations and processors in a star configuration A feature of the 6800 Series NMS that provides views of the network configuration at various levels It supports Geographic Maps Connectivity Maps and an Object List A front end microprocessor providing the diagnostic interface between the modem network and the NMS processor It is used to poll control modems for network health and status and to send user initiated tests and commands to specific network devices An NMU can be internal to an NMS processor or external or a standalone unit A view of the network map which displays all the sites in the network A device on a diagnostic tree See diagnostic tree A multiplexer such as a 740 745 or 719 with built in packet switching and control network software Any task function or routine which can be performed by the system when instructed to do so A group of 6800 Series NMS commands or tests identified by a common name that can be accessed or executed only by the network management system user who created the group of commands See system routine An AT amp T Paradyne modem component that characterizes the modem s speed features and applications A single data transport channel connecting two modems and their associated peripherals See multipoint The continuous process by which NMS solicits information network H
419. u Tree Hierarchy The NMS menu hierarchy is illustrated in the COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Quick Reference Guide It shows a menu path to all tasks their options and commands supported by the NMS User Interface on a Full Feature Workstation When using the full feature workstation the user interface differs based on the task You can use the mouse in Manager Map Monitor Summary Performance Reports External Systems and Utilities tasks but not in the Trouble Inventory Reports and Trouble Tracking tasks The following sections describe the various user interfaces used by different NMS tasks on a full feature workstation NOTE Pressing the Pause Break key changes the meaning of the function keys For example if you are in a UNIX window and you press the Pause Break key rather than the DEL key and then open a Manager window pressing the PgDn key causes the system to recognize a 3 rather than a page down instruction Pressing the Pause Break key a second time changes the function keys back to their original meanings 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 33 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Key Descriptions for Menu Displays The function keys available for use in the NMS menus are listed at the bottom of the window These functions keys can be selected via a mouse or by pressing the corresponding keyboard function key These functions are defined as follows Help F1 D
420. uality rsq All Levels Yes Yes Manager Receive Signal rss Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Indicates what is shown on the screen T Indicates that this is a new command for this release B 14 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Command Access Levels Table B 1 14 of 15 Commands and their Access Levels Default User Accessed Command Abbrev Access Routine Schedule From Restore Node Database rstrnd Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Remote Digital rdl Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Loopback Administrator Remote Physical Link rpll Manager Yes Yes Manager Loopback Administrator Report Diagnostic Status rds All Levels Yes Yes Manager Report Terminal Power rtp All Levels Yes Yes Manager Reset Control Processor rcp Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Read Mail No No access level No No Utilities abbreviation assigned Send File Export snef Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Send Mail No No access level No No Utilities abbreviation assigned Send Message snm All Levels Yes Yes Manager alt smsg Send Tone snt Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Service Line si Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator Set Date Time sdt Administrator No No Manager Signal Profile sp All Levels Yes Yes Manager Standby Facility sf Data Tech Manager Yes Yes Manager Administrator
421. uit from the workspace menu and Confirm OK 2 Select Quit Xone from the subsequent notice box The MS DOS C prompt appears 3 To restart the full feature workstation at the C gt prompt TYPE xone PRESS Enter Shutting Down a Basic Feature Workstation After you have completed the NMS tasks and are ready to leave the system you should exit the NMS and NMW applications To shut down the basic feature workstation perform the following steps 1 From the 6800 Series NMS Tasks menu PRESS F7 to logoff the NMS The NMS Logoff window appears Figure 2 11 Please confirm your wish to terminate the session with HMS 491 13559 Figure 2 11 NMS Logoff Window 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 17 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System 2 The Port n 6800 Series window showing the confirmer appears Figure 2 12 where n or 2 Use the arrow keys to shift between selections To confirm that this is what you want to do and to logoff PRESS Enter Please confirm your wish to terminate the session with 491 13560 Figure 2 12 Port n 6800 Series Window 3 To exit the session PRESS Alt s or click on Session with the left mouse button The Session menu appears Figure 2 13 Session Break Exit About HH 491 13169 Figure 2 13 Session Menu 2 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started 4 To exit PRESS x or click on the Exit option with the left mouse b
422. uld be the same abbreviations for two different commands The command abbreviation is listed next to the command name on the menus You enter command abbreviations from your keyboard in lowercase letters 2 50 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started Most NMS command results can be sent to specified destinations and scheduled for execution at specified times These form fields are discussed later in this chapter Command Forms You use input forms to provide parameters needed by a command for execution Results forms provide you with the command s results after execution The results can be specific information or a message indicating execution success or failure When a command uses multiple pages of an input form each page is given a sequential page number Page numbers appear in the upper right hand corner of the form Input Forms Figure 2 33 shows an example of an input form B Manager Bag REQUIRED l COMMAND HANE P 1 FIELD a mes CARRIED OVER Ch l 4 one group MNNEHEM Lin Endpoint nodes nnn nnn Capacity O HONAL i 2 FIELD Restricted to network compatible na DISPLAY ONLY FIELD Figure 2 33 Sample Input Form Input forms have different types of fields These fields are described as follows e Display only fields are protected fields that display pre determined or previouslyspecified information which cannot be changed on the current form These fields are not highlighted on the
423. ummary However the 6800 Series NMS cannot actively poll or test any device in the ANALYSIS network Direct management of these devices is done using the External Systems cut through Two methods of establishing a cut through to the ANALYSIS NMS are available Cut through may be made through the IPC 900 dedicated to the ANALYSIS NMS or through the optional IPC 1600 which is for general use For systems with connection to one or two ANALYSIS systems the IPC 900 should be sufficient users connected to more ANALYSIS systems will find the IPC 1600 cut through to be easier and more efficient Users should note that the IPC 1600 does not replace the dedicated IPC 900 link which must be used for transmission of all alerts profiles and print jobs to from the ANALYSIS NMS Notes on External Systems Interface to Bytex Switch Unity Management System The 6800 Series NMS provides interface cut through access to the Bytex Unity Management System UMS or to the Bytex U30 or U50 switches The external systems features provides the capability for a 6800 Series NMS workstation to simulate a direct connection to the UMS or to the Bytex switches Management of any parts of or devices connected to the Bytex switch must be accomplished through the external systems cut through Notes on 6800 Series NMS X Window Cut Through The 6800 Series NMS provides a cut through feature only available via a full feature workstation The cut through access simulates a workstation
424. upporting up to 42 simultaneous users The system runs on the Altos System 15000 This system is configured with two UIPs and requires three hard drives to support automatic database backup This system also features 16 control channels as standard See Table 1 1 6800 Series NMS System Capacities later in this chapter for other capacity specifications 6800 Series NMS Features List The following list highlights the major 6800 Series NMS features A description of each feature follows the list e Modular System Design e User Configurable Ports Integrated Device Support Database Management and Network Control e INFORMIX Relational Database System 1 2 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Introduction Menu and Command Oriented Multi Window User Interface with Online Help Feature User Access Security with Customization Capabilities Logical Network Partitioning with Customization Capabilities Alert Filters with Customization Capabilities Dynamic Graphic and Textual Representations of the Network Coupled with an Audible Alarm Feature Real Time Textual Notification of Alerts with Customization Capabilities Real Time Alert Matrix by Category with Customization Capabilities Multiplexer Support Modem DSU SRCU Support External Systems Access via cut through sessions 3270 Terminal Emulation Providing Access to SNA Based Hosts and Software for Altos 5000 Systems Only VT100 Terminal Emulation Asynchronous Terminal Support Sun
425. us is logged to this trouble ticket If an alert clears while the ATR is pending NMS still sends the ATR 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 7 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System ATR Capacity If an open trouble ticket exists for a specific modem and alert type and another alert of the same type for the same device passes the automatic action filter NMS does not open another trouble ticket For a multiplexer the criteria is the unique alert ID In both cases NMS initiates another ATR if authorized and updates the open trouble ticket with the new ATR information NMS can also generate a trouble ticket when an alert exceeds the automated action filter This trouble ticket is automatically generated only if the device profile authorizes the automatic trouble ticket If an Automatic Trouble Report ATR cannot be sent mail is no longer generated reporting this problem to the user An event is now generated with the alert type of atr alert group of sys com and associated with the system device The text of the event is ATR not sent device name atr atr phone number The atr phone number field can be port if that is what has been defined in the atr phone directory or a telephone number or NO ATR PHONE NO if the atr phone directory does not have either a telephone number or port defined ATR Administration Initialize ATR Ports The NMS System Administrator performs a number of administration and initialization fu
426. user and vendor data A diagnostic transmission path between the NMS and collocated control modems or other control devices A modem or DSU that communicates with several remote modems or DSUs called tributary modems over one channel The control modem DSU polls tributary modems DSUs for health and status A type of access or terminal emulation from a window or NMS to another computer system A logical collection of information A data packet used to implement message transmissions between multiplexers and NMS these can include alerts configuration commands etc Equipment such as APL modems DSUs DBUs and DDD modems supported by the 6800 Series NMS The diagnostic mode that provides for networks containing only DATAPHONE II devices and DATAPHONE II NMS or networks containing a mixture of AT amp T DATAPHONE II modems with NMS and AT amp T Paradyne Model 2 modems with 6800 Series NMS Also referred to as mixed mode A DCE device that interprets interfaces and provides timing and signal control between a DTE device and a digital network Any piece of equipment at which a communications path begins source or ends sink This equipment provides the protocol for communication e g host computer terminal GL 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Glossary default deiconification device group device profile diagnostic channel DC diagnostic compatibility Diagnostic Control Device DCD
427. utton The Network Management Workstation main window appears Figure 2 14 Connect 491 13166 Figure 2 14 Network Management Workstation Main Window 5 To close the NMW application PRESS Alt c then to exit PRESS x or click on Connect and then on Exit with the left mouse button The following message box Figure 2 15 appears 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 2 19 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System o This will close all application windows Cancel 491 13170 Figure 2 15 Closing Warning Message Box Shown for Windows 3 0 6 To close all NMW application windows PRESS Enter or click on OK with the left mouse button to confirm that this is what you want to do The NMW application is closed and the MS DOS Executive or AT amp T Program Manager window appears NOTE If you are using Windows 2 1 continue with Step 7 If you are using Windows 3 0 go to Step 10 at this point in the procedure 7 For Windows 2 1 users click on the File option with the left mouse button Then TYPE x or click on Exit with the left mouse button The End Session message box shown in Figure 2 16 appears 2 20 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Getting Started File View Special 11 AN This will end your Windows session Cancel 491 13530 Figure 2 16 The End Session Message Box In this message box PRESS Enter or click on OK with the left mouse button
428. ve See ben a ISI GI VUE ERO DET E 7 Keyword None seb nes re EAR Whe CU We IER DESERT E 7 Alert Groups and Alert Types 02 0 cece cece cece eee E 7 Circuit Names see ER he Be ee NE ce IN va E 7 Device Addresses oM EAEVUTIPISARAaAA M AESLORE PEDE E 8 Device Names shoe 045 ape eis TRIS NW SS NV ORI EO RE E 8 DEVICE Types kooclieicebbpuhebe0eeveNiewuetruerpibvTediele eU DATA E 8 External System Names 0 0 cece eee E 10 Facility Names represe dete vepres Teh hee dae E 10 Device Names for Addressing 0 cece cece eee eee nee E 11 Serial Numbers mrsa eee ue EISE EO RASA E 11 Site Names 235 vester Pee Se PE Meee ESSE E 11 Network Names 00 0 e cece cece eee teen ene n ene neee E 12 Vendor Names ou mee UPEUAERUEMEUUFUOPEdDRn eee ow ania etl E 12 Routine Names tii h cse Uo Es Ua eed koh E 12 IP AddrteS8 4i eres Le em RU acie M RAM E es etie ers E 12 Overview In addition to device addressing the 6800 Series NMS also offers a device naming method The naming conventions allow you to assign a name to a device and to assign a network or circuit name to a group of logically related devices such as those devices sharing a common customer location or application You can then reference or test a group of devices a network or a circuit by entering a single name The device names circuit names and network names first must be entered in the device profile and then may be used interchangeably with the
429. vice names etc Appendix E of this document provides you with detailed information on the NMS naming conventions The Concept of Network Profiles Configuration management allows you to manage the details of your network configurations By consolidating this network configuration data into specific database files based on the type of configuration data being stored the system is able to present you with four different network views or profiles of your configuration These network profiles are device site facility and vendor profiles The idea of a profile is used to group data related to specific network elements in a logical table Each profile is therefore a separate view of the database Each database view enables you to manage different aspects of your configuration The four network profiles provide three main types of configuration data for the NMS The configuration data types are as follows Device Configuration Data This data describes the configuration of each device The device profiles are used to store this information Network Data This data describes the physical location of network devices as well as supplying the vendor information related to each device The site profiles are used to store the physical location data The vendor profiles are used to store the vendor information for the equipment Connectivity Data This data describes the connections and facilities that connect the devices in the network The facilit
430. voke a specific pre defined function Key sequences are used to invoke basic commands e g logoff tasks refresh etc from the keyboard The ability of one product to communicate over a line facility with another product For example an AT amp T Paradyne 3400 Series Model 1 modem at one end of a facility can communicate with a Model 2 modem at the other end The physical endpoint of a facility connecting two T1 multiplexers For Map uses a graphical representation of composite object The estimated roundtrip delay in a diagnostic link immediately downstream from the specific modem Address for a particular device that is a concatenation of network addresses It begins with the device immediately downstream from the starting device control channel address includes all intermediate devices and ends with the destination device Also known as sequential address In DATAPHONE II diagnostic mode the address of a device on the control channel It is derived from the shelf slot numbers for DATAPHONE II devices and from the network address for Model 2 modems The latter is assigned by the user Local area network such as TCP IP A type of high speed data communications arrangement in which all segments of the transmission medium are in an office environment under the control of the network user Addressing scheme used in networks in which the addresses of all intermediate devices including the tributary modems are included in th
431. vp or Edit Site Profile edsp commands as needed 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 3 7 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Facility Profiles Site Profiles The facility profiles contain information that describe a facility and define the endpoint devices and their interface to that facility These profiles maintain information for the facilities in the network The set of all facilities connecting to a specific device provides the necessary data for creating Connectivity Maps The facility profile data is also used by the multiplexer application to determine multiplexer node connectivity You access connectivity maps using the Map task These maps are discussed in Chapter 6 Use the Create Facility Profile crfp command to create a facility profile You identify each facility by its name connectivity characteristics and endpoint devices You identify each endpoint device by its type of facility interface the slot number if applicable for the circuit card that connects the facility and the interface identity or port number for the facility termination You are able to create facilities with two endpoints stub facilities facilities that have only a single device endpoint and facilities that connect a device to itself Use the following commands to change delete or list the facility profiles in your NMS Delete Facility Profile difp Deletes an existing facility profile from the profile database Display F
432. ware Version Number Remarks e Device Data data provided by the device profile Device Address Device Name Subnetwork Name Serial Number Model Number Device Type e Site Information data provided by Site Profile Site Name e Device User Contact Information data provided by the profile that authorized the ATR User Contact Name User Contact Telephone Number User Contract Address e Trouble Information data provided by the Trouble Database Alert Group Alert Type Alert Date Alert Time e Alert Driven Routine Information data provided by the device profile ADR Authorization ADR Routine Name ADR Destination ADR User ID 7 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Trouble Tracking You can generate the following standard reports for printing or viewing information on a collection of trouble tickets e ATR Report A summary of the calls made to the service center for ATRs that automatically generated trouble tickets e Detailed Trouble Ticket Report A detailed listing of trouble tickets which match a set of user defined criteria These reports are generated through the Trouble Ticketing Reports portion of the Trouble Inventory Reports task and are discussed in Chapter 8 Generating Automatic Trouble Tickets A trouble ticket is automatically generated when an alert exceeds the automated action filter and the device profile authorizes
433. what user applications or devices are affected The Connectivity Map icons representing network elements are color coded for visual recognition of current alert priority status Refer to Chapter 2 for additional information on color coded alert priorities Refer to Appendix C for graphic representations of all Connectivity Map icons You can also view all available icons by selecting while in any Connectivity Map window 6 18 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Map Monitor and Summary Tasks Table 6 3 lists the selections available from the Connectivity Map windows and also specifies under what conditions they are available Table 6 3 Connectivity Map Window Operations Based on Icon Selection Window Option Device Icon Link Icon Alert Available only when icon is in alert state Available only when icon is in alert state Management invokes a submenu invokes a submenu Connectivity Always available Available only for a simple link icon Map Network Control Available only if the External System field Available from a simple link icon Invokes of the device profile defines an external Map Manager submenu system name or if the device type field is one of the following apl ddd dds mux ntwk 56mux swtch Network Profile Invokes Map Manager submenu Invokes Map Manager submenu Object List Available only if there exists one device whose parent device field in the device s device profile m
434. when neither present Geographic Coordinates Type NPA NXX when Country Code is 1 2 NPA NXX when Country Code is 1 Null when Country Code is not 1 Null when Country Code is not 1 Geographic Coordinates First six digits of City Code when Country Code is 1 First six digits of City Code when Country Code is 1 Null when Country Code is not 1 Null when Country Code is not 1 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Equipment Object Class Data from the device profiles will be mapped into the EQUIPMENT object of the AMI File Import data in Table H 4 Table H 4 EQUIPMENT Object Class NMP Corresponding Corresponding File Message Element NMS Information Import Information Equipment ID Device Name See Table H 5 Equipment Type See Table H 6 See Table H 6 Location Name Site Name when present Site Name when present Unnamed when not present Unnamed when not present present State 0 when Inventory State is o or s 0 when Inventory State is o or s 50 when Inventory State is a or 50 when Inventory State is a or 150 when Inventory State is r 150 when Inventory State is r 255 when Inventory State is i 255 when Inventory State is i Release Hardware Software Version when Hardware Software Version when present not used when not present NULL when not present Equipment Alias
435. within the carrier D 12 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Device Addressing NOTE The COMSPHERE 3600 Series DSU modem stores its own network address internally If you change advanced to DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode the DSU automatically calculates its own local address directly from this network address when the DSU is at the head of a DATAPHONE II diagnostic tree NOTE Short form addressing is not allowed in ADp mode C This segment represents the tributary device network address ranges from 1 to 256 for point to point and multipoint Tributary DSUs on multipoint circuits are restricted to network addresses ranging from 1 to 256 D This segment represents the extended downstream control device network address ranges from 1 to 256 E This segment represents the extended downstream tributary device network address ranges from 1 to 256 for point to point and multipoint Additional circuits can be extended beyond E up to five levels deep ADp Mode COMSPHERE 3800 3900 Series Modem Addressing Each 3800 3900 Series modem on the 6800 Series NMS poll list has a unique address which is composed of a string of numbers NOTE The COMSPHERE 3800 3900 Series modems do not allow or support connections downstream of the device Therefore where the modem is configured constitutes the end of the network In the following figure if the 3800 3900 Series modem is B the network ends at B if
436. wo tables alert group names are shown with a bold m prefix Substitute one of the actual device types mux swtch or 56mux for the prefix Table 5 5 describes each ANM generated alert and suggests possible corrective actions If the corrective actions do not solve the problem contact your service representative Table 5 3 ANM Generated Alerts Events Major Alert Group Model Minor Alert s Textual Display Number Code m nmsevt2 all 00 128 Device Database mismatch 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 23 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Table 5 4 ANM Generated Alerts Events Model Major Alert Group Minor Alert s Textual Display Number C ode m nmsalm2 all 00 02 Internal error sending command to device 00 04 Device Agent protocol error m alarm1 all 00 00 Node not responding to polls 00 06 Cannot route commands to device Table 5 5 ANM Generated Alerts Descriptions Corrective Actions Major Minor Descriptions Corrective Action Code 00 00 Node not responding to polls This alarm occurs if the NMS is able to route poll commands to the device but the device is not returning responses Verify that the node is in service If it is not turn off polling of the device by editing the device profile If it is run diagnostics to isolate the fault 00 02 Internal error sending command to device This alarm may occur because of a fl
437. y of the other tributary devices AT amp T Paradyne s open architecture software running under IBM s NetView PC Program Product It provides a service point from which all AT amp T Paradyne network alarms for IBM NetView users are displayed In the broad sense all modems multiplexers and facilities interconnected for diagnostics and control by the network management system In a restricted sense e g addressing all modems connected to the same control channel The network for 6800 Series NMS is defined to be all devices downstream from the NMS The user assigned identification number for a particular device The network address is used by a node to communicate with other nodes connected to it An RS 232 port on a 745 or 740 multiplexer providing control access to the ACCULINK Series 700 multiplexer network It can be configured to interface with any ASCII terminal printer or the 6800 Series NMS The site profile data that describes the physical location of network devices and vendor profile data that describes the providers of equipment facilities or services for the network The sum of all link delays downstream from a given modem GL 8 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Glossary Network Hub Unit NHU network map Network Monitoring Unit NMU network view node operation personal routine personality module point to point circuit polling port address primary data network priori
438. y profiles are used to store this data in the database 3 4 January 1997 6800 A2 GE26 20 Configuration Device Profiles Device profiles are detailed operational descriptions which are created by the user for each of the NMS network devices Although you do not need a device profile for the NMS to receive an alert from a device you do need a device profile for complete identification of the device that reported the alert Information stored in device profiles is accessed and referenced by other profiles and subsystems in NMS 1 10 11 12 For various map displays the Map task uses the device address device name model number device type NMS support inventory device position parent device restoral circuit type ports and site name fields For trouble ticket and report generation the Trouble Ticket task and ATR system use the device address device name model number device type serial number site name user contact and trouble ticket and ATR authorization fields For UAI message information and generation the UAI system uses the device address device name model number device type and UAI authorization fields To properly validate the reported device identification and to code the message transaction to the device the device tests and commands use the device address device type serial number subnetwork name circuit name and protocol mode fields For display on the network monitor and summary
439. y two points As an example a Connectivity Map in shown in Figure 5 2 The Connectivity Map uses standard icons for displaying devices These icons are discussed in Chapter 2 Icon graphics are shown in Appendix C Refer to Chapter 6 for a detailed description of Connectivity Maps and their use You can also perform external system cut throughs from the Map for direct access to network devices You can clear events and acknowledge alerts External system cut throughs are described in Chapter 3 E EL m nadel l nada207 nadel11 d c d c nade245 greensbora ij commu 493 14269 Figure 5 2 Sample Connectivity Map for Multiplexers 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 5 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Monitor Task Support The Monitor task provides displays showing new alerts and updated information on existing alerts It also enables you to acknowledge alerts and clear events The task display shows a date and time stamp of when the alert occurred the device name model number and network address the type of alert the network name where the alert occurred displays for multiplexers only if there is a device profile for the multiplexer and a message indicating what problem occurred The Monitor task and the functions that can be performed from the Monitor are discussed later in this section and in Chapter 6 of this manual Summary Task Support The Summary task displays the to
440. yne DDD dial 1 Alert text varies depending on dial failure Modems dad call dd 3 DDD line active ddd device df 1 Device failure ht Hold time md Modem failure na No answer nr Diagnostic failure tdm TDM failure dad attf attf 3 Dial tone test failure ddd facility fa 1 Facility alarm ddd message cm 3 Call mode ccn Configuration change trnc Subtree truncation ddd power rps 2 Redundant power supply ddd service as 3 Abnormal operating speed dsab Modem disabled fd Firmware download in progress pci Primary channel interrupt mb Make busy sl Service line tm Test mode ddd terminal el 1 External lead alarm pf Port failure DTE alarm sr Streaming terminal ddd threshold th 1 Parameter threshold exceeded DDS dds backup dc 2 Dial connect dial mode dial standby COMSPHERE dds busy busy 3 Busy DATAPHONE Il and dds call swch cm 3 Call switch Paradyne Digital dds ccn ccn 3 Configuration change Data Service Units dds device df 1 Device failure dds disabled dsab 3 Modem disabled dds dttf dttf 3 Dial tone test failure dds facility fa 1 Facility alarm dds frnt pnl dm 3 Device control mode front panel control dds modem md 1 Modem failure dds mtnc mode mm 3 Maintenance mode dds no rspnse nr 1 No response dds port fail pf 1 Port failure DTE alarm or problem dds power rps 2 Redundant power supply or fan problem dds s term sr 1 Streaming terminal dds speed as 3 Abnormal operating speed dds tdm tdm 1 TDM failure dds test mode tm 1 Test Mode dds th
441. you are using an asynchronous terminal see Chapter 2 for information on paging 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 6 33 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Color coding of the text also indicates the priority mapped for the alarm For color coding information refer back to Chapter 2 The Monitor Pause Continue Feature You can use the Monitor s Pause Continue feature to stop the Monitor from scrolling so you can view the alerts While the Pause feature is in effect alerts slated for the Monitor are placed in a temporary buffer storage area in the system until alert display is resumed At this time the alerts in the buffer display on the Monitor and normal processing continues You can pause the display of alerts for a duration of one minute then the system automatically resumes the display of alerts To temporarily pause alert display to the Monitor select the Pause command button at the bottom of the Monitor window The Pause button listed at the bottom of the window changes to Continue the background color of the Pause button changes to red and the following message appears Please select Continue to resume real time monitoring To manually resume reporting on a full feature workstation click on Continue or move with the left mouse button On a basic feature workstation press the F2 key to continue The Monitor resumes real time reporting of alerts and the Continue button at the bottom of your window change
442. you wish to canel a print job n Enter printer you want status of default is all type for infa q to quit f 493 14291 Figure 9 6 Printer Status Screen The System Administrator can cancel a print job by typing y in response to the Do you wish to cancel a print job prompt then entering the selected print job number in response to the Enter the job number prompt 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 9 9 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Move Print Jobs The Move Print Jobs function enables you to redirect print requests currently stored in the printer s queue from one system printer to another Figure 9 7 Typically this function is used if a printer becomes disabled House Print Jobs r m Do you want to move all print jobs from a printer queue y n type for info q to quit From printer printerl To printer zl 493 14292 Figure 9 7 Move Print Jobs Screen User Interface Processor UIP If the User Interface Processor UIP is installed this selection appears on the Utilities main menu The UIP selection is used to bring up UNIX on the UIP processor The UNIX selection on the menu brings up UNIX on the host processor On 15000 Systems the UIP selection on the Utilities menu provides access to only that UIP that your workstation is logically connected to Multiplexer Utilities If the multiplexer application is installed this selection appears
443. ypical 3400 4400 Series modem address eee ee E extended downstream tributary device network address D downstream control device network address C downstream device network address B control device network address M XXXY YTSH A control channel 491 11941 01 Figure D 6 Typical COMSPHERE 3400 4400 Series Modem Advanced Mode Address A This segment is the control channel on which the device is located The control channel identification can be a number from 1 to 8 for a 6800 Series NMS B This segment is the control device s network address which can range in value from 1 to 256 NOTE The 3400 4400 Series modem stores its own network address internally If you change Advanced to DATAPHONE II diagnostic protocol mode the modem automatically calculates its own local address from this network address when the modem is at the head of a DATAPHONE II diagnostic tree 6800 A2 GE26 20 January 1997 D 11 COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System NOTE Short form addressing is not allowed in ADp mode C This segment represents the tributary device network address ranges from 1 to 256 for g p y g point to point 1 to 32 for multipoint D This segment represents the control device network address ranges from 1 to 256 for 8 p 8 point to point 1 to 32 for multipoint E This segment represents the tributary device network address ranges from 1 to 256 for 8 Pp y 8 point

COMSPHERE 6800 SERIES NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents